JP6856866B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game) ) The mainstream is a pachinko machine that shifts to the state and can win a large number of prize balls by opening the large winning opening provided on the game board surface. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of the probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and the symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player based on these game states.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-77519 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-77441 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-22255 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-225258

However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that realizes further novel game playability.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) has a predetermined number of balls or a variable winning opening (for example, a predetermined period has elapsed). For example, it is provided with a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can make the large winning opening C10) advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game, which is a predetermined number of execution times at the time of executing the special game, a high probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to obtain,
It is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) and a game ball that has been discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10).
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is less than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of excessive discharge abnormality.
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is larger than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of insufficient discharge abnormality.
When the unit game to be executed next time is a unit game having an execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the unit game which is the execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the special game. Is configured to detect the occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality when the next unit game to be executed is a unit game in which the predetermined execution times are performed.
The occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality is detected during the execution of the special game, and even if the insufficient discharge abnormality is not resolved, the execution of the special game can be completed and the identification information is fluctuated after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to be able to
The detection of the game ball entered in the variable winning opening and the game ball discharged outside the variable winning opening is interrupted without clearing the detection result over the unit game of all execution times during the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it can be continuously executed without any problems.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, further novel game performance can be realized in a gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball entry process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of an out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and the payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of an error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error notification execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 2 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 3 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 4 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is an error control list 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 74 is an error control list 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 75 is a signal output pattern correspondence table in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 76 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an operation diagram relating to the second major winning opening according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the V winning opening ball entry determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5-1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 5-2 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 6 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 7 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 106 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 7-1 on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 109 is an error control list 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a perspective view relating to the structure of the large winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 112 is an operation diagram relating to the opening and closing of the large winning opening and the shielding member during the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the discharge ball excess determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of a ball entry / discharge measurement process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of a round execution initial process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a specific area entry determination process A on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the specific area entry determination process B on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the discharge ball shortage determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 126 is an operation diagram relating to a special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 127 is an action diagram relating to a special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 128 is an operation diagram relating to a special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a list of error control in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of a discharge ball shortage determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the specific area entry determination process B in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the discharge ball shortage determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of an error command reception control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 138 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 8 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an external terminal transmission content determination table 9 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a jackpot end demo time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a flowchart of a small hit end demo time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a flowchart of a small hit start demo time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a flowchart of a big hit middle effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart of a small hit-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of a left (right) general winning opening ball detection process on the sub-control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the first main game short-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the first main game long-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the left general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the left general winning opening long-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the right general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of the right general winning opening long-term ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of a left (right) general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flowchart of a ball entry rate determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is a main control board. The identification information is displayed and controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action images, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by a computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, it is any one or a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). The "expected average execution time of the easy-to-enter ball game per unit time" assumes a situation in which the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is constantly changed (for example, a situation in which a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol always exists). In the case, it means the ratio of the opening period to the unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example. , When a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called opening extension function operating state / non-operating state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called high-probability state / low-probability state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called normal-figure fluctuation shortening function non-operating state / operating state), It is realized by any one or a plurality of combinations such as.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the conditions of the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, and the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with the time reduction game, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not deviate significantly from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate. The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the open time extension function is activated, and the non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not activated. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reducing gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a high-probability lottery state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a low-probability lottery state.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. The pachinko gaming machine is roughly divided into a gaming machine frame D and a gaming board Da, and the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the game machine frame D and the game board Da will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (also called a glass unit) D16, a door unit (also called a glass door) D18, and a ball plate unit D17. (Including the upper ball plate D20, the lower ball plate D22, and the launch handle D44) are mainly configured.

The outer frame unit D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed, and is a frame body for up, down, left and right (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e, left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b). And the curtain plate D12c are appropriately assembled in a frame shape to form a unit. Here, a pair of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 are fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outside for locking the front frame unit D14 is attached to the right frame rod D12b. The locking bracket (not shown) on the frame side is fixed. Further, in the present embodiment, the curtain plate D12c is provided with a speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the game state, and the left and right frame rods (left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b) are moved up and down by metal. The frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e) are made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

The front frame unit D14 is a frame body whose outer size matches the opening portion of the outer frame unit D12, and includes a front frame hinge D12a-1 and a locking metal fitting (not shown) provided in the outer frame unit D12, and a front frame unit D14. A hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to these) and a locking device (not shown) provided at appropriate positions of the frame unit D14 allow the outer frame unit D12 to be laterally opened / closed and locked.

The front frame unit D14 has a launching mechanism for launching a game ball, a game board accommodating mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for awarding a prize ball, and guiding or guiding a gamed ball. A gamed ball discharge mechanism or the like for collecting is provided. In the present embodiment, the game board accommodating mechanism is formed as a base, and the front frame main body D14a to which the launch mechanism is attached and the front frame main body D14a are detachably attached to the prize ball payout mechanism and the gamed ball discharge. The back mechanism unit D14b on which the mechanism is formed and the front frame unit D14 are formed from the back mechanism unit D14b. Further, on the left side portion of the front frame main body D14a, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling the door unit D18 described later are provided, and the door unit D18 is provided on the right side portion of the front frame main body D14a. A locking device for a glass frame (not shown) for locking is provided. Further, a ball plate unit support mechanism (including a ball plate hinge D14a-3) for assembling the ball plate unit D17, which will be described later, is provided below the front frame main body D14a.

The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass or acrylic plates in parallel at a predetermined interval (about 20 mm), and has a U-shape. After the glass is inserted into the glass holding portion (not shown) formed on the one member D16b, the second member D16c that shields the inserted portion is fitted and adhered to be integrally formed. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through the opening surface of the door unit D18 described later, and foreign matter does not enter through the opening surface (the said). It is attached so as to make it difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface).

The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at appropriate positions of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided on the front frame unit D14, and the door unit D18 (corresponding to these). By the hinge mechanism and the locking bracket (not shown), the front frame unit D14 can be opened and closed sideways and can be locked. The door unit D18 has an outer size that substantially matches the outer shape of the game board Da, and an opening D18a is provided in the center in an area smaller than that of the transparent plate unit D16. The game board Da and the game area D30, which will be described later, are visible via the D16.

The door unit D18 has a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16 on the back side thereof, and a decorative portion decorated around the opening D18a so as to obtain an illumination effect or a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is in the upper right part of the door unit D18, and the upper center of the door unit D18 is in an open state (shown by a dotted line) when a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit) is executed. D18-Y (that is, the initial position is in the closed state and is not lit, and when the execution start condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied, it is in the open state. A member that lights up again and turns off when the predetermined effect execution end condition is satisfied, and whose operation is controlled by the sub-control board S described later). Are arranged. Details of the component configuration and the like of the door unit D18 will be described later.

The ball dish unit D17 includes a ball dish unit support mechanism (including a ball dish hinge D14a-3) provided on the front frame unit D14 and an engaging member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position on the ball dish unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the joint member D17a-1). The ball plate unit D17 can be attached to and detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball plate unit D17 can be removed in the state of being used for the game without providing a key dedicated to the game machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the ball plate unit D17 wrap) is adopted.

The ball plate unit D17 has an outer size formed in a square shape, and the upper ball plate D20 that supplies game balls to the launching device at the upper part and a large number of prize balls at the lower part pay out the upper ball plate. When an excess game ball is supplied to D20, a lower ball plate D22 capable of storing the excess game ball is formed, and on the right side of the lower ball plate D22, the firing intensity of the launching device (game) is operated by the player. A firing handle D44 for adjusting the hitting position of the ball) is provided. Further, on a part of the surface of the ball plate unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball plate D20), a sub-input button SB operated by the player at the time of production, and a rental operation unit for requesting the rental of the game ball ( (Not shown) is arranged. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball plate D20 and the lower ball plate D22. The details of the component configuration and the like of the ball plate unit D17 will be described later.

The schematic configuration of the game machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above. As described above, the game machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, the front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the ball plate unit D17 are detachably (or openable and closable) in front of the front frame unit D14. Therefore, the matching portion of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, the matching portion of each unit has a labyrinth structure (concave and convex shape in cross-sectional view) so that the gap is not linear in order to prevent foreign matter from entering the matching portion. It is desirable (but not limited to) to adopt a structure that results in

In the present embodiment, the door unit D18 and the ball plate unit D17 adopt a separate structure, but both may adopt an integrated structure. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which a physical game medium is paid out according to a game result, but an electronic medium management may be performed. In that case, the lower ball plate D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which the gamed ball is returned to the upper ball plate D20 and electronically managed is adopted. It should be added that the dish unit D17, the door unit D18, and the like will be provided with an operation unit for settlement / lending by an electronic medium.

Next, the game board Da is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20 (or sometimes called distribution winning opening C20), 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, An auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38, and an out port C80 are installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is hard to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so that it is easy to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. .. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left sides, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 are arranged. The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. In that case, the upper part of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. You may.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). ) Is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 {However, the game ball is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Also, it may be configured so that it can be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

Next, above the out opening C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30), the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the right side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area). The game ball flowing down the reference) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). The large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that is a sliding attacker and can accept a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The large winning opening is closed due to the inhibition of acceptance of the game ball to the box, and when the box-shaped member is in the retracted state, the large winning opening is open due to the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member. It is also preferable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the opening C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second large winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is made variable (the second prize opening solenoid C23 is excited to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). The large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that is a sliding attacker and can accept a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The large winning opening is closed due to the inhibition of acceptance of the game ball to the box, and when the box-shaped member is in the retracted state, the large winning opening is open due to the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member. It is also preferable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol holding display unit A21h (second main game symbol holding display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and a maximum of four holding numbers can be displayed (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Blinking at low speed, Number of Holds 3: Blinking at medium speed, Number of Holds 4: Blinking at high speed).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect described later is used. A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations that imitate a game of a slot machine. It has a decorative symbol display area SG11 and a display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display or the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). A main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the person, and an effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The SM, the sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the effect display, the error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prizes to each prize opening. Controls the payout operation of the prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with the prize ball payout unit KE10, etc., which pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, and the prize ball payout unit KE10. Prize ball payout control board KH, error display KH3 for displaying the occurrence status of errors related to payout (for example, 7-segment display), error release switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and upper ball plate D20. A launching device D42 that launches the game balls (reservoir balls) one by one into the gaming area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine. E and a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, are provided on the back surface of the front frame unit D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and the prize ball signal is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, a game ball lending device such as the card unit R requests the prize ball payout control board KH to lend the ball. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 5, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m causes the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) to rotate, and the game ball is moved. One ball is paid out one by one. Further, the paid-out game balls are detected by the payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. As for the cross section CC, it should be added that, as shown in the figure, the cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see) is shown.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by transmitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged so as to sandwich the rotation confirmation member KE10p3. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the state in the lower part of FIG. 4).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, the sound from the speaker D24, The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including a control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information in the event of a power failure. ing.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s, second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first 1 big prize opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21s, general prize detection device (not shown, the general entry opening is always open regardless of whether or not a special game is executed. In addition, there is a prize ball, but it is an entrance that does not perform a design lottery, etc.)}, a drive solenoid (the above-mentioned first prize opening solenoid C13, second prize entrance solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED Game peripherals (not shown), which are input / output devices that are indispensable for the progress of the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared in the figure) It is electrically connected to the peripheral device C and the auxiliary game peripheral device H), and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. It is configured to enable one-way communication (details will be described later).

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R (card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management of recording media for lending electronic money and the like may be supervised.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effect (not shown, but so-called effect). It is connected to the motor, solenoid, etc. of the movable body accessory. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and the sub-sub control unit SS performs display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG. It is configured to be used. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). It may be possible, but by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring and the like). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball provided for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the game machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls launched into the game area D30 are each entry port {1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, 1st big winning opening C10, 1st Enter one of the two major winning openings C20, general winning opening (not shown), and out opening C80}, pass through the entry sensor corresponding to each entry opening, and enter the game machine (inside the game machine frame D). Be guided. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the game machine. Although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming ball entry {each entry port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning opening C10, first It is a switch through which a game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20 (general winning opening) passes, and has one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting the entry into each entry opening}. It is assumed that

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 7. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) related to the game. It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) includes a sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes an image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), and a frame decoration lamp D18-L. It is also electrically connected to the speaker D24 and the like. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are hardware data and programs. It is composed of a ROM or RAM for storing a device, an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and a progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. The game progress means MP that controls the game state, the game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information related to the game state, etc., and the fraud detection information management means ME (and) that controls the processing related to the error or fraud detected by the game machine. Various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop) on the game peripheral device side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) and the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection. To transmit symbol attribute information {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, loss}, information on fluctuation mode (for example, fluctuation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating untransmitted commands), and external signal output control means MG that outputs information related to the game to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G. It has a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls a prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of a game ball to various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port, etc.) and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing within the upper limit number of balls entering each start port during variable display as hold balls. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10 (and the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2). Judgment means MJ11-A, second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start port B10, and auxiliary game start port H10. Auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H for determining whether or not has flowed in, and the first large winning opening ball entry determination for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. Means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second major winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 and the general winning opening (not shown) the game ball General winning opening ball entry determining means (not shown) and out opening opening determining means MJ11-C80 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the out opening C80. And, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c, which counts the number of the balls entered, determines whether or not the game ball has entered (detected the discharge) into the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. -C90), a ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b for temporarily storing information related to entry into the entry slot, and a ball entry counter MJ10c {book that counts the total number of balls entry into each entry slot. In the example, it is assumed that the counter value is cleared only by clearing the RAM based on the power failure, but the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 8 hours corresponding to the business suspension time of the amusement park, etc.) The value may be automatically cleared by}, and the first main game start opening number counter MJ10c-A that counts the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10. It has a first main game start opening confirmation counter MJ10c2-A that counts the number of game balls detected by the first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number, and the said To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game start port B10 for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main) is determined according to the determination result. The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring the game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. It has acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the scope of claims including the above and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "65535" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 includes the hold digestion control means MJ31 that controls the process related to the hold digestion and the change start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol is not given. The first for temporarily storing the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the change permission of the first main game symbol is given based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the change permission of the second main game symbol has not been obtained, and based on the determination result, the above The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the change permission of the second main game symbol is given, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the random number on the auxiliary game side acquired in a situation where the random number has not been downloaded, and based on the determination result, the random number is stored in the random number until the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol is given. It has an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding in.

Here, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determining means MJ31j for determining whether or not the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, which are combined with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively, for temporarily storing in the form of a random number. Have.

Next, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the transition to the special game is possible and whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory B11d can be opened is selected by the winning / losing lottery means MN10, and the stop symbol of each symbol is determined based on each random number. It has a symbol content determining means MN40 for determining, and a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 includes a first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / losing lottery for the first main game symbol and a second main game winning / failing lottery means for performing a winning / losing lottery for the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning / failing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a winning / losing lottery regarding the first main game symbol. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the win / loss lottery for the second main game symbol, and the win / loss lottery for the auxiliary game symbol. Each has a winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games, which is referred to when performing the above. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B that determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the random number for determining the game content (the second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H, which determines the stop symbol of the above.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol. The first main game symbol lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing. Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The MN51-A, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), and It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing and the game state. Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing and the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is determined. The decision lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table. ).

Next, the display control means MP10 is placed on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. Assistance for a predetermined time on the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, which controls the stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that controls the stop display after changing the game symbol.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals. , Hereinafter, something similar to a timer can be implemented with a similar counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, in order to determine whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the conditions for opening / closing the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d -B and the game ball remaining in the second main game start port electric accessory B11d after the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed are detected by the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s. It has a second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2, which measures the waiting time until the time is reached.

Next, the special game control means MP30 has the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition condition is satisfied. (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32, which determines the open large winning opening, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second big prize opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big prize mouth). It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing the opening / closing time of C10 and the second prize opening C20), and a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing the distribution game. Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes the first and second large winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d. , It has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t that manages the round time, an opening timer MP34t2 that clocks the opening time of the big winning opening, and a first big winning opening C10 (or a second big winning opening C20). The game ball remaining in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) after closing is detected by the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (or the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s). It also has a large winning opening ball entry standby timer MP34t3, which measures the waiting time until the time is reached. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (table). Although the details of the above are not shown, it is a table in which the large winning openings to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, etc. are defined. In addition, the first round is executed after the special game is started. The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, and the end demo time, which is the waiting time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, are also predetermined in this table).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the probability variation end condition determining means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the time shortened game state is satisfied. It has a time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determination. Each has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the probability-variable gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning / failing lottery of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is higher than the non-probability-variable gaming state, and the time-shortening gaming state. Is that the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time shortened gaming state, and / or the second main game start port electric accessory per unit time. It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening of B11d is improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a hit symbol with a high probability, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended ( Opening time extension function). Further, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game with no time reduction limit). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The above-mentioned probability change end condition determination means MP51 and time-saving game end condition determination means MP52, for example, draw a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability change game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. It may have a function to perform (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB uses the first main game (the game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). The first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on / off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, on / off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is stopped related to the first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied) that is currently changing. It has the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing the symbol and the variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, the prize ball payout determination means MH is a payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for transmitting / receiving information related to prize ball payout (and error detection or fraud detection) with the prize ball payout control board KH side. The payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) that temporarily stores the information, the prize ball count counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the payout of the prize balls have not been completed (prize ball payout). It has an unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information related to unpaid prize balls (which has not received information related to payout completion from the control board KH side).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. The first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are the shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner, and the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have. Regarding the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s for detecting the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the entry ball are normal. It has a first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming the presence of the ball, and only at one of the entry ports (particularly, only with the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s). When is detected, it is configured to execute processing related to fraudulent activity or error occurrence (details will be described later). When double-checking the incoming ball using two sensors in this way, sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, a non-contact type photo sensor and a contact type physical switch) should be used in combination. However, it is suitable for detecting fraudulent activity.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And the second big winning opening C20, the inner starting opening of the game ball launched in the game area D30, the out opening C80 for taking the game ball that did not enter the winning opening into the game machine, the starting opening and the entering ball. It is provided on a path for discharging the game balls taken into the game machine from the mouth and the out port C80, and has a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for detecting the game balls discharged from the game machine. There is.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of the above.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM has a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and a process of determining the effect content and a display control process related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 that controls the above, an error notification control means SM30 that controls error notification when an error occurs, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the change mode of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol determination process, and the display control process, and the design hold that controls the reserved number management and the hold display process of the decorative symbol. The information display control means SM22, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, the notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the advance notice effect content determination process and the display control process, and the reach effect content. It has a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls a determination process and a display control process.

Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining the presence or absence of an error occurrence.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 relates to the design display content determining means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the information from the main control board M side, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. A design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a design fluctuation time management timer SM21t for measuring the fluctuation time of a decorative symbol. ,have. Here, the marking display content determining means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 includes a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the hold related to the decorative symbol, and a hold look-ahead effect execution control means for executing the hold look-ahead effect. It has SM26 and. Here, the hold look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 further increases the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k for determining whether or not the hold look-ahead effect can be executed (for example, whether or not there is a hold scheduled to be a big hit in the hold). Have.

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern based on the information from the main control board M side, and the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold. It has a background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the effect), and a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is displayed during the change display of the decorative pattern based on the information from the main control board M side, and is expected to shift to the special game in the change. In order to temporarily store the information related to the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, which determines the display content and display timing of the special game (the effect of suggesting and notifying the feasibility of the special game based on the information regarding the hold). It has a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the advance notice effect.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is in a reach state based on the information from the main control board M side, depending on the combination of the reach effect (mainly displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol and the stop-displayed decorative symbol). It is an effect that is executed after being notified that it has become, but it also includes an effect that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbol even if it is not in the reach state). It has a reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined, and a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information related to the reach effect display.

Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is an image that displays an image on the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side and the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying the decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying the main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. The main control board M may be configured to control another peripheral device via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. 3A is executed. That is, after the power of the game machine is turned on and the initial settings are performed (not shown, the registers are initialized, the input / output ports are set, etc.), in step 1002, the main control board M is pressed with the RAM clear button. Whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E was operated by checking the input port of, that is, whether or not the operation to intentionally clear the contents of the RAM was performed by the administrator of the amusement park or the like. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in various ways at the time of power failure. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command is set at the relevant timing and the control command described later is set. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. In step 1100, the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, etc.), which will be described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was done.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process shown in FIG. Will be done. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2100, the ball entry determination means executes the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2200, the ball entry determination means executes the main game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the ball entry determination means executes the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the ball entry determination means executes the general winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the ball entry determination means executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the ball entry determination means executes the out-port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the ball entry determination means executes the prize ball determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H receives the input from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port When the ball entry detection device H11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). In the case of Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2108, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2110, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the detection end time (the auxiliary game start for the time or more). When the mouth-entry ball detection device H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start mouth-entry ball detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2104 or step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A inputs from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s the ball entry detection time (the time or more, When the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the first main game start port (time for determining that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10) is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 2208, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter MJ10c. Next, in step 2210, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2211, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the value of the first main game start opening ball entry counter MJ10c-A, and proceeds to step 2216. To do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2202, in step 2212, the input from the ball entry counter MJ10c is the detection time (if the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s does not detect the input for that time or longer, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is OFF for the time (time when it is considered that the ball has completed passing through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s) or more. Next, in step 2214, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , Step 2216. In addition, even if No in step 2204 or step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2216.

Next, in step 2216, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, in step 2218, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the first main game start port confirmation counter MJ10c2-A, and steps. Move to 2222. On the other hand, even if No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start opening detection continuation flag is on. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s as the ball entry detection time (the time or more, When the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10 is ON for more than a certain amount of time). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the flag is turned on during the valid period of the second main game start opening. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2228, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter MJ10c. Next, in step 2230, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, if No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is not valid), the entry of the second main game start opening is determined in step 2231. Means MJ11-B determines that there was an illegal entry into the second main game start opening B10, sets an illegal entry command (command to the sub side) at the second main game start opening, and proceeds to step 2240. .. Even if No in step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2232, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s for the detection time (the time or more, If the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed through the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) or more. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B is in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start opening detection continuation flag. Turn off. Next, in step 2238, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , Step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A (second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B) is the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s (first). 2 Whether or not the main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) is ON for more than the fraud detection time (the time exceeding the time detected as a normal ball entry and the time for determining that fraud is being performed). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A (second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B) is the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, even if No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the first 1 (2) It is determined whether or not the large winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the first large winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entry determining means MJ11-C20) is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (first). Is the input from the 2 major winning openings winning detection device C21s) ON for more than the entry detection time (the time when the entry detection device detects the input for the relevant time or longer, it is considered that the entry has been entered in the entry opening)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2305, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , It is determined whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening. In the case of Yes in step 2305, in step 2306, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the 1st (2nd) Grand Prize Opening Ball entry flag inside. Next, in step 2308, the first large winning opening entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entry determination means MJ11-C20) adds 1 to the counter value of the entry number counter MJ10c (increment). To do. Next, in step 2310, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) grand prize opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2305 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), in step 2311, the first large winning opening entry determination means MJ11-C10 ( The second large winning opening illegal entry determination means MJ11-C20) determines that there was an illegal entry in the large winning opening, and issues the first (second) large winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub side). Set and proceed to step 2320. Even if No in step 2304, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2302, in step 2312, the first large winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C20) is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s. The input from (2nd prize opening prize detection device C21s) is the detection time {when the 1st prize opening prize detection device C11s (2nd prize opening prize detection device C21s) does not detect the input for that time or more. , It is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s)} or more. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off the 1st (2nd) winning opening detection continuation flag inside. Next, in step 2318, the first large winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entry ball determination means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. 1 (2nd) Grand prize opening The long-time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2320.

Next, in step 2320, the first large winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entry determining means MJ11-C20) is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening). Input from the prize detection device C21s) is fraudulent detection time {If the first prize opening prize detection device C11s (second prize opening prize detection device C21s) detects the input for that time or longer, the first prize opening C10 It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the (second prize opening C20) is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big winning opening long-time detection flag in the inside is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. Although not shown in particular, the general winning opening is an entrance that pays out the winning ball when the game ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game. It is equipped with a general winning opening ball detection device (not shown), which is a sensor for detecting. Further, the ball entry determining means MJ10 has a general winning opening ball entry determining means (not shown) for determining whether or not a ball has entered the general winning opening.

First, in step 2402, the general winning opening detection continuation flag refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the general winning opening ball entry determination means receives the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (when the general winning opening ball entry detection device detects the input for that time or longer, the general winning opening ball entry detection device receives a general prize. It is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered the mouth. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening entry ball determination means turns on the general winning opening entry ball flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2408, the general winning opening ball entry determination means adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter MJ10c. Next, in step 2410, the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the input from the general winning opening ball detection device is the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening ball detecting device is When the input is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed through the general winning opening ball entry detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b is turned off. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determination means turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404 or step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, in step 2420, the general winning opening ball entry determination means is generally used when the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device is an invalid detection time {when the general winning opening entry ball detection device detects the input for that time or longer. It is determined whether or not the time is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the winning opening has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b is turned on, and the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharge confirmation means refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge confirmation means receives the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for the ball entry detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer, the total discharge confirmation sensor It is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the total discharge confirmation means turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to step 2520.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge ball confirmation means receives the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for the detection end time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s does not detect the input for that time or longer). , It is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharge confirmation means turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharge confirmation means turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2520. In addition, even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the total discharge confirmation means determines the total discharge confirmation sensor when the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is an illegal detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the C90s is being performed). In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the total discharge ball confirmation means turns on the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process (step 2600). Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the out-mouth / entry-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the out-port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-mouth input ball detecting means MJ11-C80 receives the input from the out-mouth input ball detection device C80s for the ball-in detection time (the time or more, the out-mouth input ball detection device C80s When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the out port C80). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-mouth entry / exit determining means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-mouth / entry detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2608, the out-port entry-in ball determination means MJ11-C80 adds 1 to the entry-in number counter MJ10c, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out-port entry ball detection means MJ11-C80 receives the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s for the detection end time (the time or more, the out-port entry ball detection device C80s). If the input is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / in-ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-port entry / exit determining means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-outlet detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-port long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the out-port entry ball detection means MJ11-C80 detects the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s for an illegal detection time (the out-port entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for that time or longer). If so, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-port long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and next processing (Processing in step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. To do. Next, in step 2708, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, in the number of prize balls). The relevant information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. To do. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, in the number of prize balls). The relevant information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) big prize opening ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2724, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls related to the first prize ball opening C10 (second prize ball opening C20) (13 in this example). Is added. Next, in step 2728, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the prize ball related to the first prize ball opening C10 (second prize ball opening C20) to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information on the number of prize balls) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry ball flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the general winning opening ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize ball payout determining means MH provides the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls) to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening. Temporarily store and move to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H refers to the inside of the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not the hold balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). .. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires the auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information on the number of the holding balls. Is added by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). In addition, even if No in step 1102 and step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. Determine if it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) on the auxiliary game side. At the same time as acquiring, the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the game state of the acquired auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). When is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H sets the auxiliary game symbol to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached with reference to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol by referring to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (D1 and D2 in this example). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is in an open mode (for example, in a time-reduced game) based on the hit symbol and the game state on the auxiliary game side. In the case of the hit symbol "D1", the opening mode is 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed. In the case of the hit symbol “D2”, 0.2 A predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B after determining the opening mode (opening mode of opening for seconds, closing for 0.8 seconds, opening for 5 seconds) To set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing timer MP20-B. Release the object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and is a flag during the valid period of the second main game start port. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily performs the auxiliary game state. Turn off the flag during opening of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1248, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B sets the second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2 to the electric accessory entry standby time (3 in this example). Set seconds) and start. Next, in step 1250, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2, and whether or not the timer value is 0. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game start port, the electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B, is located in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start port. The flag is turned off during the valid period, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300). As described above, in this example, the valid period of the second main game start port (the period during which the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port) is the opening timing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. The second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed until the electric accessory entry waiting time (3 seconds in this example) elapses, and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed. However, it is configured to be able to wait for the entry of the game ball for the amount of the waiting time for the entry of the electric accessory.

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1240 or step 1250, the process proceeds to step 1224. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms has elapsed (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds the main game (particularly the first main game side). Determine if the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of (1), and the process proceeds to step 1322. On the other hand, even if No in step 1302 or 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322.

Next, in step 1322, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start flag is on. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds the main game (particularly the second main game side). Determine if the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, a winning / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number, are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination random number. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the win / fail lottery random number for the first main game and the win / fail lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). In addition, even if No in step 1322 or step 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if it comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols are performed in parallel at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lottery).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the hold digestion control means MJ31 becomes the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, which is temporarily stored, is read out, and the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game). The symbol hold information is deleted from the temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and the first 1 The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won).

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) is the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is related based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the result of the lottery for winning or failing the main game symbol and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is configured so that it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is short. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that it may be configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side. When the execution of the fluctuation is configured to be advantageous to the player, the hold of the second main game side is likely to occur by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Next, in step 1415, the game content determining means MN performs commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Fluctuation mode information, etc.) and commands related to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission process in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The process proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and change. Determines if the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation is completed. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stops the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and displays the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then turns off the next (Processing in step 1500). In addition, even if No in step 1452, step 1454 or step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 has the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) is turned off. Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502 or step 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. .. In the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information to start the special game (special game start display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process in step 1990, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern (for example, continuing to open) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Open pattern, open / close pattern) is set. Next, in step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) to drive the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C10). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processes of steps 1616 to 1623.

Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for this purpose (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the ball entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number is set in the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (for example, 10 balls). If Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening is set. Determine if it has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1627, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1627, the system returns to the caller of this subroutine.

Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The drive is stopped and the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is closed (the process related to the closure is executed in the process, but the process of actually transmitting the control command to the device). Will be executed in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game execution means MP33 starts by setting the large winning opening entry waiting time (3 seconds in this example) in the large winning opening entry waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1631. In addition, even if No in step 1625, the process proceeds to step 1631.

Next, in step 1631, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the large winning opening ball entry standby timer, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1631, in step 1632, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1636, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the final round is completed (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is ended to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Then, in step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 1602, step 1631 or step 1638, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 25. First, in step 1702, in the specific game control means MP50, the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a main game symbol that is in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). 1900 processing).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. The same applies when the term "consecutively specified times" is used). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that a fraudulent radio wave has been detected, and turns on the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The process proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent radio wave is completed, and turns off the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the fraudulent magnetism has been detected, and turns on the fraudulent magnetic detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The process proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent magnetism has been completed, and turns off the fraudulent magnetic detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , Step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , Step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the game machine frame D has been released, and turns on the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the game machine frame D has been released, and turns off the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 73 and 74 for possible errors and control when an error occurs). In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub side) related to the error occurrence and error type information (sub-main control by the control command transmission process in step 1990). It is transmitted to the SM side). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error release condition is satisfied (see also FIGS. 73 and 74 for the error release condition and the control at the time of error release). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub side) related to the information that the error has been cleared (sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1990). (Sent to the side) and move to the next process (process of step 3000). In addition, even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 30 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 29. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (the line that transmits the ON / OFF signal relating to whether or not the prize ball is being paid out), and whether or not the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout is currently executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and the unpaid prize ball (still the prize ball payout command is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether or not there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the fraudulent related information temporary storage means MEb, and is an error in which it is inappropriate to pay out the prize ball. For example, it is determined whether or not an error related to a failure of the payout motor, a full tank of the upper plate, an error of running out of balls, etc. has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. The prize ball payout commands (see FIG. 31) for the number of prize balls are set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. Then, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and shifts the subsequent information. To execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the next process (the pair payout control board in step 3200). Shift to reception control processing). In addition, even when No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (counter-payment control board reception control process in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout-related information (prize ball payout-related information or payout abnormality-related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the error is concerned. Means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 is related to the completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that the prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that the prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 32 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. 29. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME has error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error to pay out the prize ball. Error information on the control board KH side is also managed (centralized management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. Then, in step 3225, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb, and then (Processing in step 3500). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sets the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the game machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal plate G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, A terminal for outputting game state information for outputting information related to a specific game state, special game state, etc., and error information for outputting various error information detected by an open detection sensor when the door is open. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start port is won, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the door is running, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. I'm not. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and a pair of light emitting units are used. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, the light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC, so that the external relay terminal board G It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is fixed). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, there are other signals; the preliminary signal that outputs that it is always off; from any timing after the power is turned on {for example, (a) the start of execution of the main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8}. It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. It should be noted that the signal is a signal that is used or not depending on the developed model (complexity of game playability).

Next, it is a signal of the IN / OUT section; the number of game balls that have entered all the entry ports (including the out ports) arranged on the game area D30 (≈ the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area D30). ) Is output; the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation counter MJ11c-C90, but may be the value of the ball entry counter MJ10c). Is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds each time it reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, the signal in charge of IN / OUT; the signal for outputting the number of game balls paid out by the game machine; every time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor KE10s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the glass door of the game machine (a frame body with a transparent plate attached, for example, the glass door D18) is being opened; is the door unit open detection. When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door opening flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, it is on. → After turning off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the front frame of the game machine (the frame body on which the game board is mounted, for example, the front frame unit D14) is open; is the front frame unit. When the open detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on in step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, After changing from on to off, the on signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the saucer frame of the game machine (the frame body on which the ball saucer is attached and the ball plate unit D17) is open; is the ball plate unit open detection sensor. When D20s changes from off to on {* However, after changing from off to on, the continuous on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) may be the output timing}; the detection sensor is on. During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, after changing from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Here, the signals of the above three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal depending on the configuration between the units. In that case, the ON signal may be continuously output while any of the open detection sensors is ON. Further, the openness detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH side (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH). Because bidirectional communication is possible).

Next, the signal of the symbol fluctuation system; the signal that outputs the number of symbol fluctuations for all the symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning opening (attacker); the first main game symbol or the second main When the variable display of the game symbol ends (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424) {* When the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends after the variable display ends (for example) Alternatively, when it is started, when it is in the period), it may be set as the output timing}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured so that the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period. Further, the signal may be output during a period during which the fluctuation fixed time of the main game symbol is set.

Next, it is a signal of the symbol fluctuation system; a part of the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (for example, the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side) is targeted, and the number of symbol fluctuations is output. The signal to be output is; when the variation display of the second main game symbol is completed (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424 in the second main game symbol display process) {* Note that the variation display The output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts, or is in the period) after the end of}; a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. Is. It is preferable that the output period is configured so that the variable display period of the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period.

Next, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory); when the special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on, but in step 1432, the condition device operation flag may be turned off → on.) {* Before the start demo period starts, The output timing may be during the period and after the end}; During the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is on), the on signal is always output. This is the signal to be output.

Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and the symbol change that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker). The signal that outputs that the time reduction game is in progress (the fluctuation time reduction function is in operation) is: When the special game is started (for example, in step 1606, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on). Or, when the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432, and when the time reduction game is started (for example, when the main game time reduction flag is turned off → on in step 1708), and / or In step 1710, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off → on); during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on). , And, during the period during which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), the signal always outputs an on signal.

Next, other signals; output information for uniquely identifying the game machine {* game machine manufacturer identification code (2 bytes), game machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU Outputs the unique information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) in order} The signal is; at any timing after the power is turned on {for example, (a) main control board side main processing execution start in FIG. 8} (for example, power supply). (Approximately 10 seconds after input); The unique information is divided into 1 frame (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit), and the serial transmission method (step synchronization, step synchronization, It is a signal to be output until all are output at 200 bps). It is preferable that the signal type (rated voltage, rated current) is different from that of other signal types.

Next, the IN / OUT signal; the signal that outputs the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the game machine; When detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out is totaled, and each time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); in 0.1 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds after outputting an on signal over a period of 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the game machine; the power is turned on with the RAM initialization operation (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002). It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds from an arbitrary timing after {after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) elapses after the power is turned on}. The output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system or the winning detection system.

Next, it is a security signal; a period other than the period during which the large winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the operation of the special electric accessory to the lapse of a predetermined period after the operation is completed) {for example, the first (second) ) During the period when the flag is off during the valid period of the big winning opening}, it is output that the ball has been detected in the big winning opening (attacker, for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20). The signal to be output is large except during the execution period of each round (including the discharge waiting period and the inter-round period) during the special game {for example, the period during which the flag is off during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening}. When the entry sensor of the winning opening detects the entry of a game ball (for example, when it is determined as No in step 2305); after outputting the on signal for 0.2 seconds, for 0.2 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, there is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there was a magnet sensor error (the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism); when the signal from the magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, when the illegal magnetic detection flag is turned off → on in step 1914) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is satisfied. None}; A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave); when the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on (for example, When the illegal radio wave detection flag is turned off → on in step 1904) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied} A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH). Is; when the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when the information related to the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215) {* However. If it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap. Further, a command indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) side to the main control board (for example, the main control board M) side. The main control board that has received the command may be configured to output a signal.

Next, it is a security signal; illegal entry into each winning opening to be paid out (for example, more than a predetermined number of entries within a predetermined time, the entry detection sensor keeps ON for a predetermined time or longer). , The number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the special game is equal to or greater than the predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, and the number of balls entered exceeds the design value during a certain entry validity period, etc.) The signal that outputs this is; 1. After detecting one ball with the switch for detecting the ball entering each winning opening, the event of detecting one ball again within the period specified for each winning opening is determined in total. If it occurs more than once, and 2. 2. When the switch for detecting the entry into each winning opening continues to detect the entry for a predetermined period, and 3. When the number of balls entered by the ball entry sensor to the big winning opening exceeds the specified number (for example, 160) during the execution of a special game (for example, 16 round jackpot). When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied; it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, in the case of 3 above, it is preferable to make the specified number different according to the execution content of the special game (Example 1: When the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, the specified number = 100. Example 2: If the big winning opening is only short-opened, the above 3 does not apply).

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the game machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the game machine {for example, fraudulent prize ... During the period other than the period when the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), the number of balls entering the large winning opening (attacker) is detected more than a predetermined number (5), or the normal electric accessory cannot be released. During the period, the number of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory was detected in a predetermined number (5) or more. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error: The proximity sensor provided on the game board detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: The signal that outputs that the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, or the sensor is not connected, etc.} is; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the fraudulent activity (illegal winning 1, radio wave sensor error) is detected, and 3. When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied when the fraudulent activity (board switch error, magnet sensor error) is detected; in the case of 1 above, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2 above, an on-signal is output over a second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, an on-signal is output over a third period (during detection of each fraudulent activity). It is a signal. When the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped, and the on-signal output is maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2.

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the game machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the game machine {for example, an abnormal winning error ... Large winning opening (attacker) During the period other than the period when the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), the ball is detected in the large winning opening (attacker), and the normal electric accessory cannot be opened (predetermined immediately after closing). In (excluding the period), the entry into the ordinary electric accessory was detected, etc. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Discharge error: The number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry of balls into each entry port for which the prize ball is to be paid out, and the switch for confirming entry of balls downstream from the switch (especially in the figure). Although not shown, it is a switch through which a game ball that has entered each entry port passes, and is detected by one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting entry into each entry port). The signal that outputs that the difference from the number of incoming balls exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc.} is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the above fraudulent activity (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error) is detected, and 3. When the fraudulent activity (emission error) is detected; in the cases 1 and 2, the on signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then the off signal is output for 0.2 seconds. In this case, it is a signal that outputs an on signal until the next time 1 is satisfied. If the output periods overlap (other than 3 above), the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, even during the output period according to the above 1 and 2, the output of the on signal is maintained at the time when the output timing according to the above 3 is reached, and the output according to the above 1 and 2 is maintained during the output period according to the above 3. It is configured to maintain the on-signal output even when the timing comes.

Next, the signal of the winning detection system; the signal that outputs the number of times the ball has been entered into each starting port for all the starting ports related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large winning opening (attacker); 1 When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the entry into the main game start port, and the second main game start port (one equipped with an electric accessory, an electric accessory) When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering (one is not equipped with) (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned off → on in step 2206) Alternatively, in step 2226, when the second main game start flag is set from off to on); it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when an illegal entry into the second main game start port (the one on which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry.

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 46.

First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process, which will be described later, with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error processing described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the game machine in the present embodiment controls the transmission and reception of commands and information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. Transmission / reception control means 3100 that controls the transmission / reception control means 3100, error control means 3200 that controls errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls that receive prize ball payout commands and ball rental commands It has a payout control means 3300 for executing the payout process of the above. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and information to the main control board M and the card unit R. It has a transmission control means 3120 that controls control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 detected an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of the error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality that controls the error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detecting a payout abnormality that controls the error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected. Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection that controls control, error control means 3260 at the time of payout motor abnormality detection that controls error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. An error control means 3270 for detecting a payout stop abnormality that controls the error control when the error is made, a ball bite error generation timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, and It also has a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times that the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of the excess prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval related to the prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310 temporarily stores the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing the state related to the payout (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress or whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred). At the time of payout processing, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. When this is performed, the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator and the predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting counter 3315 for measuring the time (time / motor pause time), and a unit payout counter 3317 for setting the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment type timer. It can also be configured using a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. 35. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds the threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that turns on when this is done (delivery motor operation error). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 (increments) the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). To do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to the error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the payout abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold value. Turn on the flag that indicates that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and when an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310, and transfers the excess payout number to the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excess payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout error detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process (step 4140). Move to error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, (1) an abnormality occurs in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out). Or, if an abnormality has occurred in which the number of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 is small (ball shortage) has occurred, and if an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, , Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag to be turned on when a situation is detected in which the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number to be paid out under the situation where it is determined that the payout is being made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for generating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for generating the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example in which a ball-out abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are used. An example may be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of the presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality occurs. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the condition for resolving the abnormal ball breakage or the shortage of the ball is not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the above-mentioned condition for generating the abnormal ball shortage or the shortage of the ball is unsatisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 continuously excites a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms during normal operation) and balls. The passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low as compared with the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing the payout operation for one ball at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited for. An example may be given in which a time is provided and the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 1 in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for passing the ball to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. 36. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality described later is detected, and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball biting. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a waiting time for resolving the motor error within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the number of predetermined steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example may be mentioned in which the number is set to the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is switched between an excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example). 6ms) is set. Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which is related to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of the error and to continue the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process are communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s and an abnormality of the saucer (upper plate) being full. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality sets the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t with an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) and starts the error control means. The process proceeds to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality requiring payout is started by setting the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2. The process proceeds to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4193-1 Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality is a flag related to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a as an error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, even if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when a payout stop abnormality is detected has a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer). Yes, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196-. Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4197-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4197- Move to 1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198. Move to -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error, the payout motor operation error, the game ball detection when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error, and the switch non-passing error) are turned off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the saucer are full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, the payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is paused, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then the next step. (Processing in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information reception process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. 35. Here, the first half of the flow is the information reception process from the main control board M (and the set processing of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), and the second half of the flow is the information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the set process of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is a payout state flag temporary storage means. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, and the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when (if it is inside). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and the prize ball number information. Is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. In addition, even if No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" means that when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. Is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the effect that the prize ball payout is completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start).・ At the start of motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive)}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, the process is a process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of motor drive steps and the like are set in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board side. It is a process to do. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of pieces are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step Move to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the number of payouts scheduled in the unit payout operation (that is, the number of payouts scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the exciting stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between an excitation method for normal operation (for example, a well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation executing flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / prize). (At the end of ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag is a case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time elapses ( It is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). If Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all the planned payouts by the current unit payout operation have been paid out). Whether or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor and the like is executed again without triggering the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board side, and the process is executed. If it is determined that not all of the planned payouts have been paid out by the unit payout operation this time, an abnormality that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error will be detected.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. 35. Here, the process is an end process when all the motors scheduled to be driven and terminated in the previous process (step 4300) are executed, or all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, the game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain from the motor drive termination process, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 43. It is determined whether or not all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the dormant state of the stepping motor (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, it is continuously excited to the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and shifts to step 4420. In addition, even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, to explain the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. In addition, even if No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an incoming ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the incoming ball of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of balls entered may be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection processing.

Next, to explain the prize ball payout end process, first, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the sensor detects as many game balls as the number of game balls related to the payout even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432. The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when the payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, even if No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the prize ball payout flag and turn on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines the number of overpayments (for example, if the counter value is -3, the number of overpayments is 3) based on the count value. The information is temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500] (At the time of motor drive execution)}. In this example, excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the motor for payout is finished. When a predetermined time (for example, a detection waiting time sufficient for the game ball paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed, the overpayment is detected (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0). It may be configured to be able to execute (determination of whether or not) (that is, overpayment is an unforeseen situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out is paid out. This unforeseen situation, which means that it has occurred and is extremely unlikely to occur in terms of design, means that one of the payout mechanisms has a problem, or that fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. It means that it is likely to have been done).

On the other hand, if No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, it is predetermined after the payout operation is completed). If the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected even after the waiting time for passing the ball has passed, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. Without limitation, it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs while the motor is being driven, as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in step 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. Turn on and move to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 2400 (when the motor is driven)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s in step 4470. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. 35. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43), and corresponds to the predetermined number of step counters. A flag that turns off when all excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence / absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (motor error processing in step 4600). In addition, even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (processing at the time of motor error in step 4600), and if No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. 35. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the hibernation state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, after detecting whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotation position, step-out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is not executed due to the occurrence of the motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the hibernate state (step 4410 and step 44 in FIG. 44). See 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in step 4100).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the game machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the game machine, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM performs initial processing (for example, when RAM clear information is received from the main side, the sub-main control unit SM is sub-main) based on the information received from the main side. Initialize the RAM on the side, and when various information commands are received from the main side, set and restore the effect-related information at the time of power failure, etc.). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (e) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed.

Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 5100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) are looped after the reset.

Further, the process of FIG. 3F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub-main control unit SM is from the main control board M side. Check the command input port (input port for the data signal line described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM sends a command from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, the process of FIG. 3 (g) is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure when the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like receives the power failure signal. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the evacuation area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the evacuation region. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits the execution of the interrupt process and shifts to the power interruption waiting loop. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM is provided with an area in which the reserve power is automatically supplied even after the power is cut off (or a RAM in which the reserve power is automatically supplied is provided), and the game-related information is provided in the area. It may be configured to be stored in.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a new hold generation command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is issued from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game). Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the 2nd main game). Next, in step 5106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 draws hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. The information is temporarily stored in the reserved information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 5116.

On the other hand, if No in step 5102, in step 5108, did the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receive the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information related to the symbol change from the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining holding information. Next, in step 5114, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM accesses the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. .. Next, in step 5116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is mounted on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) by making full use of the effect display means SS. Figure Hold information The hold display lamps of the same number as the number of the reservation hold counter value in the temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5400). If No in step 5108, the process proceeds to step 5116.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5402, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5402, in step 5404, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. Is a zorome such as "7, 7, 7", and in the case of a lost symbol, a disparity such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-time. If it is fluctuating, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined. Related information Temporarily store in the temporary storage means SM25b).

Next, in step 5408, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 5500). Transition. Even if No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Even if No in step 5502, the process proceeds to step 5510.

Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the plot variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the timing of the decorative symbol variation start based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 5020). , Step 5530.

On the other hand, if No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 5020, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is transmitted to), and the process proceeds to step 5530.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Related information Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 5020). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 5530. Even if No in step 5520, the process proceeds to step 5530.

Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the information that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 5020). Will be). Next, in step 5534, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 5600). To do. Even if No in step 5510 or 5530, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5600).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is not the first hit (big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time reduction game state). Judge whether or not. If Yes in step 5606, the process proceeds to step 5610. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5606 (when it is the first hit), in step 5608, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the consecutive villa count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 5610.

Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to (increments) the value of the consecutive villa count counter SM23c2. Next, in steps 5612 and 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and makes a big hit on the effect display device SG. The start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Even if No in step 5602, the process proceeds to step 5616.

Next, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game playability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type, etc.). Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive villa number counter SM23c2 and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5618, in step 5620, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the jackpot during execution is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot, 7A).・ Judge whether or not it is a big hit related to the 7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive villas during the specific game, the total number of balls obtained during the consecutive villas, and the identification of a plurality of types. Set the command related to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when one or a plurality of combinations of the effects are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, if No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive villas of the big hit (the first hit is not counted), and the second main game start port. If a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by entering the ball during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive villas. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurs during the maximum opening of the object B11d. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of conditions exist as the conditions for generating the ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in a specific effect). , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

Next, in step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5426, in step 5428, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the jackpot end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 5430, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 5700). .. Even if No in step 5404 or 5426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5700).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the error notification execution process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not an error occurrence command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the error notification control means SM30 determines the error notification mode and the error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes the error notification. The errors that may occur in the present embodiment and the control at the time of error occurrence are shown in detail in (FIG. 73) and (FIG. 74).

Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above process is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, the error notification related to the error satisfying the error notification end condition is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020). Even if No in step 5702 or step 5706, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020).

With the above configuration, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when the information on the game progress status and the error occurrence information is output to an external output (for example, output to the hall computer HC), a signal is output. Since there are many variations of modes, it is possible to output appropriate information according to the characteristics of the game machine to the outside.

(Second Embodiment)
In the game machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machine shown in the present embodiment, the information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as the second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, in the second embodiment, the second main game start port B10 has a specific area C22 (and a specific area entry detection device C22s) into which the game ball can enter. Further, the special game control means MP30 has a distribution game execution control means MP36 that controls the execution of the distribution game described later. Further, the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 has a probability variation number counter MP51c for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the probability variation game state is terminated.

Next, FIG. 53 is a configuration image diagram of the main game table referred to in FIG. 21 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is that the opening time is short and the winning ball cannot be expected as the execution mode of the special game executed at the time of a big hit (particularly, the opening mode of the big winning opening). It has "opening" (relatively, the opening time is long, and the opening mode in which a prize ball can be expected to be won is defined as "long opening"). That is, in the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol "4A", a special game in which the 8R short opening is executed is executed. Further, in the big hit related to the big hit symbol "4B", a special game in which the 16R short opening is executed is executed. Further, in the jackpot related to the jackpot symbols "5A" and "5B", a special game in which the 8R length is opened is executed. Further, in the jackpot related to the jackpot symbols "7A" and "7B", a special game in which the 16R length is opened is executed. Although not particularly shown in this example, the large winning opening may be opened in the short opening opening mode only for the round in which the distribution game described later is executed (opening mode of the large winning opening). Is short-open because the purpose is to configure the ball to be scheduled to enter the specific area C22).

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 21 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1472 (second) to step 1478 (second), and the purpose is the probability that a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are stopped after the end of the special game. It is configured so that the variable gaming state can be terminated. That is, in step 1472 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1472 (second), in step 1474 (second), the specific game control means MP50 decrements the value of the probability variation counter MP51c by 1. Next, in step 1476 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1476 (second), in step 1478 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and steps It shifts to the process after 1454 (the process related to the end determination of the time reduction game state). On the other hand, even if No in step 1472 (second) or step 1476 (second), the process proceeds to step 1454.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1510 (second), and the purpose is to set the value of the counter that counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the probability fluctuation game state when a big hit is achieved. Is to reset. That is, in step 1410 (second), the special game control means MP30 clears (zero clears) the value of the probability variation counter MP51c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1612 (second) and step 1650 (second), and the purpose thereof is to determine whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. It is to execute the distribution game execution process described later. That is, in step 1612 (second), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (particularly, the round number counter), and the round executes the distribution game (second round). Or, it is determined whether or not it is the fourth round). In the case of Yes in step 1612 (second), in step 1650 (second), the distribution game execution control means MP36 executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1638. On the other hand, if No in step 1612 (second), the process proceeds to step 1614, and the process during the special game described in the present embodiment is executed.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1650 (second) in FIG. 57 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1652, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1652, the process proceeds to step 1666.

On the other hand, if No in step 1652, in step 1654, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the jackpot symbol related to the special game being executed becomes a long-open jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a symbol (for example, 5A, 7A, or 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1654, in step 1655, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds) as an opening pattern of the second winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed to facilitate entry into the specific area C22) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the jackpot symbol related to the special game is a symbol (for example, 4A, 4B) that is a short-open jackpot, the distribution game execution control means MP36 is specified in step 1656. As an open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the area C22, it was designed so that a short open pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 second makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22). The open pattern) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in step 1658, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1660, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1662, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and starts the opening timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1664, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the flag during the valid period of the second special winning opening in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1666.

Next, in step 1666, the distribution game execution control means MP36 sets a game state information command (command to the sub side) related to the special game. Next, in step 1668, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the ball entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1668, in step 1670, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and has a predetermined number (10) of game balls won in the second major winning opening C20? Judge whether or not. If Yes in step 1670, the process proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, if No in step 1670, in step 1671, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1671, the process proceeds to step 1672.

Next, in step 1672, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second prize opening C20. Next, in step 1674, the distribution game execution control means MP36 starts by setting the large winning opening entry waiting time (3 seconds in this example) in the large winning opening entry waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1676, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1678. In addition, even if No in step 1668, the process proceeds to step 1678.

Next, in step 1678, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the large winning opening entry ball standby timer MP34t3, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1678, in step 1680 and step 1682, the distribution game execution control means MP36 is in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the ball waiting flag and the second big winning opening are valid. Turn off the flag during the period. Next, in step 1684, the distribution game execution control means MP36 resets (clears zero) the value of the release timer MP34t2 and stops it. Next, in step 1686, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b.

Next, in step 1688, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1688, in step 1690, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the big hit symbol related to the special game being executed is a short-open big hit ( For example, it is determined whether or not it is 4A, 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1690, in other words, if a ball entering the specific area C22 is detected during a special game in which it should be difficult (unplanned) to enter the specific area C22, the step In 1692, the distribution game execution control means MP36 is a specific area C22 illegal entry command {a command to the sub side, which is not particularly shown, but when the command is received on the sub side, a notification relating to the illegal entry ( For example, "Illegal entry has been detected" is displayed)} is set, and the process proceeds to step 1694. On the other hand, even if No in step 1690 (when the ball entering the specific area C22 is normal), the process proceeds to step 1694. Next, in step 1694, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. The process proceeds to step 1696. On the other hand, even if No in step 1688, the process proceeds to step 1696. Next, in step 1696, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1638). Even if No in step 1671 or step 1678, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1638).

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is that the game shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game, depending on whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game (particularly during the distribution game). It is configured to determine whether or not, and to set the maximum number of fluctuations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game, in which the probability-variable game state continues. That is, in step 1720 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the probability variation transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1720 (second), in step 1722 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the probabilistic transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724 (second) and step 1726 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 150) in the probability variation number counter MP51c and the time reduction number counter MP52c, and steps 1704 to 1704 to step 1. The process of 1710 (the process of turning on the main game probability change flag, the main game time reduction flag, and the auxiliary game time reduction flag) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1720 (second), a predetermined number of times (for example, a value smaller than that in the case of the probability variation gaming state, for example, 100) is set in the time reduction counter MP52c in step 1706, and step 1708 is performed. And the process of step 1710 (the process of turning on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag) is executed.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-2 (second), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so that a signal can be output according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3504-2 (second), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 2 and confirms the game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a signal of the symbol fluctuation system; a part of the symbol fluctuation (for example, the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side) that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) is targeted, and the number of symbol fluctuations is output. The signal is; when the variation display of the first main game symbol is completed (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424 in the first main game symbol display process) {* Note that the variation display is After the end, the output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts, or during the period)}; A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. is there. It is preferable that the output period is configured so that the variable display period of the first main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period.

Next, it is a signal of a big hit system; a big winning opening (attacker, for example, a second) provided with a ball entry area (in this example, a specific area C22) for determining whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation gaming state. The large winning opening C20) is short-opened (for example, the maximum opening time is 0.01 seconds), and the round is being executed (the special electric accessory is operating), and the ball entry detection to the ball entry area is detected. When it is in the valid state, the signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the ball entry area is; When the game ball enters a specific area (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in step 1690) while the ball entry detection of is enabled; a signal that outputs an on signal for 1 second. Is. In addition, when executing one special game, it is preferable to configure so that no output is performed except for the first one that satisfies the output timing.

Next, it is a security signal; the power is turned on to the game machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the game machine {for example, abnormal winning ... different from the big winning opening that controls the opening. Entering the big prize opening. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves. Vibration sensor error: The sensor that senses vibration detects abnormal vibration except during execution of each round under predetermined conditions = big hit. Switch error: While the switch for detecting the entry into each winning opening detects the entry, the switch for confirming the entry downstream of the switch does not detect the entry. Large winning opening abnormal discharge error: Compared with the number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry into the large winning opening, it is detected by the discharge confirmation switch located downstream of the switch. The number of balls entered is larger. Large winning opening entry / exit ball mismatch error: Compared with the number of incoming balls detected by the switch for detecting entry into the large winning opening, it is detected by the discharge confirmation switch located downstream of the switch. The signal that outputs that the number of balls entered is smaller, etc.} is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after power-on {for example, (a) start of execution of main processing on the main control board side in FIG. 8} {after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed after power-on} and 2. At the time of detection of the fraudulent activity {* It may be after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed from the time of detection}; In the case of 1 above, over the first period (30 seconds) It is a signal that outputs an on signal, and in the case of 2 above, outputs an on signal over a second period (18 seconds). If the output periods overlap, the output period of one signal being output this time is discarded, and then the next output is newly started. {* The next output timing is satisfied. In this case, after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed, the output period of one signal output this time may be discarded, and then the next output may be newly started. }. Further, even if the output signals are the same, it is preferable that the output periods are different between the case 1 and the case 2.

Next, it is a signal of the winning detection system; each starting opening is targeted at a part of the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large winning opening (attacker). The signal that outputs the number of times the ball has been entered into is; when one entry is detected by the switch for detecting the entry into the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start flag is turned off in step 2206). → When turned on); A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, it is a signal of the winning detection system; each starting port is targeted at a part of the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large winning opening (attacker). The signal that outputs the number of times the ball has entered the ball is; when one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the number of balls entered into the second main game start port (the one on which the electric accessory is mounted) (for example,). When the second main game start flag is turned off → on in step 2226); It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when an illegal entry into the second main game start port (the one on which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry.

Next, it is a signal of the winning detection system; a start port (for example, an auxiliary) related to a symbol change that triggers the opening of a normal electric accessory (an electric chew, for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d). The signal that outputs the number of times the ball has entered each starting port for all of the game starting ports H10) is; a switch for detecting the number of balls entering the auxiliary game starting port (passing gate) detects one ball. (For example, when the auxiliary game start flag is turned off → on in step 2106); It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. .. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

With the above configuration, the game ball enters the specific area C22 in a predetermined round (in this example, the second and fourth rounds) during the special game according to the second embodiment. Even in a gaming machine configured to be determined to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game, information on the game progress status and error occurrence information is output externally (for example, output to the hall computer HC). At that time, it is possible to output appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine to the outside.

(Third Embodiment)
The information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different in the game machines having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machines shown in the present embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as the third embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 and the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s also have functions as a specific entry port and a specific entry port entry ball detection device, which will be described later. (In the description according to the third embodiment, it may be referred to as a specific entry port H10 and a specific entry port entry detection device H11s).

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1605 (third) and step 1607 (third), and the purpose is to insert the game ball into the specific entry port H10 after the stop display of the jackpot symbol. It is configured so that the special game is not started until the ball is detected. That is, in the case of Yes in step 1604 (after the big hit symbol is stopped and before the opening of the big winning opening related to the special game), in step 1605 (third), the special game control means MP30 is the specific ball entry. It is determined whether or not the ball entering the mouth H10 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 1605 (third), the process proceeds to step 1606, and the normal process related to the execution of the special game is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1605 (third), in step 1607 (third), the special game control means MP30 sets a specific entry port entry operation display start instruction command (command to the sub side) (described later). On the sub side, an image prompting the player to enter the specific ball entry port is displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). In this example, the specific entry port entry operation display start instruction command is transmitted to the sub side until the ball is entered into the specific entry port H10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the stop display of the jackpot symbol, a command for starting the display on the sub side may be transmitted only once, or after the stop display of the jackpot symbol, the ball is entered into the specific entry port H10. It may be configured so that the command for starting the display on the sub side can be sent after waiting for the preparation period until the start of the special game becomes effective. With this configuration, after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, an image prompting the player to enter the specific entry port H10 is displayed until the entry into the specific entry port H10 is detected.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 5640 (third) and step 5642 (third), and the purpose is to enter the ball into the specific entry port H10 according to the command from the main side. Is to display an image that prompts. That is, in the case of Yes in step 5602 (before the execution of the special game), in step 5640 (third), the effect display control means SM20 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the specific ball is entered from the main side. It is determined whether or not the command to start the display of the mouth-entry ball operation is received. In the case of Yes in step 5640 (third), in step 5642 (third), the effect display control means SM20 displays an image prompting the game ball to enter the specific entry port H10 (for example, "specific entry". The special game will start when the ball enters the ball mouth. ”) Set the command to move to step 5604. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5640 (third), the process proceeds to step 5604.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-3 (third), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so as to be able to output a signal according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3504-3 (third), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 3 and confirms the game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it. Further, although not particularly shown in this example, a small hit (for example, a small hit (for example) in which a unit game in which a large winning opening is opened until a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses) is satisfied is executed only once. The case where the unit game is executed a plurality of times is called a big hit) may be executed, and in the figure, it is described as being configured so that a small hit can be executed.

First, it is a big hit system signal; the condition that the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened is satisfied (the combination of symbols that activates the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device is displayed). And, the signal to output that it is during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (the accessory continuous operation device is operating); the variation display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed (for example, the condition in step 1432). After the device operation flag is turned off → on), a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds, but when a signal is output in the next interrupt processing, the interrupt processing cycle is added, 0. When 504 seconds) has passed {* Note that the output timing may be the case where the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts, or is in the period) after the variable display ends}; It is a signal that always outputs an on signal during the period after the output timing and during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the condition device operation flag is on). Since the special game is not executed unless the game ball enters a specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10) after the variable display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed, the above output period May be variable.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; the first condition that can open the big winning opening (attacker) is satisfied (the combination of symbols that activates the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device is displayed. That), and output that it is during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and in addition, the second condition that can open the big winning opening (attacker) Satisfaction (the combination of symbols that the special electric accessory will operate) and the period during which the big prize opening (attacker) can be opened (the special electric accessory is operating) The signal to be output is; after the variation display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed (for example, the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432), a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds, but the next time) When the signal is output by the interrupt processing of, when the interval of the interrupt processing is added, 0.504 seconds) has elapsed, and the variation display of the symbol related to the small hit symbol is completed {for example, it will be described later. Explaining the configuration in the fourth embodiment as an example, after the small hit flag is turned off → on in step 1436 (fourth)}, a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds, but the next interrupt) When outputting a signal in processing, when the interrupt processing cycle is added, 0.504 seconds) has elapsed {* Note that the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed has ended after the fluctuation display has ended. The case (or when it starts, when it is in the period) may be the output timing}; during the period after the output timing and in the special game (the one related to the big hit, the one related to the small hit) is being executed. During a certain period (for example, during the period when the condition device operation flag is on, and when the configuration in the fourth embodiment described later is taken as an example, the small hit flag and / or the small hit execution flag is on. (Middle) always outputs an on signal {* In the case of a special game related to a small hit, the start demo time and the end demo time may be included, and the game state before the start of the special game related to the small hit Therefore, it is preferable to add an output period (1.0 second in the time-shortened gaming state and 10.0 seconds in the non-time-shortened gaming state). In this case, the big winning opening While the output period from the closing of the jackpot has a maximum difference of 9.0 seconds, in the special game related to the big hit, the output period from the closing of the big winning opening is constant, or the output in the special game related to the small hit. Only a period shorter than the difference in the additional period of the period will occur It may be configured as follows. In addition, the end demo time of the small hit in the time-reduced game state shall be configured to be shorter (shortest) than the time that can be taken as the end demo time of the big hit in the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state. Therefore, in the opening of the large winning opening (small hit) where it is difficult to obtain a ball, it is possible to configure the player not to recognize the occurrence of the small hit itself (in that case, the output period of the signal is set. It is a signal that is based on the end demo time of the big hit or the end demo time of the small hit)}. Since the special game is not executed unless the game ball enters a specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10) after the variable display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed, the above output period May be variable.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; the condition that the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened is satisfied (the combination of symbols that activates the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device is displayed). , During the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and during the game to shorten the time of the symbol change that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (variable time) The signal that outputs that the shortening function is operating) is; after the variation display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed (for example, the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432), a predetermined period (for example, for example) Although it is 0.5 seconds, when the signal is output in the next interrupt processing, when the interrupt processing cycle is added, 0.504 seconds) has elapsed, and when the time reduction game is started. (For example, when the main game time saving flag is turned off → on in step 1708 and / or when the auxiliary game time saving flag is turned off → on in step 1710); during the period after the output timing (for example, when After a predetermined time has elapsed from turning the condition device operation flag off → on in step 1432, and during the period until the condition device operation flag is turned on → off), during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, , During the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on), and during the period when the time reduction game is being executed (for example, the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is set. (During the on period) is a signal that always outputs an on signal. The output period is variable because the special game is not executed unless the game ball enters the specific entry port (specific entry port H10) after the variable display of the symbol related to the jackpot symbol is completed. May be done.

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the game machine, and that the game machine can detect fraudulent activity {for example, magnet sensor error ... Detects the approach of a magnet. The sensor detects abnormal magnetism. Large winning opening winning error: Compared to the number of balls that can be entered by design within the maximum opening period of the large winning opening (or the total period when multiple rounds are executed), The number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry into the big winning opening is larger. Starting port winning error 1 ... Compared with the number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry of balls into a certain starting opening, it is detected by the fraud prevention switch located downstream of the switch. The number of balls entered is smaller. Start opening winning error error 2: Compared to the number of balls that can be entered by design within the maximum opening period (including the interval after closing) of the ordinary electric accessory, the entry into the ordinary electric accessory is made. The number of balls entered by the switch for detection is larger, or during the period when the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened, the switch for detecting the entry into the ordinary electric accessory allows the ball to enter. The signal that outputs that the detected, etc.} is being performed is; 1. 2. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004). When the fraudulent activity is detected; in the case of 1 above, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds), and in the case of 2, the on signal is output for the second period (30 seconds). It is a signal to be output. If the output periods overlap, the output period of one signal output this time is discarded, and then the next output is newly started. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2.

With the above configuration, after the stop display of the jackpot symbol according to the third embodiment, the execution of the special game (opening of the jackpot) is waited until the game ball is inserted into the specific entry slot H10. Even in a gaming machine configured to be able to play, when outputting information on the game progress status and error occurrence information to the outside (for example, output to the hall computer HC), appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine is output externally. Will be able to. Although not particularly shown in this example, the game ball may be configured to easily enter the specific entry port H10 (auxiliary game start port H10) and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Further, the number of prize balls related to the entry into the second main game start port B10 may be smaller than the number of prize balls related to the entry into the first main game start port A10.

(Fourth Embodiment)
The information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different in the game machines having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machines shown in the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as the fourth embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the game progressing means MP has the small hit game control means MP40 that controls the processing related to the small hit game.

First, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1800 (fourth), and an object thereof is to configure the small hit game control process described later to be executed. That is, in step 1800 (fourth), the small hit game control means MP40 executes the small hit game control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutines of step 1400 (1) and step 1400 (2) in FIG. 20 in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1434 (fourth) and step 1436 (fourth), and the purpose is small when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. It is to turn on the flag (small hit flag) that triggers the execution of the winning game. That is, in the case of No in step 1430 (when the stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol), in step 1434 (fourth), the game progress means MP refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , It is determined whether or not the main game symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit symbol.

Here, FIG. 67 is an image diagram of the main game table referred to when determining the main game content. As shown in the figure, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured so that a small hit can be won (the symbol related to the small hit is "K"). Further, the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol "3A" is configured so that the opening mode of the jackpot is short-opening.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 1434 (fourth), in step 1436 (fourth), the game progress means MP is a small hit flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, even if No in step 1434 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1450.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are about step 1605-1 (fourth), step 1605-2 (fourth), and step 1617 (fourth), and the purpose is a big hit during the time-saving gaming state. In the case of the special game related to the above, the game is configured to shift to the time-shortened game state after the end of the special game, and long opening and short opening are set as the opening modes of the large winning opening (particularly, the short opening will be described later). It is configured so that the opening pattern is similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening due to the small hit. That is, in the case of Yes in step 1604 (when the process is executed immediately after the jackpot symbol is stopped), in step 1605-1 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. It is determined whether or not the special game is a special game related to a big hit during the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 1605-1 (fourth), in step 1605-2 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 sets the time saving transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. It is turned on, the process proceeds to step 1606, and the special game start process is executed. Even if No in step 1605-1 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1606.

Further, in the case of Yes in step 1614 (when it is the start timing of a certain round during the special game), in step 1617 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the round { For example, in the case of a long open jackpot, an open pattern of 30 seconds open → close, and in the case of a short open jackpot, an open pattern of 0.2 seconds open → close (including the ball entry waiting time). And, it takes 13.0 seconds to open the large winning opening for 5R related to the special game)}, and the process proceeds to step 1618.

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 68 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1740, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the jackpot symbol related to the special game is a probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, 3A, 5A, It is determined whether or not it is 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1740, in step 1742, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b.

Next, in step 1744, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol that triggered the special game is a jackpot symbol without time reduction (for example, the jackpot symbol “3A”). In the case of Yes in step 1744, in step 1746, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the time saving shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1746, the process proceeds to step 1748. On the other hand, if No in step 1746, that is, if the special game is a special game related to a time-saving jackpot symbol (for example, "3A") in the non-time-saving game state, the game does not shift to the time-saving game. , The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800).

On the other hand, if No in step 1744 {when the special game is not a jackpot related to a jackpot symbol (for example, “3A”) without shortening of time}, the process also proceeds to step 1748.

Next, in step 1748, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the time saving transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1750 and step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). 1800 processing).

On the other hand, if No in step 1740 (when the special game is a special game related to the non-probability change jackpot symbol), in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 sets the time reduction counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (time reduction). It is the fluctuation upper limit number of times that the game state continues, for example, 50) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1748. With this configuration, in the non-time reduction game state, after the special game related to the jackpot symbol "3A" (special game in which the acquisition of balls cannot be expected) is completed, the probability fluctuates and the non-time reduction game state is entered. It will be a transition.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1652, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB, and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 preferably has an opening pattern related to the round (the small hit game) {an opening pattern similar to the opening pattern of the large winning opening at the time of a short opening big hit, for example. , "Opening for 0.2 seconds → Closing for 3 seconds" is repeated 5 times (at the end of the repetition, it will be closed until the next opening), etc.} is set. Next, in step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) and starts the opening timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and goes to step 1818. Transition.

On the other hand, if No in step 1802, in step 1816, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. .. If Yes in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the small hit entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1818, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the winning ball counter MP33c and has a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). ) Is determined whether or not there was a ball. If Yes in step 1820, the process proceeds to step 1824. On the other hand, if No in step 1820, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the opening timer MP34t2 for a predetermined time related to the opening of the large winning opening {for example, "opening for 0.2 seconds → opening for 3 seconds". It is determined whether or not 13.0 seconds}, which is the time required to execute the opening pattern in which "closing" is repeated 5 times (at the end of the repetition, closing until the next opening) has elapsed. If Yes in step 1822, the process proceeds to step 1824.

Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d, and stops driving the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C10. The winning opening C20 is closed. Next, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the large winning opening waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) in the large winning opening waiting timer MP34t3 and starts it. Next, in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1830. On the other hand, even if No in step 1818, the process proceeds to step 1830.

Next, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the large winning opening ball entry standby timer MP34t3, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1830, in step 1832, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit incoming ball waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1834, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1836, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1838, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). .. Even if No in step 1816 or step 1822, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

With this configuration, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is a short-opening opening mode {For example, when a short-opening big hit, an opening pattern of 0.2 seconds opening → closing (when executing 5R minutes, entering a ball Including the waiting time, the short-open jackpot that is opened by repeating "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 3 seconds" 5 times (at the end of the repetition, it will be closed until the next open)} and the corresponding A large opening mode similar to the short opening jackpot {for example, "opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 3 seconds" is repeated 5 times (at the end of the repetition, it will be closed until the next opening). Since a small hit that opens the winning opening can be executed, it becomes difficult to determine the current game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. Although not particularly shown, the short open big hit With small hits, it is preferable that the effects performed on the sub side are the same (or substantially the same).

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-4 (fourth), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so as to be able to output a signal according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3504-4 (fourth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 4, and the confirmed game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a big hit signal; a big winning opening (attacker) on condition that a time-shortening game (variation time shortening function operation) of symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) is scheduled. During the period during which the character can be opened (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating), and during the time reduction game of the symbol change that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (when the change time reduction function is operating). The signal to output is; when the special game is started under the condition that the transition to the time reduction game is scheduled (for example, when the time reduction transition reservation flag is turned off → on, or other than the jackpot symbol "3A". When the condition device operation flag and / or the combination device operation flag in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is turned off → on) and when the time reduction game is started (for example, the main game time reduction flag is set in step 1750). When off → on and / or when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off → on in step 1752); A special game is being executed under the condition that the transition to the time reduction game is scheduled. During the period (for example, during the period when the time saving transition reservation flag is on, or during the period when the condition device operation flag and / or the combination device operation flag in the special game related to the jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol "3A" is on) , And, during the period during which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), the signal always outputs an on signal. When a small hit occurs, the signal is output based on information related to the time reduction game (for example, on / off of the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag), while the big hit is output. When it occurs, not only the information related to the time saving game (for example, turning on / off the main game time saving flag and / or the auxiliary game time saving flag) but also the information related to the special game (for example, the time saving transition reservation flag, the condition device). It should be added that the output will be based on the operation flag and / or the operation flag of the combined device.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; it outputs that it is during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened over multiple rounds (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and in addition, the big winning. Shortening the time of symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the mouth (attacker) During the period during which the large winning opening (attacker) can be opened only in one round, provided that the game is not in progress (the fluctuation time shortening function is operating). The signal to output that (the special electric accessory is operating) is; when the special game related to the jackpot symbol is started (for example, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1606). Alternatively, when the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432, and when a special game related to the small hit symbol is started under the condition of a non-time reduction game (for example, the main game time reduction flag and / or When the small hit flag or small hit execution flag is turned off → on while the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off); a special game (for big hits, for small hits) is executed after the output timing. During a certain period (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on, and during the period when the small hit flag and / or the small hit execution flag is on). It is a signal that always outputs an ON signal {* In the case of a special game related to a small hit, the start demo time and the end demo time may be included}.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; when the time reduction game of the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) is in progress (the fluctuation time reduction function is operating), and the time reduction game described above is in progress. Satisfies the conditions that can open the big winning opening (attacker) (the combination of symbols that will activate the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device is displayed), and the big winning opening (the big winning opening (attacker) over multiple rounds During the period when the attacker) can be released (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating), and when the above-mentioned time reduction game is not in progress, a predetermined combination of symbols (those that will not be able to obtain balls) Satisfies the conditions that can open the big winning opening (attacker) by other than (displays the combination of symbols that will activate the condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device). The signal that outputs that the attacker) can be released during the period (during the continuous operation of the accessory) is; when the time reduction game is started (for example, the main game time reduction flag is turned off → on in step 1750). In the case and / or when the auxiliary game time saving flag is turned off → on in step 1752, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol is started under the condition of the time saving game (for example, the time saving transition reservation flag is set. When a special game other than the predetermined jackpot symbol is started under the condition of a non-time reduction game (when turned off → on) (for example, the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag are off). When the jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol "3A" is stopped and displayed, and the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is turned off → on); Medium (for example, during the period when the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on) and during the period during which the special game is being executed after the output timing (for example, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag). And / or during the period when the condition device operation flag is on) is a signal that always outputs an on signal.

Next, it is a security signal; a RAM initialization operation or an error release operation (a prize ball payout operation is performed, but an event of insufficient payout occurs a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period) in the game machine. (Operation to cancel the error when the error is canceled) and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the game machine {For example, fraudulent prize 1 ... During the period when the big prize opening (attacker) can be opened (special electric motor) A ball entering the big winning opening (attacker) was detected during a period other than (when the accessory is activated). Unauthorized winning 2 ... During the period when the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened (excluding the predetermined period immediately after closing), the entry was detected by the switch for detecting the entry into the ordinary electric accessory. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism (detected over 0.1 seconds). Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves (detected over 0.01 seconds). Winning slot switch error: A switch for detecting a ball entering each winning slot, such as continuously detecting a winning ball for a predetermined period or longer (0.2 seconds or longer), etc.} is performed. The signal that outputs this is; 1. 2. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004) or the error release operation is performed, and 2. When the fraudulent activity (illegal winning 1, fraudulent winning 2) is detected, and 3. When the fraudulent activity (magnet sensor error, radio wave sensor error, winning opening switch error) is detected; in the case of 1 above, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds), and in the case of 2 above. , The on signal is output over the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3 above, during the third period (30 seconds during the detection of each fraud and after each fraud is undetected). It is a signal that outputs an on signal over the entire range. If the output periods overlap, the output period of one signal output this time is discarded, and then the next output is newly started. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2.

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the game machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the game machine {for example, the grand prize opening fraudulent winning error ... During the period other than the period during which the (attacker) can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), the number of balls entering the large winning opening (attacker) is detected in excess of a predetermined number (5), but one round. Excludes during the period when the big prize opening (attacker) can be opened (during special electric accessory operation). Illegal winning error at the predetermined start port ... During the period when the ordinary electric accessory cannot be opened, the ball entering the ordinary electric accessory was detected. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism. Induced magnetic field detection error: The signal that outputs that the sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, etc.} is performed; 2. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, RAM clear is executed in step 1004). When the fraudulent activity is detected; it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.05 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.05 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, the output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system, the symbol variation system, and the winning detection system.

With the above configuration, the opening pattern in which the large winning opening is a short-opening opening mode according to the fourth embodiment {for example, in the case of a short-opening jackpot, opening for 0.2 seconds → closing (opening pattern) When executing for 5R, including the waiting time for entering the ball, "Open for 0.2 seconds → Close for 3 seconds" is repeated 5 times (at the end of the repetition, it will be closed until the next opening)} The short opening jackpot to be performed and the opening mode similar to the short opening jackpot {for example, "opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 3 seconds" are repeated 5 times (for the end of the repetition, closing until the next opening). By being able to execute a small hit that opens the big winning opening in the open pattern}, it becomes difficult to determine the current game state, and even in a game machine configured to improve the interest of the game, the game progresses. When outputting information on the situation and error occurrence information to the outside (for example, outputting to the hall computer HC), it is possible to externally output appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine.

(Error control)
Next, FIGS. 73 and 74 are tables summarizing the processing when an error occurs in the gaming machine according to this example. The processing when an error occurs will be described with reference to the figure.

First, FIG. 73 will be described. As an error related to game ball discharge; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to its own counter (excess payout counter, for example, excess payout cumulative counter 3241); the counter is predetermined. When the number is reached (when the cumulative number of excess payouts exceeds the permissible number) (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 4124); the payout operation is stopped, and the error indicator (error to the 7-segment display). The number (1) is displayed. Also, by returning from the power off; the payout operation is canceled and the error number is hidden. In addition, when it overlaps with another error related to the game ball payout. Is configured to maintain the stop of the payout operation and to preferentially display the one having a high priority in the notification control. In addition, the effect display device SG displays an error, blinks a frame decoration LED, and reproduces an error notification voice. The error notification may be executed at.

Next, as an error relating to the payout of the game ball; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor (for example, the payout count sensor KE10s); an abnormal signal from the sensor is detected. Case (for example, when the prize ball device error flag is turned off → on in step 4195-2); Stop the payout operation and display the error number (3) on the error display (7-segment display). To do. In addition, by returning from the power off, the payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. In the case of duplication with an error related to other game ball payouts, the payout operation is maintained to be stopped, and with regard to the notification control, the one with a high priority is displayed with priority. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error relating to the payout of the game ball; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor (for example, the payout count sensor KE10s); (For example, when the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is turned off → on in step 2372, or when the payout motor operation error flag is turned off → on in step 4115); And display the error number (5) on the error display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch (for example, pressing the error release switch KH3a); the payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. In the case of duplication with an error related to other game ball payouts, the payout operation is maintained to be stopped, and with regard to the notification control, the one with a high priority is displayed with priority. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the payout of the game ball; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor (for example, the payout count sensor KE10s); before the execution of the payout control for a predetermined number of minutes is completed. When a ball entry signal exceeding the predetermined number of minutes is detected from the sensor (for example, when the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed is turned off → on in step 4432); the payout operation is stopped and an error is displayed. The error number (5) is displayed on the device (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch (for example, pressing the error release switch KH3a); the payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. In the case of duplication with an error related to other game ball payouts, the payout operation is maintained to be stopped, and with regard to the notification control, the one with a high priority is displayed with priority. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error relating to the payout of the game ball; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the payout motor sensor (for example, the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms); the payout motor for one game ball. When the drive is completed, the sprocket (for example, the sprocket KE10p) is not rotationally displaced by a predetermined angle (for example, when the motor position abnormality flag is turned off → on in step 4560, or in step 4173, the payout is performed. When the motor error flag is turned off → on); the payout operation is stopped (or the retry operation is executed), and the error number (7) is displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator). Further, by operating the error release switch (for example, pressing the error release switch KH3a) or elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after the error occurs (for example, in step 4191-3, it is determined as Yes); The payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. In the case of duplication with an error related to other game ball payouts, the payout operation is maintained to be stopped, and with regard to the notification control, the one with a high priority is displayed with priority. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the payout of the game ball; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor (for example, the payout count sensor KE10s); when the execution of the payout control for a predetermined number of minutes is completed. When a ball entry signal of less than a predetermined number of minutes is detected from the sensor (or when a predetermined period has elapsed after completion) (for example, when the switch non-passage error detection flag is turned off → on in step 4446); Stop the operation (or execute a low-speed payout operation), and display the error number (7) on the error display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch (for example, pressing the error release switch KH3a) or elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after the error occurs (for example, in step 4192-3, it is determined as Yes); The payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. In the case of duplication with an error related to other game ball payouts, the payout operation is maintained to be stopped, and with regard to the notification control, the one with a high priority is displayed with priority. The error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) large winning opening sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 ball entry detection device or the second large winning opening). Refer to the winning opening C20 ball entry detection device); when a game ball entering the first (second) large winning opening is detected outside the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening (for example, step 2305). (* However, during the execution of the special game, the ball may be detected a predetermined number of times during the execution of one special game); the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp). D18-L) is lit, an error is displayed on the effect display device SG, and an error notification sound is reproduced. Further, the power is turned on again with the RAM clear button pressed (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in step 1002), or a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error; the error notification is terminated.

Next, as an error related to door opening; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the door open sensor (for example, the door unit open detection sensor D18s); the door open sensor is turned on from off. (For example, when the door opening flag is turned off → on in step 1924); stop of payout operation, prohibition of ball lending, and blinking of frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L). , Error display, error notification sound reproduction on the effect display device SG, and reproduction of a dedicated ball entry sound effect when a ball entry into the first (second) main game start port or auxiliary game start port is detected. Execute. In addition, when the door opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, when the door opening flag is changed from on to off in step 1928); the payout operation is restarted, the ball lending is permitted, and the error display and error The playback of the notification sound and the playback of the ball entry sound effect are terminated (even after the error is cleared, the frame decoration LED continues to blink until the predetermined time elapses). If it overlaps with another error related to the big prize opening abnormality detection, the payout operation is stopped and the ball lending is prohibited, and the notification control is configured to give priority to the big winning opening abnormality detection. .. Further, the detection main body may be the main control board, or when an error having a high priority (for example, detection of an abnormality in the winning opening) occurs, the action related to the error having the high priority may be preferentially executed. The time from error cancellation to the end of error notification sound playback can be within the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol, while the time from error cancellation to the end of blinking of the frame decoration LED is the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol. It should be added that it is configured to exceed.

Next, as an error related to the frame; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the frame open sensor (front frame unit open detection sensor D14s); the frame open sensor changes from off to on. (For example, when the frame opening flag is turned off → on in step 1934); stop of payout operation, prohibition of ball lending, blinking of frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L), effect The display device SG executes error display and error notification sound reproduction. Further, when the opening detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, when the frame opening flag is changed from on to off in step 1938); the error display and the reproduction of the error notification sound are ended. (Even after the error is cleared, the frame decoration LED continues to blink until the specified time elapses). The detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to the detection of the abnormality of the large winning opening; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) large winning opening sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 ball entry detection device or Refer to the 2nd big winning opening C20 ball entry detection device); when the entry of a game ball into the 1st (2nd) big winning opening outside the valid period of the 1st (2nd) big winning opening is detected ( For example, when it is determined as No in step 2305); the entry ball related to the error occurrence is invalidated, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) and the board decoration LED (for example, the illumination lamp D26) are invalidated. -The monitor LED (for example, the error lamp SS3) is turned on, the effect display device SG is used to display the error, and the error notification sound is reproduced. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) the execution of the main process on the main control board side in FIG. 8} or the openness detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, in step 1938, the frame (When the opening flag is turned on → off); The error notification is terminated. The frame decoration LED (and the board decoration LED) is lit instead of blinking. Further, although it is the same as the error cancellation condition in opening the frame, the condition for turning off the frame decoration LED is different.

Next, as an error related to the detection of the winning opening abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the radio wave sensor, the ball entry sensor for all the ball entry ports (for example, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s). , 2nd main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, 1st big winning opening C10 entry detection device, 2nd big winning opening C20 entry detection device, general winning opening entry ball detection device, out opening entry ball detection device C80s ), Refer to the 1st (2nd) big prize opening sensor; abnormal radio wave detection (for example, when the illegal radio wave detection in progress flag is turned off → on in step 1912), and the winning sensor or the out switch turns on for a certain period of time. Is detected (for example, when the long-time detection flag corresponding to each entry port is turned off → on in step 2242, step 2322, step 2422, and step 2622), and the player goes to the big winning opening during the special game. When it is detected that more than a predetermined number of game balls have been entered; the entry related to the error occurrence is invalidated, and the frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) and the board decoration LED (for example, lighting) are invalidated. Lamp D26) -The monitor LED (for example, the error lamp SS3) is turned on, the effect display device SG is used to display an error, and the error notification sound is reproduced. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) the execution of the main process on the main control board side in FIG. 8} or the openness detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off (for example, in step 1938, the frame (When the opening flag is turned on → off); The error notification is terminated. The all entry openings are the first (second) main game start opening, general winning opening, first (second) large winning opening, and out opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main). Game start opening B10, general winning opening, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, out opening C80).

Next, as an error related to the normal electric accessory winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the second main game start port sensor (for example, the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) Refer to; During the period of flag off → on → off during the valid period of the second main game start port (the period during which the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port), a predetermined number A (15 balls) is set to the second main game start port. ) Or more game balls, or when a predetermined number of B (10 balls) or more game balls enter the second main game start port with the flag off during the valid period of the second main game start port, or When a predetermined number of game balls C (1 ball) or more enter the second main game start port while an abnormality in winning an ordinary electric accessory (for example, the error is occurring); a sub input button (for example, a sub input button SB) ), Sub-input button decoration LED (not shown), other various LEDs blink or light, and error display on the effect display device SG {* If the error is not cleared, it ends after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, Execute error notification sound playback {* If the error is not cleared, end after a predetermined time B (90 seconds)}. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of the main process on the main control board side in FIG. 8}; the error notification is terminated. It should be noted that the occurrence of the error is a predetermined number A> a predetermined number B> a predetermined number C that does not affect the progress of the game. Further, while the display mode of the sub-input button LED does not depend on the effect, the display mode of the effect display device SG is configured to execute error display while depending on the effect.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described. As an error related to the large winning opening winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) large winning opening sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 ball entry detection device or the second large winning opening) Refer to the winning opening C20 ball entry detection device); the period from the small hit execution flag on to the small hit waiting flag on → off during the small hit execution {for example, the first (second) big prize during the small hit game When a predetermined number of A (11 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening during the period when the flag is on during the valid period of the mouth}, it is based on the main game symbol stopped at the large winning opening during the execution of the special game. When a predetermined number of game balls enter, the small hit execution flag is off and the condition device operation flag is off {during the period when the first (second) large winning opening valid period flag is off} When a number B (3 balls) of game balls enters, or when a predetermined number of C (1 balls) of game balls enter the large prize opening during an abnormal winning opening (for example, when the error occurs) ; Sub-input button sensor (for example, sub-input button SB), sub-input button decoration LED (not shown), and various other LEDs blink or light up, and an error is displayed on the effect display device SG {* If the error is not cleared, It ends after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, and the error notification sound is played {* If the error is not cleared, it ends after a predetermined time B (90 seconds)}. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of the main process on the main control board side in FIG. 8}; the error notification is terminated. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, the predetermined number N is determined by the main game symbol that is stopped, and the predetermined number N may be different even in the special game composed of the same number of rounds. Further, the predetermined number A> the predetermined number B> the predetermined number C. Further, it should be added that the minimum value of the predetermined number N is the same as the value of the predetermined number A when the same large winning opening is opened.

Next, as an error related to the start port winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first main game start port sensor and the first main game start port confirmation sensor (for example, the first main game start port). Refer to the ball entry detection device A11s and the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2); the first main game start port entry number counter value (for example, the value of the first main game start port entry number counter MJ10c-A). Is more than a predetermined number (100 balls) than the first main game start opening confirmation counter value (value of the first main game start opening confirmation counter MJ10c2-A); jog sensor (for example, sub input button SB), jog decoration LED (not shown) and other various LEDs blink or light up, error display on the effect display device SG {* If the error is not cleared, it ends after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound playback {* error If it is not released, the process ends after a predetermined time B (90 seconds)}. Further, when the power is turned on again {for example, (a) start of execution of the main process on the main control board side in FIG. 8}; the error notification is terminated. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, it is preferable that the first main game start port sensor is a non-contact sensor and the first main game start port confirmation sensor is a contact sensor. Further, the first main game start port sensor may be a contact sensor, and the first main game start port confirmation sensor may be a non-contact sensor.

Next, as an error related to the plate full tank error; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refer to the lower ball plate full tank sensor (not shown); the prize ball payout device KE or the game ball lending device R. When the saucer full tank error flag is turned off → on (for example, when the saucer full tank error flag is turned off → on in step 4196-2); To display the error and play the error notification sound. When the saucer full tank error flag is turned on → off (for example, when the saucer full tank error flag is turned on → off in step 4196-4); the payout operation is restarted and the error notification is terminated. .. The error notification sound makes it easy to win a prize ball even when the predetermined main game symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and the condition device operation flag is on (especially, even in a special game composed of the same number of rounds). It is configured to be played only during a special game related to a long open jackpot. Further, the detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to the door opening error; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); the door opening sensor (for example, the door unit opening detection sensor D18s) and the frame opening sensor (for example, the front frame unit opening) Refer to the detection sensor D14s); when the frame opening sensor changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned off to on in step 1934); for stopping the payout operation and producing sub-control. The accessory (an accessory that does not hinder the visibility of other error notifications, for example, the opening / closing accessory D18-Y for directing) is moved to the initial position, and the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is moved. ) Is lit, an error is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the error notification sound is played {* Playback ends after a predetermined time (300 seconds) from the occurrence of the error}. Further, when the door opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, when the door opening flag is changed from on to off in step 1928), or when the frame opening sensor changes from on to off (for example, when the door opening sensor changes from on to off). When the frame opening flag is turned on → off in step 1938); the frame decoration LED is turned off after a predetermined time A (30 seconds) after the payout operation is restarted and the error is cleared, the error display is finished, and the error is cleared. After time B (5 seconds), the playback of the error notification sound ends. If the sub-control effect is configured to make it difficult to see the error display, it is configured to move to the initial position when an error occurs so that other error displays can be easily seen. You may. Further, the detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to the abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the second main game start port sensor (second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) and the first (second). Refer to the big prize opening sensor (for example, the first big winning opening C10 ball entry detection device or the second big winning opening C20 entry ball detection device); the second main game start opening second main game start opening when the flag is off during the valid period. When the number of game balls enters the predetermined number A (10 balls) or more, or when the flag is off during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, the predetermined number A (10) of game balls enter the first (second) large winning opening. When a ball) or more is entered; the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on {* turned off after a predetermined time A (1 second) from the occurrence of the error}. In addition, when a predetermined number of game balls B (30 balls) or more enter the second main game start port when the flag is off during the valid period of the second main game start port, or during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls B (30 balls) or more enter the first (second) large winning opening when the flag is off; the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) lights up {* a predetermined time from the occurrence of an error Turn off after B (30 seconds)} is executed. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, the two error notification modes are characterized in that the error occurrence conditions are different from each other and there are two or more triggers for ending the error notification.

Next, as an error related to the discharge error; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the ball entry sensor of all the ball entry ports (for example, the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, the second main game). Starting port entry ball detection device B11s, 1st big winning opening C10 entry detection device, 2nd big winning opening C20 entry detection device, general winning opening entry ball detection device) and switch for ball entry confirmation (particularly shown in the figure) However, refer to (one or more switches) through which the game ball that has entered each entry port passes, which is different from the switch for detecting entry into each entry port). When the difference between the number counter value (for example, the number of game balls detected by the ball entry sensors of all the ball entry ports) and the number of game balls detected by the ball entry confirmation switch exceeds a predetermined number (100); Error display on display device SG {* Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of an error}, error notification sound playback {* Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of an error}, frame decoration LED (for example, , Frame decoration lamp D18-L) lights up {* Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of the error}. The occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. In addition, there are more error notification modes than abnormal winning errors, and there are fewer error notification end conditions.

Next, FIG. 75 is a signal output pattern correspondence table summarizing the signal identities shown in the tables of FIGS. 34, 60 (2nd), 64 (3rd), and 72 (4). .. Among the output patterns of patterns 1 to 7 shown in the figure, those having the same symbol (the symbols with circled numerical values are the same) have the same on-signal output period (output mode). May be. Items indicated by "-" are excluded from the same items because they continue to output signals during the output period. It should be added that in each output pattern, the magnitude relation of the numerical value of the symbol (the numerical value with a circle) corresponds to the length relation of the output period. Further, regarding the output start timing, the signal that starts output from a certain trigger may be configured to start output after a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms, which is a timer interrupt cycle) elapses from the certain trigger. On the contrary, the signal whose output starts after a lapse of a predetermined time from a certain trigger may be configured to start the output from a certain trigger.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the game machines having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machines shown in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, the information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as the fifth embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit game control means MP40 that controls the processing related to the small hit game and the time from the change stop timing of the main game symbol to the start of the change of the next main game symbol are possible. The variable fixed control means MN30 that controls the processing related to a certain variable fixed time, the variable fixed related information temporary storage means MN30b that temporarily stores the information related to the variable fixed time, and the variable fixed time timer MN30t that can measure the variable fixed time. It has a V winning opening control means MN70 for managing the validity period of the V winning opening C26, and a V winning opening winning ball determining means MJ11-V for determining whether or not a ball has entered the V winning opening C26.

First, FIG. 76 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is the internal configuration of the second winning opening C20. The second large winning opening C20 is configured to be open during a small hit game, and in a situation where the V winning opening entry ball detection device C26s is effective during a small hit game, the V winning opening C26 (V winning opening entry). The jackpot is configured to start when a game ball enters the ball detection device C26s). The big winning opening that can be opened at the time of a big hit is the first big winning opening C10. The V winning opening C26 will be described later. In addition, at the time of a big hit and a small hit, the game is played by right-handed (a game method in which the game ball is continuously fired to the right of the game board surface when viewed from the player).

Next, FIG. 77 is an operation diagram relating to the second special winning opening C20, and more specifically, the opening mode of the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 provided in the second special winning opening C20 and the opening mode. FIG. 5 is an action diagram relating to whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C26 based on the closed mode. In the fifth embodiment, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the second large winning opening C20 (if the right-handed hit is continued) during the small hit game execution, the second large winning opening C20 is used. The opening mode of the second prize opening C20 (second prize opening electric accessory C21d) is configured to allow a plurality of game balls to enter {for example, 0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second open → 1 second open → closed ”, so whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning opening C26 depends on whether the game ball in the second major winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24. It is determined by whether or not it matches well with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

First, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the second large winning opening C20 enters the second large winning opening C20 inside (as a flow path of a game ball inside the second large winning opening C20). The ball is entered into the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting a ball, the V winning opening C26, the V winning opening entry detecting device C26s for detecting the entry into the V winning opening C26, and the V winning opening C26. It is equipped with a second large winning port discharge port C27, which is a discharge flow path for a game ball that was not present, and a second large winning port discharge detection device C27s for detecting the entry of a ball into the second large winning port discharge port C27. The lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C26 and the upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25 are provided, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are provided from the game board. In the closed state where the fall of the game ball can be hindered or easily hindered by being in a protruding state (advanced state) (to the front side when viewed from the player), and in the game board (back side when viewed from the player). It is configured to be in an open state in which the fall of the game ball cannot be hindered or is difficult to hinder (the game ball can fall) when it is in the retracted state (evacuated state) (so-called tongue-type attacker). It has a structure like this). More specifically, in the fifth embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the lower shielding member C25 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the V winning opening C26, and the lower shielding member C25 cannot be reached. When the member C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to reach or easily reach the V winning opening C26. Next, a specific flow path of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game execution will be described.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 during the small hit game is closed after passing through the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. It is guided to the member C24 and stops in a region (referred to as a stopping region) formed by the inner wall surface of the upper shielding member C24 and the second large winning opening C20 (placed on the upper shielding member C24). In the fifth embodiment, since only one game ball can be placed in the stop area, a certain game ball is placed in the stop area as shown in FIG. 77 (a). If so, the game ball guided inside the second prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. Then, the flow path that reaches the second special winning opening discharge detection device C27s and the second special winning opening discharge port C27 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it is impossible or difficult to enter the V winning opening C26). The stop area is configured to be guided to (the stop area) so that the certain game ball is not pulled out from the stop area due to the impact when the other game ball collides. It is configured). Here, the right part in FIG. 77 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section in FIG. 77 (a). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 77 (a), both the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a closed state {a state in which they protrude from the game board (toward the front side when viewed from the player) (the cross-sectional view). In this case, it is understood that the game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

Next, in FIG. 77 (a), when the upper shielding member C24 transitions from the closed state to the open state (in this example, the upper shielding member C24 changes from the closed state to the open state 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. Flow of the game ball (transition) (flow of the game ball when the game ball mounted on the upper shield member C24 falls below the upper shield member C24 when the upper shield member C24 is opened. Road) will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c).

Next, in FIG. 77 (b), when the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state (the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24) and reaches the position of the shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 is opened. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball in the state. In this case, the game ball that has reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 is not hindered from falling by the lower shielding member C25, and the V winning opening ball detecting device C26s and V winning are provided downstream of the lower shielding member C25. Can reach mouth C26. Here, the lower part of FIG. 77 (b) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the YY cross section in FIG. 77 (b). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 77 (b), both the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are retracted into the open state {inside the game board (back side when viewed from the player) (the cross section). In the figure, it is housed in the wall surface on the right side}, and the game ball that has fallen from the position of the upper shielding member C24 is below the position of the lower shielding member C25 without being hindered by the lower shielding member C25. It is understood that it is possible to fall into.

In addition, to explain the above aspect {aspect according to FIG. 77B} in more detail, it takes a substantially constant time (this example) for the game ball to flow down from the position of the upper shielding member C24 to the position of the lower shielding member C25. Then, 0.2 seconds) is required, and whether or not the game ball that has fallen from the position of the upper shielding member C24 and has reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 can enter the V winning opening C26 (the falling of the game ball). Whether or not it is hindered by the lower shielding member C25) can be determined depending on whether the lower shielding member C25 is in the open state or the closed state after the lapse of the certain time (0.2 seconds in this example). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened and the timing when the lower shielding member C25 is opened are substantially the same, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening C26. (Because both the upper shield member C24 and the lower shield member C25 are in the open state for 1 second), and the lower shield member C25 is in the open state for a certain substantially fixed time (in this example, in this example). Even when the upper shielding member C24 is opened as soon as 0.2 seconds), it may be possible to insert the game ball into the V winning opening C26. Further, the substantially constant time (0.2 seconds in this example) is subtracted from the opening time of the lower shielding member C25 (1 second in this example) from the timing when the lower shielding member C25 is opened. Even when the upper shielding member C24 is opened after a time (0.8 seconds in this example), it may be possible to insert the game ball into the V winning opening C26.

As described above, the stopping area has a structure in which only one game ball can be stopped. Here, in this example, the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (the timing at which the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24 and exits the stationary region) is a fixed time after the small hit game is executed (this example). Then, after 5 seconds) has passed. When a certain game ball is placed in the stationary area, as described above, the game ball that has entered the second prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the certain game ball is the game. It collides with the ball and is guided to the second special winning opening discharge detection device C27s and the second special winning opening discharge port C27 side. Therefore, only one game ball (a game ball that can reach the position of the upper shielding member C24) that can exist in the stop area until a certain time (5 seconds in this example) elapses after the start of the small hit game. It becomes. Further, in this example, the time required for the game ball entering the second large winning opening C20 to reach the position of the upper shielding member C24 is less than one second, and the second large prize opening C20. The opening mode of the winning opening C20 (second major winning opening electric accessory C21d) is "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed", and the last Even if it is assumed that the game ball enters the second large winning opening C20 during the third opening (opening for 1 second), it is the start of the small hit game that the game ball reaches the position of the upper shielding member C24. It takes less than 5 seconds. That is, during the period when the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state (in this example, 1 second after 5 seconds to 6 seconds after the start of the small hit), the new game ball cannot reach the position of the upper shielding member C24. Or it becomes difficult to reach. As described above, in this example, when a certain small hit game is executed, the ball can fall from the position of the upper shielding member C24 to the position of the lower shielding member C25 (the ball can enter the V winning opening C26). The game ball is configured to be only one ball (only one ball per small hit game).

Next, in FIG. 77 (c), when the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state (the game ball falls from the position of the upper shielding member C24) and reaches the position of the lower shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball in the closed state. In such a case, the game ball that has reached the position of the lower shielding member C25 collides with the lower shielding member C25 that is in a state (closed state) protruding from the game board (toward the front side when viewed from the player) and falls. It is hindered (the ball is hindered from entering the V winning opening C26 provided downstream of the lower shielding member C25). After that, the game ball rolls on the lower shielding member C25 and is guided to the second special winning opening discharge detection device C27s and the second special winning opening discharge port C27. Here, the lower part of FIG. 77 (c) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the ZZ cross section in FIG. 77 (c). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 77 (c), the upper shielding member C24 is retracted into the open state {inside the game board (back side when viewed from the player) (inside the wall surface on the right side in the cross-sectional view). Because the lower shielding member C25 is in a closed state {a state of protruding from the game board (toward the front side when viewed from the player) (a state of protruding to the left side in the cross-sectional view)}. It is understood that the game ball that has fallen from the position of the upper shielding member C24 is prevented from falling by the lower shielding member C25, and cannot flow down or is difficult to flow down downstream from the position of the lower shielding member C25. ..

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a certain time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game). The lower shielding member C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a fixed cycle (4 seconds cycle in this example) from the time when the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic). Under such circumstances, whether or not to enter the V winning opening C26 is mainly determined by the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing at which the small hit game starts) (lower). When a small hit game is started in which the timing when the shielding member C25 is opened and the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened coincide with each other, a game ball can enter the V winning opening C26. ).

The fifth embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state where the fall of the game ball cannot be hindered or is difficult to be hindered, and a state in which the fall of the game ball can be hindered or easily hindered. , Any structure may be used as long as the transition is possible, and the other configurations are not limited at all.

As described above, when the small hit game is in progress and the V winning opening ball detection device C26s is effective, the game ball enters the second large winning opening C20 and enters the V winning opening C26. , The right to transfer the big hit will be acquired, and the big hit will be started after the end of the small hit game being executed.

Next, FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 6200 (fifth), that is, in step 1800 (fourth), the main control board M executes the small hit game control process, and then steps 6200 (fifth). Then, the main control board M executes the V winning opening ball entry determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900. The small hit game control process in step 1800 (fourth) is the same as that in the fourth embodiment.

Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1326-1 (fifth), and after turning off the second main game flag in step 1324, the second main game random number is acquired in step 1326-1 (fifth). The determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is changing. In the case of Yes in 1326-1 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1328 to acquire the second main game content determination random number, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the second main game side is configured so that the hold cannot occur (the number of holds that can occur is 0) (the main game symbol does not change). In this case, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, a random number related to the entry is acquired, the hold is temporarily held, and then the hold is exhausted. In addition, the main game symbol is fluctuating. In this case, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the random number related to the entry is not acquired and is not held). Although not shown, the second main game content determination random number is not acquired even when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 when the second main game symbol is in the variable fixed time. (It is treated in the same way as when it is changing).

Here, when the configuration as in the fifth embodiment is adopted, it is preferable to enhance the interlocking between the game progress on the main game side and the game progress on the auxiliary game side. Since the game progress is controlled independently (when one game progresses, the interlocking control that waits for the other game progress is not performed), the interlocking should be improved by devising the time setting. It is preferable to configure it. More specifically, for example, (X) "average time value of the fluctuation time related to the auxiliary game symbol during the time reduction game (or the minimum time value when there are a plurality of types of fluctuation time)" + (Y) "second Total opening time of the main game start port electric accessory B11d (total period during which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is maintained in the open state when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened and closed by winning one auxiliary game symbol during the time reduction game. However, if there are multiple types of this total period, the minimum time value may be used.) ”≧ (Z)“ Average time of fluctuation time during small hits (especially for the second main game symbol) during time reduction games (Or the maximum time value when there are multiple types of variable time) "+ (W)" Waiting period until the start of execution of the small hit game during the time reduction game = so-called start demo period (including the fixed display period of the small hit symbol) (May be) ”+ (V)“ Total opening time of the second big winning opening C20 opened during the small hit game ”+ (T)“ Waiting time for discharging the game ball that entered the second big winning opening C20 It can be illustrated that each time is set so that the relationship with "" is established. In this configuration, when the game progress on the auxiliary game side is performed as (X) → (Y) (the game ball is picked up by the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the main game side When the game progress is performed in the order of (Z) → (W) → (V) → (T), even if the game progress on the new auxiliary game side is performed when this (T) is completed ( X) or (Y) is still ongoing, and the chance of the game ball being picked up by the second main game start port electric accessory B11d remains. Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, under the situation where the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol cannot be satisfied {(Z) → (W) → (V) → (T) is still ongoing} Then, even if the opening timing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is not reached {even if the game progresses on the new auxiliary game side, (X) is still ongoing}, the second main game symbol Under the situation where the fluctuation start condition of (Z) → (W) → (V) → (T) is completed}, the opening timing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is reached. Since {(X) when a new auxiliary game side game progress is being performed can be completed}, the link between the main game side game progress and the auxiliary game side game progress will be enhanced. (The so-called winning ball is less likely to occur).

Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 20 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 6100 (fifth) and steps 1435-1 (fifth) to 1435-5 (fifth), that is, in step 1410-3, the variation mode regarding the main game symbol is changed. After the determination, in step 6100 (fifth), the variable fixed control means MN30 executes the variable fixed time determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1415.

Further, after turning off the changing flag in step 1424, in step 1435-1 (fifth), the variable fixed control means MN30 sets the determined variable fixed time in the variable fixed time timer MN30t (decrement timer). To start. Next, in step 1435-2 (fifth), the variable fixed control means MN30 turns on the variable fixed flag in the flag area of the variable fixed related information temporary storage means MN30b, and in step 1435-4 (fifth). Transition.

Further, when the changing flag is off in step 1426, in step 1435-3 (fifth), the changing fixing control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the changing fixing related information temporary storage means MN30b and is changing and fixing. Determine if the flag is on. If Yes in step 1435-3 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1435-4 (fifth), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1435-4 (fifth), the variable fixed time control means MN30 refers to the variable fixed time timer MN30t, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1435-4 (fifth), in step 1435-5 (fifth), the variable fixed control means MN30 turns off the variable fixed in-flight flag in the flag area of the variable fixed related information temporary storage means MN30b. Then, the process proceeds to step 1430. On the other hand, if No in step 1435-4 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). In the process of the figure, the process related to the small hit symbol is executed as in the fourth mode. Further, as the fluctuation start condition of step 1403, it is added that the small hit game is not in progress and the fluctuation fixed time is not in progress.

Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 6100 (fifth) in FIG. 80 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 6102, the variable fixed control means MN30 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the game state is a time-shortened game state. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the fluctuation fixed control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and whether or not the symbol variation is a variation related to a small hit. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 6104, in step 6106, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the symbol variation to be a short time (0.2 seconds in this example), and the next process (process of step 1415). ). On the other hand, if No in step 6104, in step 6106, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the symbol variation to be a long time (0.8 seconds in this example), and next processing (step 1415). Process). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol in the time shortened game state is shorter than that of the small hit symbol in the non-time shortened game state, all the big hit symbols, and all the lost symbols. It is configured to be (short time). The factors that differ in the variable fixed time are not limited to this example, and the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state may be short, or the variable fixed time related to the big hit symbol or the lost symbol. May be short. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the time-shortening game state and the variable fixed time when the stop symbol is the small hit symbol are configured to be short, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop is stopped regardless of the game state. When the symbol is a small hit symbol, the variable fixed time may be short, and the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol is long (or short) regardless of the game state, and the second main game symbol The variable fixed time may be a short time (or a long time). Further, even in such a configuration, the output period of the signal for outputting the number of symbol fluctuations, which will be described later, is set when the fixed fluctuation time is long, the output period is long, and the fixed fluctuation time is short. May be configured so that the output period is also short.

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of the main game table in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that small hits are provided, one type of small hit symbol on the first main game side (7AK), and two types of small hit symbols on the second main game side (2BK / 7BK). Is. In the fifth embodiment, the probability-variable gaming state does not exist, and the gaming states related to the main game are the time-shortening gaming state and the non-time-shortening gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of types of small hit symbols (for example, two types of 2AK and 7AK) may be provided on the first main game side as well. In such a case, the difference in the winning ratio between "2AK" and "7AK" may be smaller than the difference in the winning ratio between "2BK" and "7BK" (for example, "2AK" is "0". Random value of "~ 450", "7AK" is the random value of "451-1023"). Further, in the case of such a configuration, in the case of the non-time reduction game state at the time of winning, after the end of the special game triggered by "2AK", the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state and is triggered by "7AK". After the end of the special game, the game will shift to the time-shortened game state, while in the case of the time-shortened game state at the time of winning, the time-shortened game state will be entered after the end of the special game triggered by "2AK". It may also be partially shifted), and it may be configured to shift to the time-reduced game state even after the end of the special game triggered by "7AK".

In addition, as the configuration in this example, the time reduction game state transition rate differs depending on the game state when the big hit or the small hit (ball entering the V winning opening) is won (the same big hit symbol). , Even if the same small hit symbol is used, whether or not the game shifts to the time-shortened game state differs depending on the game state), and more specifically, the big hit or small hit (V winning opening) in the time-shortened game state. The jackpot triggered by (entering the ball) may be configured to facilitate the transition to the time-saving game state.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1504-1 (fifth), that is, when the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1503, the specific game control is performed in step 1504-1 (fifth). The means MP50 turns off the specific game flags (main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1508. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, since the main game probability change flag does not exist, the process of turning it off in this process is deleted.

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 25 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1738, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and is not after the end of the special game triggered by entering the V winning opening C26. It is determined whether or not (in the fifth embodiment, the special game is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game). In the case of Yes in step 1738, in step 1739, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a time-saving jackpot symbol (after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to the time reduction game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1739, the process proceeds to step 1741. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1738, in step 1740, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the time saving small hit symbol (execution end of this special game). It is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the special game, which will later shift to the time-reduced game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK / 7BK). To do. If Yes in step 1740, the process proceeds to step 1741.

Next, in step 1741, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1742 and 1742, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing {step 1800 (fourth) process}. Even if No in step 1739 or step 1740, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1800 (fourth)}. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the special game is executed by the small hit game (triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game), the said case. Depending on the small hit symbol that triggered the game, it is configured so that whether or not the game shifts to the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game can be different.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the V winning opening winning ball determination process according to the subroutine of step 6200 (fifth) in FIG. 78. First, in step 6202, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 6210 described later, that is, ejected. It is determined whether or not the flag (flag that is turned on when the game ball enters the V winning opening C26) is off during the waiting time. In the case of Yes in step 6202, in step 6204, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the V winning opening entry determining means MJ11-V and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26. To do. In the case of Yes in step 6204, in step 6206, the V winning opening control means MN70 is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 6206, in step 6208, the V winning opening control means MN70 produces a V winning detection command (not shown, but a V winning detection effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C26). The command to be executed) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 6210, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). To do.

On the other hand, if No in step 6202, in step 6212, the V winning opening control means MN70 has a V winning opening valid period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). Determines if is finished. In the case of Yes in step 6212, in step 6214, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the next process (process of step 1900). ). Even if No in step 6204, step 6206, or step 6212, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). Further, in the case of No in step 6206, in other words, when the risk of illegal entry such as a game ball entering the V winning opening C26 is increased even though the small hit game is not executed. It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately executed. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to the ball entering the V winning opening C26 is "15R", and the series of flow of "small hit game → special game related to entering the V winning opening C26" is totaled. Then, the number of rounds related to the small hit game is "1R" and the number of rounds related to the special game is "15R", which is "16R".

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 78 in the fifth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so that a signal can be output according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5 and confirms the game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a signal of the number of fluctuations of the symbol; a signal for outputting the number of fluctuation stops (the number of fixed stops) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; Timing (for example, when Yes is set in step 1420); In the small hit symbol fluctuation stop timing in the time shortened game state, the ON signal is output for 0.200 seconds and then turned off, and in other cases (during the non-time shortened game state). At the fluctuation stop timing of the small hit symbol, the fluctuation stop timing of the big hit symbol, and the fluctuation stop timing of the lost symbol), the ON signal is output for 0.800 seconds and then turned off. Further, it is a signal of the number of symbol fluctuations; a signal for outputting the first main game symbol (fixed stop count); the fluctuation stop timing of the first main game symbol (for example, when Yes is set in step 1420); time reduction. At the fluctuation stop timing of the small hit symbol in the game state, it is turned off after outputting the ON signal for 0.200 seconds, and in other cases (the fluctuation stop timing of the small hit symbol, the fluctuation stop timing of the big hit symbol during the non-time shortened gaming state, At (stop timing of fluctuation of lost symbol), it turns off after outputting an on signal for 0.800 seconds.

With the above configuration, the game ball can enter the V winning opening C26 in the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the fifth embodiment, and the right to transfer the big hit can be obtained. In the game machine configured to be, the output period of the external signal output at the fluctuation stop timing of the small hit symbol in the time-reduced gaming state shall be shorter than the output period of the external signal output at other timings. Then, the signal output is appropriately executed without duplicating the external signal related to the small hit game winning and the external signal related to the big hit executed when the ball is entered into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game. Will be possible. Although the details will be described later, the output period of the external signal related to the big hit, which is executed when the ball is entered into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game, is the entry into the V winning opening C26. It is from the detected timing to the end of the jackpot. In the non-time shortened game state, since it is configured so that the ball cannot enter (or is difficult to) enter the V winning opening C26 when the normal game progresses, at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the small hit symbol in the time shortened game state. Only a short time signal output. In the time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of the small hit symbol is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the big hit symbol, and at least the shortest time of the fluctuation time of the small hit symbol is the fluctuation of the big hit symbol. It is preferable that the time is shorter than the shortest time. In addition, it is preferable that the special game start demonstration time of the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol is longer than the fluctuation fixed time related to the small hit symbol fluctuation (and the symbol confirmation signal output period related to the fluctuation fixed time). is there. In addition, the loss symbol variation may be relatively longer than the small hit symbol variation during the time reduction game.

(Example 1 of change from the fifth embodiment)
In the game machines having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machines shown in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, and the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 88 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is that the V large winning opening V30 (not shown, but the entire large winning opening from the splash accessory V11d to the V winning opening C26 is generically referred to) is provided. is there. First, the flow of the game until the game ball in the fifth embodiment enters the V winning opening C26 will be described in detail below.

First, the sorting device V16 is a winning slot (functioning as a sorting device) corresponding to a small hit game, which can be opened when a game ball enters the V large winning slot V30. As a specific configuration, the distribution device V16 includes a V winning opening C26 and a normal area V13 provided inside the sorting device V16 (V large winning opening V30), and a game ball as a V winning opening C26 and a normal area. A guidance device V15 that guides to any of V13, a V winning opening entry detection device C26s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening C26, and a detection of the entry of a game ball into the normal area V13. It is provided with a normal area entry detection device V14s, a splash accessory V11d, and a distribution device entry detection device V11s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the distribution device V16. In each component installed inside the above-mentioned distribution device V16 (V large winning opening V30), only the game ball that won a prize when the splash accessory V11d is in the open state (the position indicated by the dotted line in the figure). Is reachable, and is configured to be unreachable when the splash accessory V11d is in the closed state (the position indicated by the solid line in the figure). Here, the distribution device V16 includes an induction device V15 having one valve member, and when the splash accessory V11d is in the closed state, the valve member in the induction device V15 is in the lowered state (shown by the solid line in the figure). Position). On the other hand, when the splash accessory V11d is opened, the valve member in the induction device V15 is displaced to the ascending state (the position indicated by the broken line in the figure), and the splash accessory V11d is released from the open state. After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the device is displaced to the descending state again. Here, when the valve member in the guidance device V15 is in the ascending state, the flowing game ball is guided to the V winning opening C26, while when it is in the descending state, the flowing game ball is guided to the normal region V13. To. That is, it is configured so that only the game ball that has entered the distribution device V16 immediately after the splash accessory V11d is opened is given an opportunity to enter the V winning opening C26 (the guidance device). If the operation of V15 is not normal, an error of the induction device described later will occur). In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the displacement [in this example, the displacement is rotationally displaced with respect to the axis, but the displacement is in the vertical direction, in the horizontal direction, and in the front-rear direction. Aspect (for example, displacement such that a plate-shaped member moves out of or retracts from the game area D30 like a tongue), a mode of rotational displacement {for example, a circular member provided with a hole is revolved (for example, counterclockwise). , A mode in which a game ball is received and guided downstream when the hole is in a predetermined position (for example, 2 o'clock)}, any combination of two or more of these] A possible guiding device is provided, but a guiding member is present. It may not be configured (for example, a mode such as a so-called "clune" in which the ball is distributed to one of a plurality of holes depending on the rolling mode of the game ball). Further, in this example, the position of the V winning opening C26 is fixed, but it may be movable {for example, on a part of the outer circumference of the rotating member that rotates from the power start-up. A mode in which a specific area is provided, and when a game ball flows down at a predetermined position (for example, a position at 12 o'clock), the ball enters the V winning opening C26}.

Next, the left first main game start opening A10-1 and the right first main game start opening A10-2 are installed as start winning openings corresponding to the main game. Specifically, the left first main game start port A10-1 is provided with the left first main game start port entry detection device A11s-1, and the right first main game start port A10-2 is the right first main game start port A10-2. The main game start port entry ball detection device A11s-2 is provided. Here, the left first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s-1 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left first main game start opening A10-1, and the right first main game start opening entry. The ball detection device A11s-2 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right first main game start port A10-2, and both generate main game start port entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To do.

Here, in this example, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). The game ball that flows down is configured so that it is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 {However, this is not limited to the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). , May be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

Here, in this example, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the left first main game start port A10-1, and the right first main game start port A10- On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the right first main game start port A10-2, and the left first main game start. It is difficult to be guided to the mouth A10-1. Then, as described above, the left first main game start port A10-1 and the right first main game start port A10-2 are entry ports having the same functional role (main game start port entry). A game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) because it is an entrance that triggers the generation of ball information. Both of them collectively refer to the left first main game start port A10-1 and the right first main game start port A10-2, which are the triggers for generating the main game start port entry information. It is configured so that it can be easily guided to the game start port. However, the ratio (ball entry probability) of a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) to enter the left first main game start port A10-1 is the right side of the game area D30 (game area). The game playability in the fifth embodiment is to be configured so that the game ball flowing down (based on the center) is higher than the rate (ball entry probability) of entering the right first main game start port A10-2. It is suitable for realization, and in that case, a gauge configuration for reducing the rate of entering the right first main game start port A10-2 (arrangement of game nails and windmills arranged in the game area D30). (Change) may be adopted, or a further configuration for distributing the entry to the right first main game start port A10-2 {for example, a hole for entering the right first main game start port A10-2 A so-called crune} having a hole for returning to the game area D30 without entering the right first main game start port A10-2 may be provided on the game area D30. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left sides, respectively. Further, the game is not limited to this, and only one main game start port is provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) and a game flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Both the ball and the ball may be configured so as to be easily guided to the main game start port.

Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 78 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. First, the change from the fifth embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth variation 1), and the purpose is to provide a signal according to the characteristics of the game machine according to the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment. Add a referenced table so that it can be output. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth variation 1), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5-1. Based on the confirmed state of the game machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the first modification from the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it. As a specific changeable example, the signal of the symbol fluctuation system may be output only for the number of symbol fluctuations of the first main game, only the number of symbol fluctuations of the second main game may be output, or the first. A signal related to the number of symbol fluctuations common to the symbol variation of the main game and the symbol variation of the second main game may be output, and there is no problem as long as the configuration has any one or more of these signals. Further, the output time of the signal related to the first main game and the output time of the signal related to the second main game may be different.

First, it is a signal of the number of fluctuations of the symbol; a signal for outputting the number of fluctuation stops (the number of fixed stops) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; Timing (for example, when Yes is set in step 1420); Fluctuation of all symbols in the time-reduced gaming state At the stop timing, the ON signal is output for 0.6 seconds and then turned off, and all the symbols in the non-time-reduced gaming state are turned off. At the variable stop timing (for example, when Yes in step 1420), the ON signal is output for 1 second and then turned OFF. In addition, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big hit is in progress (for example, the condition device operation flag is on); is the big hit based on the entry into the V winning opening C26 triggered by the small hit. In the case of, it is the timing when the ball is detected in the V winning opening C26, and in the case of the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol, it is the timing of the condition device operation flag off → on (the timing of the big hit start); the big hit ends. (Condition device operation flag from on to off) Turns off after outputting an on signal. In addition, the signal that outputs that the jackpot is in progress (for example, the condition device operation flag is on) or the time reduction game state (for example, the main game time reduction flag is on) is sent to the V winning opening C26 triggered by the small hit. In the case of a big hit based on the winning ball, the timing when the ball entering the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag off → on timing (timing of the big hit start) The timing when the main game time saving flag is turned off at the timing when the jackpot ends (for example, the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on → off) or the timing when the time shortening game state is changed to the non-time saving game state (for example,). In the main game time reduction flag on → off), the on signal is output until the timing when the condition activator flag is off, and then it is turned off.

Further, it is a signal of the additional external terminal system; a signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game in the non-time reduction game state; is during the small hit game in the non-time reduction game state. At the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 within the valid period of the V winning opening (the period during which the game ball can acquire the right to transfer the jackpot by entering the V winning opening C26); 0.200 seconds on After that, it will be off for 0.200 seconds. In addition, the signal that outputs that the small hit game is in progress is; the opening start timing of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit game {for example, the timing when the small hit flag is turned on in step 1436 (4th)}. It is turned on until the end timing of the opening time of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit game. In addition, the signal that outputs that the second big winning opening ball entry sensor (second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) has detected the game ball is; the second big winning opening ball entry sensor off → on (for example, the second big winning opening). When the winning opening winning detection device C21s detects the entry of a game ball); it is turned on for 0.200 seconds and then turned off for 0.200 seconds. If the output period overlaps with other signals, the output period of the previously output signal from 0.200 seconds on to 0.200 seconds off is waited until the 0.200 seconds off is completed. Turns on later (waits for running output to finish).

In addition, it is a security system signal; a signal that outputs that an induction device abnormality error or an discharge error has been detected; in the case of an induction device abnormality error, it has a splash-shaped shape provided in the large winning opening. If the guidance device V15 is not opened / closed at the timing when it should be opened / closed (it is not opened according to the opening mode), or in the case of a discharge error, a switch for detecting entry into the grand prize opening (for example, Compared with the number of balls entered by the second major winning opening winning detection device C21s), it was detected by a switch for confirming discharge (for example, a ball entry detecting device at the discharge port) downstream of the switch. When the number of balls entered is larger; the timing when it is determined that the guidance device abnormality error or the timing when it is determined that the discharge error is performed; If the output period overlaps with other signals, the output period of the previously output signal from 0.200 seconds on to 0.200 seconds off is waited until the 0.200 seconds off is completed. Turns on later (waits for running output to finish). The guidance device abnormality error means that the position sensor provided in the guidance device V15 makes it possible to recognize whether the current state of the guidance device V15 is an open state or a closed state, and the open / closed state is the current gaming state. It is an error that occurs when it is determined whether the induction device V15 is appropriate according to (whether the induction device V15 should be in the open state, may be in the open state, or is not in the open state), and is inappropriate. Specifically, from the start of the small hit game to the elapse of a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game, an error does not occur even if it is in the open state, but an error occurs if it is in any other period. If it is detected during a big hit, it does not have to be regarded as an error.

With the above configuration, the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 in the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, so that the big hit is achieved. In a game machine configured to be able to acquire the transfer right, the jackpot is related depending on whether the jackpot is triggered by the stop of the jackpot symbol or the ball entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game. The signal output start timings are configured to be different, and the signal output mode can be set to be appropriate for the configuration of the fifth embodiment.

When the output time of the signal output after the main game symbol is stopped is different between the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state as in the first change from the fifth embodiment, the variation is fixed. Similar to the output time of the signal, the time is set to a short time in the time-reduced game state and a long time in the non-time-reduced game state, so that a hold occurs in the non-time-reduced game state. Even when this is not possible, by lengthening the interval between each fluctuation, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing the player to feel tired due to the fact that the game is not progressing.

(Example 2 of change from the fifth embodiment)
The information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different in the game machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machine shown in the first modification from the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is referred to as change example 2 from the fifth embodiment, and the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment. The characteristics of the game playability of the second modification from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the figure.

First, the second big winning opening C20 is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at a small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the out opening D80 and above the first large winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C24) and the V winning opening C26 and the V winning opening C26 that trigger the execution of a special game (in this example, a game in which the first large winning opening C10 is opened) described later are provided inside the mouth solenoid C24). The V winning opening ball detection device C26s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 are directly discharged to the outside of the second major winning opening C20, or the V winning opening C26. It is provided with a distribution accessory C23 for allocating whether or not to be guided to. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second large winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable (excite the 2nd prize opening solenoid C24 to make it variable). In this example, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d, but has a variable mode of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d. Is different, and adopts a mode in which the game board (game area D30) is changed in the direction perpendicular to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d is transparent from the game board (game area D30) and the state where it is almost completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as a retracted state). It takes a state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) until it approaches the board D16. Then, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d is a box-shaped member C20-1 (a game in which the ball is inserted into the box-shaped member) capable of receiving a game ball protruding from the game board (game area D30) and flowing down the game area D30. When the ball acts as a lid (the ball enters the second prize opening C20), that is, when the second prize opening electric accessory C21d takes a retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended) Allows the game ball to enter the 2nd prize opening C20), while the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the 2nd) when the 2nd prize opening electric accessory C21d takes an advanced state. It is configured so that the game ball cannot enter (inside the large winning opening C20) (this box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, whether the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 is directly discharged to the outside of the second major winning opening C20 by the distribution accessory C23, or is once guided to the V winning opening C26. It is configured to be sorted.

Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C26 and plays a role of directing (notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C26) by lighting or the like.

The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the change example 2 from the fifth embodiment, but it is developed on this game board prior to the explanation of the characteristic part of the change example 2 from the fifth embodiment. I will outline the contents of the game. First, the game ball launched toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The flow route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is flowed down or is roughly divided into two. Here, the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game start opening A10 or the first large winning opening C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is assisted. You will have the opportunity to enter the game start opening H10, the second big winning opening C20, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to be easier to enter the first large winning opening C10 than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route. "Easy" and "Difficult to enter" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively).

Also, on the left-handed route (although not shown), a game ball may or may not be guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. On the right-handed route (although not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is smaller than that of the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flow-down mode. take.

More specifically, regarding the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the firing intensity of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) , Flying in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32, and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (reference to the center of the game area) of the game area D30, and falling due to its own weight. To start. Next, the dropped game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 directly below the ball with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and is less than two game balls. The ball is collected at D50 (regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and then is slightly inclined to the left in the horizontal direction and has a three-stage stance. 1. After rolling on each passage of the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the out port D80.

Here, the first-stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3 are formed. , The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed in advance to the game board. That is, when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the exit of the rectifying passage D50. The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → first The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → The game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D80. , And is configured to adopt a substantially uniform flow mode.

In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), it is assisted. When the ball enters the game start port H10 in a stable manner and the electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (by extension, the second large winning opening) When the ball is stably entered (inside C20) and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened, the ball can be stably entered into the first large winning opening C10. It should be noted that the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3 can be in a retracted state and an advanced state. The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game start port B10.

In such a configuration, the game ball released from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second prize opening electric accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, it is important to have a configuration for reducing the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially falling) in the rectifying passage D50. In the second modification from the fifth embodiment, as shown in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the rectifying passage D50, and rectification is performed by this shape. The game ball falls in a zigzag manner in the passage D50, so that the momentum of the game ball is reduced. In this example, the same reasoning is applied, and a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is also provided.

Further, in the second modification from the fifth embodiment, the small hit winning probability on the second main game side is about 1/5 (when the second main game hold is the maximum number, any second main game hold). The number of reservations that can be easily won). In addition, as the flow of the progress of the game, "Winning the big hit on the first main game side (stopping the big hit symbol or entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit) → Shift to the time reduction game state → Second main game Win a small hit symbol and win a big hit triggered by the small hit → Shift to a non-time reduction game state → Win a second main game small hit symbol with 4 remaining reservations on the 2nd main game side It is a game that acquires a game ball by repeating such a flow.

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 78 in the second modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is that the second main game side is also configured so that up to four holds can occur, and the configuration is the same as the process of the present embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted.

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 78 in the second modification from the fifth embodiment. First, the change from the fifth embodiment is about step 3504-5 (fifth variation 2), and the purpose is to provide a signal according to the characteristics of the game machine according to the change example 2 from the fifth embodiment. Add a referenced table so that it can be output. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-5 (fifth variation 2), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 5-2. Based on the confirmed state of the game machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the second modification from the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a big hit system signal; it outputs that it is in a big hit, a small hit, and a time-shortening gaming state, that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player; a big hit start (for example, the condition device operation flag is off → on). ) After 0.504 seconds; ON signal until the timing when the main game time reduction flag is off when the condition device operation flag is on → off, or the timing when the condition device operation flag is off when the main game time reduction flag is on → off. Output. Even when the main game time reduction flag is turned off when the condition device operation flag is turned on and off, which is the timing when the output can be ended, all the symbol fluctuations related to the hold related to the second main game side are finished. It will be on until you do.

With the above configuration, the game ball enters the V winning opening C26 in the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game according to the second modification from the fifth embodiment, so that the big hit is achieved. In a gaming machine configured to be able to acquire the transition right, when a signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is output, even if the jackpot ends and the game shifts to the non-time reduction gaming state, the second main game When the second main game hold becomes a big hit by configuring the output of the signal to continue until the hold no longer exists (when the second main game hold becomes a big hit and the big hit is won with the small hit as an opportunity). ), The state advantageous to the player (consecutive villa state) will continue, and is suitable for the change example 2 from the fifth embodiment. It is possible to set an appropriate signal output mode for the above.

Further, in the second modification from the fifth embodiment, since it is a game machine that can acquire the right to transfer the big hit by entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game, the excess winning (cumulative) during the big hit. ) Is determined, and the threshold value N (variable depending on the big hit symbol) is configured to target 2R or later after the discharge matching is matched in consideration of the discharge in the small hit.

Further, the error notification condition based on the number of differences from the fraud confirmation switch becomes stricter in the order of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the specific area C22. However, other error notification modes, game states, and end conditions may be configured to be the same. Further, a small hit is provided on the first main game side, and the small hit on the first main game side is opened to a large winning opening different from the small hit on the second main game side to enter the V winning opening C26. If it is a small hit to incite a player who does not (or is difficult to) ball, it is almost impossible to enter the V winning opening C26 with the small hit on the first main game side (if any, cheating). (Because this is the case), the security outer end signal may be output when the ball enters the V winning opening C26 in such a small hit, and may not be output in other cases. In addition, the cheating confirmation switch is a game ball that has passed after passing through the ball entry detection sensor of each entry port (first main game start port, second main game start port, specific area, etc.). It is a switch installed downstream from each entry port to confirm that it has been discharged to the outside of the game machine, and the number of game balls detected at each entry port (number of ball entry detections) and fraudulent Error notification is performed based on the number of differences from the number of game ball detections of the action confirmation switch. Assuming that the number of differences is A, B, C and the magnitude relationship is A> B> C, the number of differences in the error notification conditions corresponding to each entry port is A for the first main game start port and A for the second main game. The starting port is B and the specific area is C {the greater the influence on the result of the game, the smaller the number of differences (more likely to cause an error)}.

(Sixth Embodiment)
In the game machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machine shown in the second modification from the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as the sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, the sixth embodiment has a start demo time timer MP30t4 that can measure the start time of the special game end demo time provided before the execution of the first round in the special game.

First, FIG. 95 is an example of the main game table in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a small hit is provided so that the small hit winning rate on the first main game side is higher than the small hit winning rate on the second main game side. In addition, various types of jackpot symbols of the sixth embodiment are provided. Specifically, the latent loop jackpot symbol (which will shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and will shift to the time-saving gaming state? Whether or not it is a big hit symbol that depends on the game state at the time of big hit, details will be described later), the first latent big hit symbol (it will shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit ends, and it will shift to the time shortened game state Whether or not it is a jackpot symbol that depends on the game state at the time of jackpot, details will be described later), non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends), probability variation A jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot) is provided.

Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is in steps 1646-1 (sixth) to 1646-4 (sixth), that is, in step 1604, when the accessory continuous actuating device flag is off, the step. In 1646-1 (6th), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game start demo flag (special provided before the execution of the first round in the special game). It is determined whether or not the flag (flag that is turned on at the start of the game start demo time) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1646-1 (sixth), in step 1646-2 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game start demo flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. To. Next, in step 1646-3 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 notifies the player of the start demo time (for example, 5 seconds, which is a big hit) to the start demo time timer MP30t4 (decrement timer). The effect to be performed is executed), the start is set, and the process proceeds to step 1646-4 (sixth). On the other hand, even if No in step 1646-1 (6th), the process proceeds to step 1646-4 (6th). Next, in step 1646-4 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the start demo time timer MP30t4 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In step 1646-4 (sixth), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1606, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 97 is a game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 96 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is in steps 1745-1 (sixth) to 1745-2 (sixth), that is, in step 1745-1 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 is a special game. Related information With reference to the temporary storage means MB20b, the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in this example, 3A, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B) is determined. In step 1745-1 (sixth), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1704, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1706. Further, after the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1704, or after setting a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c in step 1706, in step 1745-2 (sixth). The specific game control means MP50 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped jackpot symbol can shift to the latent probability variation jackpot symbol {probability-variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit symbol (the game state after the big hit may differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit), and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 1A / 3A}. In the case of step 1745-2 (sixth) Yes, the process proceeds to step 1708, and in the case of No, in step 1745-3 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 is at the time of winning the jackpot of the stopped jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not the gaming state of is not a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1745-3 (sixth), in step 1745-4 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped jackpot symbol is the first latent. Probability variable jackpot symbol (As the gaming state after the jackpot ends, if a jackpot is made in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, the game shifts to the probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, and in other game states. When a big hit is made, it is a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A). In addition, "1A" is a latent loop big hit symbol, and as a game state after the big hit ends, when a big hit is made in the non-time shortened game state, the game shifts to the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, and the time shortened game. When a big hit is made in the state, it is a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1745-4 (sixth), in step 1745-5 (sixth), the specific game control means MP50 may be in a probability-variable gaming state when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the jackpot is won. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1745-5 (sixth), the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (fourth)}, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1708.

Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the sixth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-6 (sixth), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so that a signal can be output according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-6 (sixth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 6 and confirms the game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a signal of a big hit system; it outputs that it is in a big hit and a time-shortening gaming state, that is, it is in an advantageous state for the player; a big hit start (for example, the condition device operation flag is off → on); Until the timing when the main game time reduction flag is off when the operation flag is on → off. It should be noted that the transition period from the stop of the big hit symbol to the non-time reduction game state due to the stop of the big hit symbol also remains on.

Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; a signal for outputting the number of fluctuation stops (number of fixed stops) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol; Stop timing (for example, when Yes is set in step 1420); Fluctuation of small hit symbol in the time shortened game state At the stop timing, the ON signal is output for 0.200 seconds and then turned off, and in other cases (non-time shortened game state). At the fluctuation stop timing of the small hit symbol, the fluctuation stop timing of the big hit symbol, and the fluctuation stop timing of the lost symbol), the ON signal is output for 0.800 seconds and then turned off.

Further, it is an IN / OUT system signal; a signal for outputting the number of prize balls to the winning opening; an output every time the payout number detection switch detects 10 game balls; the payout number detection switch outputs 10 game balls. Output every time it is detected; 0.128 seconds on → 0.064 seconds off, and if duplicated, 0.064 seconds off waits for the end and then turns on (until the running output ends) Wait). Further, the time when the signal is turned off is shorter than the time value when the signal is turned on as the output time of one signal.

It is also a big hit system signal; it outputs that the big hit has been executed and the time reduction game state has ended; 0.504 seconds after the big hit symbol stops; the big hit ends (condition device operation flag on → off), or Main game time reduction flag Outputs from on to off. The output start timing is not limited to this, and may be set to the start of the big hit (condition device operation flag off → on) or the start of the special game start demo time. In the sixth embodiment, whether or not the signal for outputting the end of the time reduction game state (the time reduction game state) is continuously output after the end of the big hit depends on the type of the big hit symbol and whether or not it is continuously output. / Or determined depending on the game state when the jackpot symbol is stopped. Specifically, for the first latent probability variation symbol (3A in this example), when the game is stopped in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the signal is not continuously output and at the end of the big hit. While the output ends, if the game is stopped in another gaming state, the signal is continuously output. In addition, a latent loop jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is not the first latent probability variation jackpot symbol among the latent probability variation jackpot symbols, and if it is stopped in the time reduction game state, it shifts to the time reduction game state after the jackpot ends, but it is a non-time reduction game. It is a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the time shortened gaming state after the jackpot ends when stopped in the state, and for 1A in this example, which of the non-time shortened gaming state (probability variable gaming state and non-probability variable gaming state) If the signal is stopped at (including), the signal is not continuously output and the output ends at the end of the jackpot, while in the time-shortened gaming state (including both the probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state). When stopped, the signal will be continuously output. In addition, the signal output is not limited to the continuation of the signal after the jackpot ends, but the special game start demo time, the special game end demo time, the signal output period related to the special game start demo time, and the signal output related to the special game end demo time. The period and the like may also be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol and / or the gaming state when the jackpot symbol is stopped. For example, when the first latent jackpot symbol is stopped in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. The special game ends when the first latent jackpot symbol stops in a game state other than the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, rather than the signal output period related to the special game end demo time and the special game end demo time. The signal output period related to the demo time and the special game end demo time may be configured to be longer.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation jackpot symbol, the non-probability variation jackpot symbol, the first latent symbol, and the latent loop symbol are present according to the sixth embodiment, the external signal of the jackpot system is also won. It will differ depending on which is the jackpot symbol and / or which is the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Even in such a case, an appropriate signal output mode can be obtained by adopting the configuration of the sixth embodiment.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, an error occurs when the difference A between the number of winnings and the number of discharges in the big winning opening during the big hit is 100 balls or more, and the first main game starting opening A10 and the fraudulent activity confirmation during the big hit. Comparing with the error when the switch detection count error B is 100 or more, at the jackpot end timing, the cumulative value is cleared for A and the cumulative value is not cleared for B. In the case of a big winning opening error, The error may occur even if the value of A has a plurality of error modes and the jackpot is not hit, and the error notification mode and the error (display) end condition may both be configured to be the same. ..

(7th Embodiment)
In the game machines having characteristics different from the characteristics of the game machines shown in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, the information to be output to the hall computer HC may be different. Therefore, the configuration in such a case is defined as the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 100 is an example of a main game table in the seventh embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a small hit is provided so that the small hit winning rate on the first main game side is higher than the small hit winning rate on the second main game side. In addition, various types of jackpot symbols of the seventh embodiment are provided, and the number of rounds that can be executed is also various types such as 2R, 12R, and 16R (depending on the number of execution rounds at the time of jackpot, the jackpot is concerned. The production inside can be different). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the rounds executed in the special game are a short open round (a round in which the game ball is difficult to enter) which is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a length which is relatively advantageous to the player. It is composed of open rounds (rounds in which a game ball is easy to enter, and the number of rounds in which the long open round is executed is called the actual number of rounds), and the short open round and the long open round are combined into one. By mixing in the special game, the number of rounds in which the special game is executed (the number of execution rounds) and the actual number of rounds in which the prize ball can be substantially easily obtained (the number of long open rounds) can be made different. (For example, in the case of "3A", "the number of short open rounds = 8R, the number of long open rounds = 4R, the actual number of rounds = 4R"). In addition, "2A", "3A", "3B", "5A", and "5B" are all big hits of 12R, but the actual number of rounds is different, and by configuring in this way, it will be described later. It is possible to effectively execute the round notification effect display (the effect of inciting the player to see the actual number of rounds of the big hit and the game state after the big hit).

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47 in the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 5640-1 (7th) to 5640-6 (7th), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 5614, or in step. When the special game in progress flag is turned on in 5602, in step 5640-1 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 is on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. The number of rounds (in the seventh embodiment, the actual number of rounds is displayed) and the number of winnings are sequentially displayed (depending on the playability, the type of jackpot, etc., it may be executed as necessary). Next, in step 5640-2 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot related to the first main game symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 5640-2 (7th), in step 5640-3 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the jackpot during the execution is maximum. It is determined whether or not the round jackpot (in this example, the number of rounds executed and the actual number of rounds are both 16R jackpots and 7A). In the case of Yes in step 5640-3 (7th), in step 5640-4 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the round notification effect display (how many rounds the actual number of rounds in the jackpot is). / Or after inciting the player the game state after the end of the big hit, finally set the command related to the actual number of rounds and / or the effect of notifying the game state), and proceed to step 5626. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case of a big hit related to the first main game symbol and the actual number of rounds is not the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example), the round notification effect display is displayed during the big hit. It will be executed. In the seventh embodiment, the latent probability variable jackpot symbol (when the player wins in the non-profit variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the game shifts to the probabilistic variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends. A jackpot symbol (referred to as 1A) that is both a jackpot symbol) and a "substantial 0R" may be provided, and if such a configuration is provided, the game will be in a "substantial 4R" and a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends. The same effect as the effect during the special game related to "3A" (for example, the round notification effect display) to be shifted can be performed during the special game related to "1A" and during the small hit game related to a certain small hit symbol. It may be configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a high-profit big hit, a low-profit big hit, or a small hit for the player at the start of the big hit or the small hit. As a suitable configuration for making the discrimination difficult, when the jackpot signals related to "1A" and "3A" are output, the output is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the jackpot. It is not immediately possible to determine whether a big hit or a small hit is won, and the configuration can be such that the interest of the game is not impaired. Further, by setting the timing of starting the output of the jackpot signals related to "1A" and "3A" to be the same timing, setting the number of execution rounds to the same number of rounds (for example, 12R), and making the actual number of rounds different. , The number of rounds indicated by the round lamp (a lamp that notifies the number of execution rounds of the jackpot and always lights up at the start of the jackpot), and the data display by outputting the same jackpot signal (information related to the result of the game, etc. to the player Since the lamp lighting mode of the notification device) and the effect during the jackpot are the same, it is possible to prevent the player from determining which jackpot was won, and the configuration does not impair the enjoyment of the game. can do.

Further, in the case of No in step 5640-2 (7th), in step 5640-5 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the jackpot during the execution is , It is determined whether or not it is the lowest round jackpot (in this example, it is a jackpot of 2R and 2B). If Yes in step 5640-5 (7th) or No in step 5640-3 (7th), the process proceeds to step 5624. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5640-5 (7th), in step 5640-6 (7th), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the effect for the minimum round (most of the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit). Since the game state that cannot be acquired and the game state after the end of the big hit becomes the non-probability variable game state, a command related to (displaying an effect notifying the player that the profit is low) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5626.

Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-6 (sixth), the purpose of which is a table to be referred to so as to be able to output a signal according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. Is to add. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-6 (sixth), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 7 and confirms the game. Based on the state of the machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, the signal of the jackpot system; the signal that outputs that the jackpot is being executed, which will shift to the time-saving game state; the condition device related to the jackpot symbol that will shift to the time-saving gaming state after the execution is completed. 5 seconds after the operation flag is turned off → on; the condition device operation flag is output from on to off. In addition, it is output that the jackpot is won in the non-time shortened game state and the jackpot is being executed or the time shortened game state is in progress, which is the transition to the time shortened game state after the execution is completed; the jackpot ends. Conditional device operation flag off for the jackpot symbol that will later shift to the time-reduced game state → After a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed from on; Output until the conditional device operation flag is off and the non-time-reduced game state is entered. In addition, it outputs that a big hit is in progress; condition device operation flag off → on; condition device operation flag on → off. In addition, the fact that a big hit is being made and the fact that a small hit is being made are output; the condition device operation flag is off → on or the small hit flag is off → on; the condition device operation flag is on → off or the small hit flag is on → off. The big hit system signal output 5 seconds after the timing of turning off the conditional device operation flag described above is the type of big hit executed by the player (the number of rounds in which the game ball can be executed, after the big hit is completed). The output start timing is delayed by 5 seconds from the start of the jackpot so that the game state of If the output is started later, it will be recognized by the player). Therefore, when the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds (16R) is executed, the above-mentioned round notification effect display is not executed. The jackpot signal that is output after a second is not output (the signal that is output from the timing of the condition device operation flag off → on is output).

Further, it is an IN / OUT system signal; a signal for outputting the number of prize balls to the winning opening; an output every time the payout number detection switch detects 10 game balls; the payout number detection switch outputs 10 game balls. Output 0.004 seconds after detection; 0.1 seconds on → 0.1 seconds off. In case of duplication, it turns on after waiting for 0.1 second off to finish (waits for the output being executed to finish). Further, the time when the signal is turned off is shorter than the time value when the signal is turned on as the output time of one signal. In the case of a prize ball of 10 balls or more and less than 20 balls, the winning opening switch signal is turned on once, whereas the information on the planned number of prize balls is turned on twice (on → off → on → off). Further, when the winning opening switch signal is turned on, the number of game balls for the counted 10 balls may be reset (or 10 may be subtracted from the counted value).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine having various types of jackpots according to the seventh embodiment, the output timing of the external signal of the jackpot system differs depending on the type of jackpot. By configuring the above, whether the player is a big hit that can win the game ball, the player is a big hit that cannot get the game ball, or is a small hit, and how many rounds are executed in the big hit It is possible to appropriately execute the production related to the interest of the player without the player knowing in advance whether or not there is.

(Example 1 of change from the 7th embodiment)
It should be noted that even a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment can be configured to output the same information as that of the seventh embodiment to the hall computer HC. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as change example 1 from the seventh embodiment, and the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

Here, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the end demo time timer MP34t5 that can measure the special game end demo time provided after the execution of all the rounds in the special game is completed is provided.

First, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the seventh embodiment are for steps 1648-1 (7th variation 1) to 1648-8 (7th variation 1), that is, the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1602. In this case, in step 1648-1 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game end demo flag (of all rounds in the special game). Determines if the flag that turns on after the execution is finished) is off. If Yes in step 1648-1 (7th variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1604, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (7th variation 1).

Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1644, in step 1648-2 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on the game end demo flag. In the case of Yes in step 1648-2 (7th variation 1), in step 1648-3 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special during execution. It is determined whether or not the game is a special game won in the normal game state (non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state). In the case of Yes in step 1648-3 (7th variation 1), in step 1648-4 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is a jackpot during a stop. In step 1648-5 (7th variation 1) for determining whether or not the symbol is a probability variation jackpot symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B in this example), in the case of Yes, step 1648-5. In (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 uses the end demo time timer MP34t5 (decrement timer) as the end demo time for a long time (5 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the short end demo time described later). (It may be a long time) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (7th variation 1). After the end of the special game related to the probabilistic jackpot symbol, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1648-3 (7th variation 1) or 1648-4 (7th variation 1), in step 1648-6 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 ends the demo time. Start by setting the timer MP34t5 (decrement timer) to a short time as the end demo time (in this example, it is 3 seconds, which may be shorter than the long end demo time described above), and step 1648-. It shifts to 7 (7th change 1).

Next, in step 1648-7 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the end demo time timer MP34t4 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1648-7 (7th variation 1), in step 1648-8 (7th variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is a special game in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. The end demo flag is turned off and the process proceeds to step 1642. On the other hand, if No in step 1648-7 (7th variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the end demo time (special game end demo time) during the jackpot can be different depending on the game state and the jackpot symbol won. Specifically, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is won in the normal game state (when the first hit is won), the special game end demo time related to the probabilistic jackpot symbol is configured to be long. If the special game end demo time is long, the effect execution time executed during the end demo time and the output time of the external signal output during the end demo time are also long. Similarly, regarding the special game start demo time, if the special game start demo time is long, the effect execution time executed during the start demo time and the external signal output during the start demo time The output time is also long. Comparing the special game start demo time and the special game end demo time, the difference between the longest time and the shortest time of the special game start demo time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) and the special game end demo Regarding the difference between the longest time and the shortest time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value), it is preferable that the difference in the special game end demo time is larger (or the ratio is smaller). .. However, due to the design of the game machine, even if a big hit is made under any circumstances, if it is necessary to execute any of the effects during the special game end demo time, the relationship related to the above difference (or ratio) is reversed. However, the special game start demo time may be configured so that the difference is larger (or the ratio is smaller). In the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state to the probabilistic variable game state and the time shortened game state. The signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting from the non-probability variable game state and the time-reduced game state to the probabilistic variable game state and the time-reduced game state is from the non-probable variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state. The signal output period related to the special game end demo time when transitioning to the non-probability variable game state and time-reduced game state, and the transition from the non-probable variable game state and time-reduced game state to the non-probable variable game state and time-reduced game state. It is preferable that the time is longer than the signal output period related to the special distinction game end demonstration time. In addition, from the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting from the non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state to the probabilistic variable game state and time shortened game state, or from the non-probable variable game state and time shortened game state. In addition to the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting to the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, the non-probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game from the non-probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state It is related to the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting to the state and the special game end demo time when shifting from the non-probability variable game state and time shortened game state to the non-probable variable game state and time shortened game state. It is preferable that the signal output period is longer than the signal output period related to the special game end demo time when shifting from the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state to the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state. is there.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 3504-7 (7th), and the purpose thereof is to output a signal according to the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the 7th embodiment. So, add a table to reference. That is, after confirming the state of the game machine in step 3502, in step 3505-7 (7th), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 7-1 to confirm the confirmation. Based on the state of the game machine, a signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the first modification from the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big hit is being executed or that the small hit game that was won during the non-time reduction game state is in progress; the big hit start timing (condition device operation flag off → on), Or, at the start of the effect of the symbol variation related to the small hit symbol in the non-time reduction game state; the big hit end timing (condition device operation flag on → off) or the small hit end (small hit execution flag on → off) → big winning opening Closed → Output until the end timing of the final production time. The signal is not output when the small hit game is won in the time-reduced game state. In addition, the signal that outputs that the small hit game is in progress is at the start of the effect execution of the symbol variation related to the small hit symbol in the non-time shortened game state; the small hit end (small hit execution flag on → off) → the big winning opening is closed. → Output until the end timing of the final production time. In addition, unlike the above-mentioned signal, the signal is output at the time of winning all small hits. Although not shown, the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo time are provided for the small hit as well as the big hit, and the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo time are set as the small hit symbol. It may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of stopping. Also, since the opening time of the big winning opening related to the small hit is relatively short compared to the opening time of the big winning opening related to the big hit, if the start demo time is short, the small hit symbol will stop. Even if the game ball is launched, the possibility of entering the big winning opening is low, so when comparing the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo time, the maximum time and the shortest time of the small hit start demo time are (Or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) and the difference between the longest time and the shortest time of the small hit end demo time (or the ratio of the shortest time value to the longest time value) It is preferable that the time is larger (or the ratio is smaller), and the value of the difference is larger (or the ratio is smaller) in the small hit end demo time than in the case of the big hit described above. Alternatively, there is a difference only in the end demo time). The output period of the signal related to the small hit is from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit end demo time.

In this example, the configuration may be as follows. It should be added that the following configurations are applicable to all the embodiments in this example.
(1) The difference between the time value of the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state and the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the time shortened game state is the jackpot of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state. It is larger than the difference between the end demo time and the time value between the jackpot end demo time of the jackpot won in the game state.
(2) The difference between the time value of the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state and the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the time shortened game state is the jackpot of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state. It is smaller than the difference between the end demo time and the time value between the jackpot end demo time of the jackpot won in the game state.
(3) The difference between the time value of the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state and the jackpot start demo time of the jackpot won in the time shortened game state is the jackpot of the jackpot won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same value as the difference between the end demo time and the time value of the jackpot end demo time of the jackpot won in the time reduction game state.
(4) The difference between the time value of the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state and the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the time shortened game state is the difference in the time value won in the non-time shortened game state. It is larger than the difference between the time value of the small hit end demo time of the small hit and the small hit end demo time of the small hit won in the time reduction game state.
(5) The difference between the time value of the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state and the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the time shortened game state is the difference in the time value won in the non-time shortened game state. It is smaller than the difference between the time value of the small hit end demo time of the small hit and the small hit end demo time of the small hit won in the time reduction game state.
(6) The difference between the time value of the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state and the small hit start demo time of the small hit won in the time shortened game state is the difference in the time value won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same value as the difference between the time value of the small hit end demo time of the small hit and the small hit end demo time of the small hit won in the time reduction game state.
In this way, by appropriately designing the time values of the big hit start demo time, the big hit end demo time, the small hit start demo time, and the small hit end demo time, the big hit (small hit) won in the non-time shortened game state. Depending on whether or not the game is played, it is possible to speed up the speed of the consecutive villas, or to encourage the player to decide what the game state will be after the big hit, and to perform an effect that matches the playability. As described above, the time reduction game state may mean that the main game time reduction flag is on or that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time. The shortened gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is activated, and the non-time shortened gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not activated.

With the above configuration, the two information terminals in the game machine configured to output the signal related to the execution of the small hit game separately to the two information terminals according to the change example 1 from the seventh embodiment. When is set to the information terminal A and the information terminal B, the information terminal A is configured to output at the time of winning a small hit in the non-time reduction game state, whereas the information terminal B is configured to output at the time of winning all the small hits. As a result, the external signal output in the configuration of the first modification from the seventh embodiment can be appropriately executed.

(Example 2 of change from the 7th embodiment)
It should be noted that even a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment can be configured to output the same information as that of the seventh embodiment to the hall computer HC. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as change example 2 from the seventh embodiment, and the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the second modification from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the 7th embodiment are steps 1649-1 (7th variation 2) to 1649-2 (7th variation 2) and step 1650 (2nd), that is, the special game in step 1610. After setting the start display instruction command, or when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned on in step 1604, in step 1649-1 (7th variation 2), the special game control means MP30 uses the special game. Related information With reference to the temporary storage means MB20b, the current round is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second major winning opening having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, 2R / 4R). Judge whether or not. Next, in step 1650 (second), the special game control means MP30 executes the distribution game execution process according to the second embodiment described above, and proceeds to step 1638.

Further, after turning on the special game end demo flag in step 1648-2 (7th change 1), in step 1649-2 (7th change 2), the special game control means MP30 uses the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Refer to, and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a special game that has been won in the time-reduced game state. In the case of Yes in step 1649-2 (7th change 2), the process proceeds to step 1648-5 (7th change 1), a long end demo time is set, and step 1649-2 (7th change 2) is set. ) Is No, the process proceeds to step 1648-6 (7th variation 1) and a short end demo time is set. As described above, in the second modification from the seventh embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the second large winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game, so that the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to move to. In addition, the special game end demo time is configured so that the special game won in the time-reduced game state has a long end demo time.

With the above configuration, in the game machine according to the second modification from the seventh embodiment, a specific area is provided in the large winning opening, and the game ball enters the specific area to end the Tobetsu game. From the 7th embodiment or the 7th embodiment, even if the special game end demo time is set to be long in the case of a big hit that can be changed to the probability fluctuation game state later and is won in the time shortening game state. It is possible to configure the same external signal output mode as in the first modification of the above.

(Example 3 of change from the 7th embodiment)
Even in a gaming machine having characteristics different from the characteristics of the gaming machine shown in the seventh embodiment, the same information as in the second modification from the seventh embodiment to the seventh embodiment is provided to the hall computer HC. It can be configured to output. Therefore, the configuration in such a case will be referred to as change example 3 from the seventh embodiment, and the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 8 in the third modification from the seventh embodiment. First, the changes from the 7th embodiment are step 1649-3 (7th variation 3) and step 1649-4 (7th variation 3), that is, special in step 1649-3 (7th variation 3). After turning off the game end demo flag, is determined whether or not the game is a special game won in the normal game state (non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state). In the case of Yes in step 1649-3 (7th variation 3), in step 1649-4 (7th variation 3), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is executing the special. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1649-4 (7th change 3), the process proceeds to step 1648-5 (7th change 1), a long end demo time is set, and step 1649-4 (7th change 3) is set. ) Is No, the process proceeds to step 1648-6 (7th variation 1) and a short end demo time is set. As described above, in the third modification from the seventh embodiment, the special game end demo time is set in the specific area C22 by the time all rounds are executed during the execution of the special game won in the normal game state. It is configured to have a long end demo time when the ball enters.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the seventh embodiment, a specific area is provided in the large winning opening, and the game ball enters the specific area to end the Tobetsu game. Special game when it is possible to shift to the probability fluctuation game state later, and when the jackpot is won in the normal game state and the jackpot is changed to the probability fluctuation game state after the jackpot ends (when the special game is the first hit). Even if the end demo time is set to be long, the external signal output mode shall be the same as that of the 7th embodiment, the modification 1 from the 7th embodiment, or the modification 2 from the 7th embodiment. Will be possible.

Further, in the second and third modifications from the seventh embodiment, even if the same jackpot symbol is used, the special game end demo time is configured to differ depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22. .. Further, the configuration is applied regardless of whether it is a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 or a big hit that makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22. However, the output period of the signal related to the special game start demo time, which is the timing before the round related to the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22, does not change depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 ( (Because it is not determined whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22), it depends only on the type of the jackpot symbol and / or the game state at the time of the jackpot.

Further, as described above, when the big hit during execution is the first hit, the special game end demo time is configured to be long, and during the effect execution time and the end demo time executed during the end demo time. By configuring the output time of the external signal output to the player to be long, it is possible to perform an effect that encourages the player to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the IC card during the end demo time at the time of the first hit. It will be possible to make it a user-friendly game machine. The IC card is a card for renting a game ball at the game hall, and since the game value for renting the game ball is stored, the IC card is forgotten as a sound game management. It is important to prevent loss or theft due to accidental loss. In addition, when executing an effect that urges the player to prevent forgetting to remove the IC card in a game state other than the first hit (a big hit that shifts from the normal game state to the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state). In the case of a big hit that shifts from the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, it can be determined that the game should not be executed when the player cannot shift to the advantageous gaming state and feels unwell, and the probability-variable gaming state and time In the case of a big hit that shifts from the shortened game state to the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, it can be judged that the tempo of the game in the consecutive villa will deteriorate if the effect is executed every time, and the probability In the case of a big hit that shifts from the variable game state and the time-reduced game state to the normal game state, when the consecutive villas are over and the player is satisfied, an effect suggesting that the game is finished is executed. If this happens, the player may end the game. Therefore, for the above reasons, it can be determined that it is desirable to use the configuration of the third modification from the seventh embodiment. In addition, when shifting from a state other than the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state to the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state by a big hit, the time value is secured in the special game end demo and the IC card is forgotten to be removed. It is preferable that the player is configured to perform an effect of urging the player to prevent the above.

In this example, the normal game state = non-probability variable game state and non-time shortening game state, and the specific game state = probability variable game state and time reduction game state are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is not limited to this. The relationship may be configured as follows.
(1) Normal game state = non-probability variable game state, specific game state = probability variable game state (2) Normal game state = non-time reduction game state, specific game state = time reduction game state (3) Normal game state = non Probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state, specific game state = probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state (4) Normal game state = non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state, specific game state = probability fluctuation game state And time-reduced gaming state (5) Normal gaming state = probability-variable gaming state and non-time-shortening gaming state, specific gaming state = probability-variable gaming state and time-shortening gaming state (6) Normal gaming state = non-probability-variable gaming state and non-time Time-reduced game state, specific game state = probability-variable game state and non-time-reduced game state (7) Normal game state = non-probability-variable game state and non-time-reduced game state, specific game state = non-probability-variable game state and time-reduction Game state The time-reduced game state may be set to the main game time reduction flag off and the auxiliary game time reduction flag on (so-called easy-to-open state).

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the signal illustrated in this example. The following configuration exemplifies a case where a predetermined group (for example, a big hit symbol) and a specific group (for example, a small hit symbol) are provided as a group of stop symbols of the main game symbol.
(1) As the output period of the jackpot signal, the output of the signal related to the predetermined group is output during the special game start demo time, but the output of the signal related to the specific group is not output during the special game start demo time.
(2) Even if the signals of a predetermined group are used, the output timing may differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit (for example, in the non-time reduction game state, the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group is specified as the first timing. When the output timing of the signal related to the group is the second timing, the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group in the time shortening gaming state is the third timing).
(3) The ratio of the first main game symbol belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the ratio of the second main game symbol belonging to the predetermined group.
(3) When the output timing of the signal related to the predetermined group is the first timing and the output timing of the signal related to the specific group is the second timing, the first timing is earlier than the second timing.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the signal illustrated in this example. The following configuration exemplifies a case where a predetermined group (for example, a big hit symbol) and a specific group (for example, a small hit symbol) are provided as a group of stop symbols of the main game symbol.
(1) Regarding the special game related to the main game symbol belonging to the first predetermined group among the predetermined groups, the main game is in the non-probability variable game state (normal game state) and the non-time reduction game state (in the non-easy state of entering the ball). When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state that shifts after the special game is a probability-variable game state (specific game state) and a non-time shortened game state (ball entry non-easy state).
(2) When the main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability-variable game state (specific game state) and the non-time-shortened game state (ball entry non-easy state), the game state that shifts after the special game is the probability-variable game state (specific game). It is a state) and a time-saving game state (a state in which it is easy to enter the ball).
(3) The output period of (2) is longer between the signal output period during the special game end demo time in the case of (1) and the signal output period during the special game end demo time in the case of (2). ..
With this configuration, even if the same jackpot symbol is used, the transition of the gaming state can be different depending on the gaming state at that time, and the transition mode of the gaming state before and after the special game can be met. By setting the special game end demo time, it is possible to determine the state at the time of a big hit on the hall side, and it is possible to guarantee appropriate game playability for the player (in the probability fluctuating game state and the non-time reduction game state). The effect will not be performed for a long time, and the warning for forgetting to remove the prepaid card will not be displayed).

(Error control)
Next, FIG. 109 is a table summarizing the processing when an error occurs in the gaming machine according to this example. The processing when an error occurs will be described with reference to the figure.

First, as an error related to the abnormal discharge of the large winning opening; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) large winning opening ball entry sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 ball entry detection device). Or refer to the 2nd big winning opening C20 entry detection device); the big winning opening discharge sensor (for example, the 2nd big winning opening discharge detection device C27s) than the game ball detected by the big winning opening entry sensor during the big hit. Or, when there are many game balls detected by the specific area entry detection device (for example, the specific area entry detection device C22s); the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on, and the effect display device SG is used. Executes error display and error notification sound playback. Further, the power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in step 1002), or a predetermined time (300 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error; the error notification is terminated. In addition, as a configuration of the game machine in which the error can be executed, the game ball discharged from the large winning opening having a specific area is configured to always pass through the discharge sensor or the specific area entry detection device. ..

Next, as an error related to the large winning opening entry / exit mismatch; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) large winning opening entry sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 entry ball). Refer to the detection device or the 2nd big winning opening C20 entry detection device); the big winning opening discharge sensor (for example, the 2nd big winning opening discharge detection device) than the game ball detected by the big winning opening entry sensor during the big hit. When there are many game balls detected by the specific area entry detection device (for example, the specific area entry detection device C22s); the fluctuation of the main game symbol and the operation of the large winning opening are stopped; the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration LED) The frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on, the effect display device SG is used to display an error, and the error notification sound is reproduced. Further, the error notification is terminated when the power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in step 1002) or 300 seconds have passed after the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, as a configuration of the game machine in which the error can be executed, the game ball discharged from the large winning opening having a specific area is configured to always pass through the discharge sensor or the specific area entry detection device. ..

Next, as an error related to the abnormal winning of the large winning opening; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); Refer to the device or the second grand prize opening C20 ball entry detector); if the grand prize opening ball sensor continues to detect the game ball for a significantly longer time (eg, 300 seconds); frame decoration LED (eg, frame decoration). The lamp D18-L) is turned on and the error notification sound is reproduced. In addition, the error notification is terminated 1 second after the occurrence of the abnormality, but when the total number of detections causing the error is 10 or more, the notification and the sound effect are detected when the total number of detections causing the error is 30 or more. In some cases, it ends 30 seconds after the occurrence of the abnormality.

Next, as an error of the guidance device abnormality; because the main control board (for example, the main control board M) has detected a difference from the normal operation of the guidance device V15 inside the winning opening by the guidance device solenoid of the guidance device V15; an error. When the detection that causes the above is 5 times or more in total; error display and lighting of the frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) are executed on the effect display device SG; error notification is performed 5 minutes after the abnormality occurs. To finish.

Next, as the first main game start port error; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first main game start port entry sensor from the time the power is turned on (the first main game start port entry detection device). When the difference between the number of game balls detected by A11s) and the number of game balls detected by the fraud confirmation sensor is greater than or equal to a predetermined number; error display on the effect display device SG, frame decoration LED (for example, frame decoration lamp) D18-L) is turned on; if the power is not turned on again, the error display ends 300 seconds after the error occurs, and the sound effect output ends 90 seconds after the error occurs.

Next, as the second main game start port error; refer to the case where the ball enters the second main game start port when the game is in a non-time shortened game state and the big hit and the small hit are in progress; the frame decoration LED (For example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on, and the error notification sound is reproduced. Further, the error notification is terminated when the power is turned on again (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in step 1002) or 300 seconds have passed after the occurrence of the abnormality. The configuration is applied to a game machine that does not have a hold function on the second main game side. After the error is detected, the error is detected again until the first main game symbol fluctuates five times, or the ball enters the V winning opening C26 before the first main game symbol fluctuates, or a standby demo. If the ball enters the V winning opening C26 before the screen is displayed, an error notification is executed.

Next, as an electric accessory abnormal winning error, a non-time shortened game state ... When one game ball enters the second main game start port; various LEDs light up; 300 after the power is turned on again or an abnormality occurs. It ends in seconds. In addition, as an abnormal winning error of the electric accessory, the time shortened game state and the electric accessory valid period ... When 6 game balls enter the second main game start port, the time shortened game state and the electric accessory are valid. Outside the period: When 5 game balls enter the 2nd main game start port, when the time is shortened and after the error occurs ... When 1 game ball enters the 2nd main game start port The fluctuation of the main game symbol and the operation of the big winning opening are interrupted; the error display, the frame decoration LED (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) are lit, and the error notification sound is reproduced on the effect display device SG; the door is opened. It is released from the error by turning on the power again while opening it.

The external signal output mode and error execution mode in this example may be applied to the following game machines.
(1) There are a first main game and a second main game, and the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed with priority over the symbol variation on the first main game side (similar to the present embodiment).
(2) It has a specific area (similar to the second modification from the seventh embodiment).
(3) On the first main game side, the ratio of jackpots, which is the maximum profit in the expected value of winning a prize ball, is higher than that of the second main game side.
(4) Regarding the second main game side, the ratio of big hits that are easy to enter the specific area C22 is higher than that of the first main game side.
(5) The average number of rounds executed by the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side is the same.

(8th Embodiment)
In addition, in the case of the game machine shown in the second embodiment, when the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the special game, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game. The configuration for monitoring the entry into the large winning opening and the discharge from the large winning opening during the special game is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment in such a case will be referred to as an eighth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that only one large winning opening C10 is provided as a large winning opening in the lower right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area D30), and inside the large winning opening C10. , Has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter (a game ball enters the specific area C22 within a predetermined period during a special game, so that a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game Will move to). Further, it is a member related to whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area C22. In the open state, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22, and in the closed state, the game ball is in the specific area C22. A shielding member C24 that makes it difficult (or impossible to enter) the ball (although not shown in the figure, the specific region C22 is in the form of an entry port, such as a valve member that covers the entry port. It has a member). As shown in the figure, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area D30) is easily guided to the large winning opening C10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area D30). It is configured so that the game ball flowing down is difficult to be guided (however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down both may be easily guided).

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the configuration of the large winning opening C10 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. First, the game ball that has flowed down to the large winning opening C10 rolls to the left when viewed from the player on the upper surface of the large winning opening electric accessory C11d, which is a plate-shaped member. The large winning opening electric accessory C11d has an advanced state (closed state) in which the plate-shaped member protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state (open state) in which the plate-shaped member is retracted toward the player side. It is configured so that it can be picked up, and when the large winning opening electric accessory C11d is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the large winning opening electric accessory C11d is the large winning opening C10. It will flow down inside. Further, the large winning opening C10 has two sensors, a large winning opening winning detection device AC12 and a large winning opening winning detection device BC14, as sensors for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening C10. (Has two entrances). The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 will flow down to the shielding member C24. Here, the shielding member C24 is configured to be able to take an advanced state (closed state) in a state of protruding toward the player side and a retracted state (open state) in a state of being retracted toward the player side. When the shielding member C24 is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22, and when the shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball is difficult to enter (or cannot enter) in the specific area C22. It is configured. When the shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball will flow down to the discharge ball detection device C19. Further, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 is configured to pass through either the specific area C22 (specific area entry detection device C22a) or the discharge ball detection device C19 and be discharged to the outside of the game machine. ing. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 does not pass through the discharge sensor {a sensor is provided in the flow path (downstream) beyond the large winning opening winning detection device BC14. No} It will be discharged to the outside of the game machine.

In the eighth embodiment, there is one big winning opening, and when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the big hit, the ball-probability type shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the big hit ends. Although it is a gaming machine, the number of large winning openings is not limited to one, and as large winning openings, a first large winning opening that does not have a specific area and a second that has a specific area. A large winning opening may be provided, and the second large winning opening may be opened in the distribution game execution round, and the first large winning opening may be opened in other rounds.

In this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is only once, which is the first round.
(2) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is only once, which is the final round.
(3) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is only once, and it is any round excluding the first round and the final round.
(4) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is two or more, and the round includes the first round and the final round.
(5) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is two or more, and is a round including the first round and any round excluding the first round and the final round.
(6) (5) The number of executions of the distribution game execution round is two or more, and the round includes a plurality of rounds excluding the first round and the final round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the flow-down mode of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening C10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, as shown in (a), the game ball launched by the player (launched by right-handed strike) flows down the right side of the board, and from the right side of the large winning opening C10, the large winning opening electric accessory C11d. It reaches the upper surface (large winning opening C10). The game ball that has reached the big winning opening C10 (the big winning opening electric accessory C11d) rolls from right to left on the big winning opening electric accessory C11d that has a gentle downward slope. Become. When the large winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened while the game ball is rolling on the large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or, the game ball is large while the large winning opening electric accessory C11d is open). (By flowing down into the winning opening electric accessory C11d), the game ball will enter the large winning opening C10. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening C10 can be either the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entrance AC13) or the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (large winning opening internal ball entrance BC15). It will pass. When the big winning opening electric accessory C11d is changed from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the game ball is rolling on the right side (as seen from the player) on the upper surface of the large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or When the game ball reaches the large winning opening electric accessory C11d while the large winning opening electric accessory C11d is open), the game ball is the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entry). It is easy to pass through the mouth AC13) and is difficult to pass through the large prize opening prize detection device BC14 (large winning mouth entrance ball entrance BC15). On the other hand, if the big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the game ball is rolling on the left side (as seen from the player) on the upper surface of the large winning opening electric accessory C11d. The game ball is difficult to pass through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entrance AC13) and easily passes through the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (large winning opening internal ball entrance BC15). Further, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (the large winning opening internal ball entrance BC15) is discharged through the large winning opening discharge port C16 (flow path C17).

Next, as shown in (b), when the game ball passing through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 and flowing down the flow path AC18 reaches the shielding member C24 in the flow path AC18, the shielding member C24 is closed. This is the action in the case of a state. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has reached the shielding member C24 is prevented from flowing down to the specific area C22 (specific area entry detection device C22a) by the shielding member C24, so that it flows down to the discharge ball detection device C19. Will go. Next, (c) is an action when the shielding member C24 is in the open state when the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 reaches the shielding member C24. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has reached the shielding member C24 is not prevented from flowing down to the specific area C22 (specific area entry detection device C22a) by the shielding member C24, and is not prevented from flowing down to the specific area C22 (specific area entry ball). It will flow down to the detection device C22a) (the game ball may flow down to the discharge ball detection device C19 by colliding with the wall surface in the grand prize opening C10).

The large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entrance AC13) is located upstream of the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (large winning opening internal ball entrance BC15) {large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (Large winning opening intra-ball entrance BC15) is located downstream of the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (Large winning opening intra-ball entrance AC13)}. Since the game ball that enters the large winning opening C10 flows down from the right side of the large winning opening C10, the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 is more than the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (large winning opening entrance ball opening BC15). It is configured so that it can easily pass through (the ball entrance port AC13 in the large winning opening). In addition, due to the internal structure of the large winning opening C10 {projections near the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entrance AC13)}, the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 (large winning opening internal ball entrance BC15) It is configured to be easier to pass through the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (large winning opening internal ball entrance AC13). Here, "upstream" indicates a position where the launched game ball reaches (or approaches) first in the process of flowing down the game board surface, and "downstream" means the launched game ball. Indicates the position to reach (or approach) later in the process of flowing down the game board surface.

The configuration of the large winning opening in the eighth embodiment may be configured as follows.
(1) A second discharge ball detection device may be provided downstream of the specific area entry ball detection device. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the discharge of each of the game ball that has passed the specific area, the specific area, and the game ball that has not passed.
(2) The position where the discharge ball detection device (discharge ball detection device in FIG. 112) is provided is located downstream of the confluence of the game ball that has passed the specific area, the specific area, and the game ball that has not passed the specific area (specific area). The position where the game ball that has passed through the above, the specific area, and the game ball that has not passed through may be detected) (the position where the discharge ball detection device C19 in FIG. 112 is provided may be changed). With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate the discharge confirmations of the game ball that has passed through the specific area, the game ball that has passed through the specific area, and the game ball that has not passed through the specific area.
Further, in the case of the above (1) or (2), the large winning opening winning detection device B may not be provided, or the game ball has passed through the specific area entry detecting device. In this case, the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter may not be subtracted.

Next, FIG. 113 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the eighth embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1015 (8th) and step 1600 (8th), that is, in step 1014, the main control board M transmits the acquired various information commands to the sub control board. After transmitting to the S side, in step 1015 (8th), the main control board M sets the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b (counter for monitoring the ball entry status and the discharge status to the large winning opening C10). Reset (clear to zero) {recover from abnormal discharge balls (for example, excess discharge balls, insufficient discharge balls) by the process}, and proceed to the process of step 1016. Further, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process, and then in step 1600 (eighth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later, and the step It shifts to the process of 1900.

Next, FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 113 in the eighth embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are in steps 1411-1 (8th), 1411-2 (8th) and 3950 (8th), that is, in step 1411-1 (8th). , The game progress means MP determines whether or not the limited frequency flag (the flag that is turned on when the limited frequency state is to refer to the limited frequency table) is off. If No in step 1411-1 (8th), that is, if the limited frequency flag is on, in step 3950 (8th), the game progress means MP executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. The process proceeds to step 1415. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the limited frequency flag is on, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table. It should be noted that the limited frequency flag is set to turn on when the game shifts to the probability-variable game state (probability-variable game state and time-shortened game state) after the end of the special game, and the non-probability-variable game state and time after the end of the special game. The limited frequency flag does not turn on when the game shifts to the shortened game state, that is, the table for determining the variation mode of the main game symbol in the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state, and the non-probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state. It is configured to be different from the table that determines the variation mode of the main game symbol in.

Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 3950 (eighth) of FIG. 114 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 3952, in the game progressing means MP, the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the first stage range (the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 150 ≧ G> 100). In the case of Yes in step 3952, in step 3954, the game progressing means MP determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step 3964.

On the other hand, if No in step 3952, in step 3956, the game progressing means MP has the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c within the second stage range (the second stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and it is determined whether or not 100 ≧ G> 10). In the case of Yes in step 3956, in step 3958, the game progressing means MP determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table 2 based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step 3964. On the other hand, if No in step 3956, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the third stage range (the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c which is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of and G ≦ 10), in step 3960, the game progressing means MP refers to the main game with reference to the limited frequency table 3 based on the random number on the main game side, the winning / failing lottery result, and the number of holdings. The variation mode (variation time) regarding the symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to 3964.

Next, in step 3964, the game progressing means MP subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 3966, the game progressing means MP determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0. In the case of Yes in step 3966, in step 3966, the game progress means MP turns off the limited frequency flag and shifts to the next process (process in step 1415). Even if No in step 3966, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1415).

The table at the bottom of the figure is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3. First, the limited frequency table 1 will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is a value within a predetermined range (150 ≧ G> 100). Will be done. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. Compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, the limited frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, when the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within a predetermined range (100 ≧ G> 10), the limited frequency table 2 is set. Referenced. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss (a table with a long fluctuation time is easily selected). Compared with the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time at the time of loss is shorter when there are 2 or 3 reserved balls than when there are 0 or 1 reserved balls.

Next, the limited frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within a predetermined range (G ≦ 10). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variable time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the winning / losing lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

The contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and the contents of the limited frequency table referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). It may be configured to be the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reservations (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If such a configuration is not made, the first main game side selects a variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side selects the number of holdings when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more. It is desirable to configure the fluctuation time to be relatively shorter than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

In the eighth embodiment, the limited frequency table has three types, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 is switched in the order of three stages (so-called three-stage ST). There is no problem even if the type of the limited frequency table is changed and the order of the referenced tables is changed. Further, it has two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referred to is switched in the order of limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. May be good.

Further, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability variation game state (or time shortened game state) transitions, the limited frequency A state and the limited frequency table 2 referring to the limited frequency table 1 are set. In the case of the limited frequency B state to be referred to
(1) In the limited frequency B state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that is lost when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0) and the number of reservations is the second number of reservations (for example, 3). In the case of (pieces), there is a difference between the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, which is a loss, and the average value of the predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency A state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that is lost when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0) and the number of reservations is the second number of reservations (for example, 3). In the case of (pieces), there is no difference in the average value of the predetermined period from the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, which is a loss.
(3) The second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency B state is most selected than the fluctuation time, which is the most likely loss to be selected in the second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency A state. The fluctuating time, which is easily lost, has a longer fluctuating time.
(4) The limited frequency B state stays for a longer period (number of fluctuations) than the limited frequency A state.
(5) The specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency B state is not displayed in the limited frequency A state.
(6) In the time-reduced game state, the look-ahead effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) There are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency B state, but only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency A state.
(8) The types of the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency B state and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency A state are different.
It may be configured as follows. Further, a plurality of these configurations may be combined, or only one of these configurations may be applied. In addition, each limited frequency state may stay for a period in which one or a plurality of symbol fluctuations are executed (at least stays for a period in which one symbol variation is executed or more).

Next, FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 114 in the eighth embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1479 (eighth), that is, in step 1478 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag, and then steps 1479. In (8th), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the limited frequency flag and proceeds to step 1454. In this way, the limited frequency flag is turned off at the timing when the probability variation game state ends (the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c becomes 0), in other words, the limited frequency state ends. There is.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 113 in the eighth embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1511 (8th) and step 1512 (8th), that is, in step 1510 (2nd), the special game control means MP30 sets the probability variation counter MP51c. After clearing, in step 1511 (8th), the special game control means MP30 turns off the limited frequency flag. Next, in step 1512, the special game control means MP30 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52 to zero, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1600 (eighth)}. In addition, when the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game, it shifts to the limited frequency state again.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 (eighth) in FIG. 113 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2150 (eighth), the special game control means MP30 executes the discharge ball excess determination process described later. Next, in step 3300 (eighth), the special game control means MP30 executes the ball entry / discharge measurement process described later. Next, in step 1645-1, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the ejected ball excess flag (the flag that is turned on when the ejected ball excess occurs) is off. In the eighth embodiment, it is configured to constantly monitor whether or not an excess of ejected balls occurs during the execution of the special game, and if an excess of ejected balls occurs, the generated ejected balls are monitored. It is configured to stop the progress of the special game until the excess is resolved. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the progress of the special game may not be stopped even when an excessive number of ejected balls occurs. If Yes in step 1645-1, the process proceeds to step 1649-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1645-1, in step 1645-2, the special game control means MP30 uses the discharge confirmation counter 1173b (counter for determining whether or not excess or insufficient discharge balls have occurred). It is determined whether or not the counter value of is 0, in other words, whether or not the excess number of ejected balls has been resolved. The details will be described later, but when the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is detected by the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (a game ball enters the large winning opening C10), the discharge is confirmed. 1 is added to the counter value of the counter 1173b, and when it is detected by the discharge ball detection device C19 or the specific area entry detection device C22a (the game ball is discharged from the large winning opening C10), the discharge confirmation counter 1173b When 1 is subtracted from the counter value and it is detected by the large winning opening winning detection device BC14, it is large because the detection device for discharging is not provided at the point where the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 is passed. When passing through the winning opening winning detection device BC14, it is configured to execute both 1 addition and 1 subtraction with respect to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is 0. If it is smaller than 0, it is determined that an excess of discharged balls has occurred, and if the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is larger than 0, it is determined that a shortage of discharged balls has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 1645-2, in step 1645-3, the special game control means MP30 turns off the exhaust ball excess flag and proceeds to step 1649-1. Next, in step 1649-1, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the round standby timer R10t is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1649-1, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the discharge waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1606, in step 1608, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1610, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 sets (1), which is an initial value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game start display instruction command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to the process of step 3350 (eighth).

On the other hand, if No in step 1606, in step 1616, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1616, the process proceeds to step 3350 (eighth). Next, in step 3350 (8th) and step 1750 (8th), the special game control means MP30 executes the round execution initial process described later, and then executes the specific area entry determination process A described later, and steps. Move to 1618. Next, in step 1618, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that triggers the end of the round has won a prize in the large winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1618, the process proceeds to step 1622. If No in step 1618, in step 1620, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the timer value of the open timer MP34t2 has reached a predetermined time. If Yes in step 1620, the process proceeds to step 1622. Next, in step 1622, the special game control means MP30 closes the large winning opening C10 to end the opening pattern. Next, in step 1624, the special game control means MP30 resets the timer value of the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1626, the special game control means MP30 turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1649-2, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the currently executing round is a discharge waiting round. Here, the discharge waiting rounds are (1) a round immediately before the distribution game execution round (third round in the eighth embodiment) and (2) a distribution game execution round (in the eighth embodiment, the third round). 4 rounds), (3) final round (16th round in the 8th embodiment). Details will be described later, but by configuring in this way, the opportunity (round) to determine whether or not an abnormal discharge ball has occurred is minimized, and the time between rounds is made relatively short. , It is configured so that the execution time of the special game can be shortened. The time between rounds is the timing at which the final opening of the large winning opening C10 in the running round is completed (when the large winning opening C10 is opened multiple times in one round, the opening is performed multiple times. The next round starts from the timing when the last opening is completed, and when the big winning opening C10 opens only once in one round, it is the timing when the one opening is completed). Then, it is a period until the timing when the big winning opening C10 starts to open, and the time between the rounds includes the time during the discharge waiting time (the discharge ball shortage or the discharge ball excess provided in the discharge standby round). It is the time to judge whether or not it has occurred, and it is also called the discharge waiting time), the preparation time (the timing when the last closing of the big winning opening in the round is completed or the discharge waiting time) The time from the end to the start of the next round) is included.

In the case of Yes in step 1649-2, in step 1649-3, the special game control means MP30 starts by setting the discharge monitoring execution time (3000 ms in this example) in the discharge standby timer 1173t (decrement timer), and steps. Move to 1629. On the other hand, if No in step 1649-2, in step 1649-4, the special game control means MP30 starts by setting the discharge monitoring execution time (940 ms in this example) in the discharge standby timer 1173t (decrement timer). , The process proceeds to step 1629. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the running round is the discharge waiting round, the discharge waiting time is longer than when it is a round other than the discharge waiting round. Next, in step 1629, the special game control means MP30 turns on the discharge waiting flag (the flag that turns on in the discharge standby time), and proceeds to step 1630. Further, even if No in step 1604, the process proceeds to step 1630. Next, in step 1630, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the timer value of the discharge standby timer 1173t is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1630, in step 1638, the special game control means MP30 sets a game state information command related to the special game to the sub-control board S side. Next, in step 3150 (eighth), the special game control means MP30 executes the specific area entry determination process B described later. Next, in step 1649-5, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the currently executing round is a discharge waiting round. In the case of Yes in step 1649-5, in step 1850 (eighth), the special game control means MP30 executes the discharge ball shortage determination process described later, and shifts to the process of step 1639. On the other hand, if No in step 1649-5, the process proceeds to step 1639 without executing the process of step 1850 (eighth).

Next, in step 1639, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the ejected ball excess flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1639, in step 1646, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the final round has been completed. If Yes in step 1646, in step 1647, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1648, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub-control board S side. Next, in step 1700, the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). If No in step 1646, the special game control means MP30 starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 60 ms) in the round standby timer R10t (decrement timer) in step 1649-7, and then starts the next process (step). 1900 processing). In addition, even if No in step 1645-2, step 1649-1, step 1616, step 1620, step 1630, or step 1639, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the ejection ball excess determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2152, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is smaller than 0. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the special game control means MP30 turns on the over-exhaust ball flag. Next, in step 2156, the special game control means MP30 sets an excessive discharge ball command to the sub side (command to the sub control board S side), and shifts to the next process {step 3300 (8th)}. .. As described above, when the excessive discharge ball flag is turned on, the progress of the special game (progress of the game) is stopped until the excess discharge ball flag is turned off and the excess discharge ball flag is turned off. When the sub-control board S receives the command of excessive discharge balls, the sub-control board S side executes an error notification related to the excess discharge balls (for example, the effect display device SG has excessive discharge balls). To that effect) will be displayed.

Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the ball entry / discharge measurement process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and proceeds to step 3306. On the other hand, even if No in step 3302, the process proceeds to step 3306. Next, in step 3306, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 3306, in step 3308 and step 3310, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b and subtracts 1 from the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b. The process proceeds to the process (process of step 3312). Even if No in step 3306, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3312).

Next, in step 3312, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the discharge ball detecting device C19 has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 3312, in step 3314, the special game executing means MP33 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and proceeds to step 3316. On the other hand, even if No in step 3312, the process proceeds to step 3316. Next, in step 3316, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the specific area entry detection device C22a has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 3316, in step 3318, the special game executing means MP33 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1645-1). On the other hand, even if No in step 3316, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1645-1). In this way, when detected by the large winning opening winning detection device AC12 (a game ball enters the large winning opening C10), 1 is added to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and the discharge ball detection device C19 Alternatively, when the ball is detected by the specific area entry detection device C22a (the game ball is ejected from the large winning opening C10), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the ejection confirmation counter 1173b. With this configuration, it can be determined that the discharge is normally completed when the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is 0. In addition, when it is detected by the big prize opening winning detection device BC14, since the detection device for discharge is not provided at the point where it passes through the big winning opening winning detection device BC14, the big winning opening winning detection device BC14 Is configured to execute both 1 addition and 1 subtraction with respect to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the round execution initial process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (eighth) of FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the round continuation flag (the flag that is turned on during the execution of the round in the special game) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not it is a distribution game execution round (4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the stop symbol is a long open symbol (3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B in this example). In the eighth embodiment, the first main game jackpot symbol is provided with three types of "4A, 5A, 7A" and the second main game jackpot symbol is provided with three types of "3B, 5B, 7B". The long open symbol (the jackpot symbol that the jackpot C10 opens to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) is "3B / 5A / 5B / 7A".・ 7B ”, and the short open symbol (the jackpot symbol in which the jackpot C10 opens to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) is“ 4A ”. It has become. In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the special game execution means MP33 sets a distribution length open pattern (40 ms open → 3000 ms closed → 28000 ms open → closed) as an open pattern of the large winning opening C10, and in step 3362. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 3356, in step 3360, the special game execution means MP33 sets a distribution short open pattern (40 ms open → closed) as an open pattern of the large winning opening C10, and proceeds to step 3362. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening C10 of the distribution game execution round relating to the presence or absence of the ball entering the specific area C22 may differ depending on the big hit symbol that triggers the big hit. .. Further, if the execution round of the big hit is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening C10 of the distribution game execution round may be different.

Next, in step 3362, the special game executing means MP33 sets an open pattern A (40 ms open → 3000 ms closed → 31000 ms open → closed) as an open pattern of the shielding member C24, and proceeds to step 3368. In the eighth embodiment, even if the driving time (opening pattern) of the shielding member C24 is not finished, when the running round is finished (when the round waiting time is started), the driving time is finished. It is configured to be killed.

On the other hand, if No in step 3354, in other words, in the case of a round that is not a distribution game execution round (a normal round that is a round other than the 4th R), in step 3364, the special game execution means MP33 is the large winning opening C10. A normal open pattern (28000 ms open → closed) is set as the open pattern. Next, in step 3366, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern B (constantly closed) as the opening pattern of the shielding member C24, and proceeds to step 3368.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, as the opening pattern (opening / closing pattern) of the shielding member C24, the opening pattern A is used when the execution round is the distribution game execution round, and the opening pattern is when the execution round is the normal round. It is configured to be the opening pattern B, and the opening pattern of the shielding member C24 may differ depending on the execution round, but is not different depending on the jackpot symbol that triggers the jackpot.

In this way, in the distribution game execution round, when the large winning opening C10 is opened in the distribution length opening pattern (that is, in the round assuming that the ball enters the specific area C22), the large winning opening C10 It is opened a plurality of times, and the total opening time of the large winning opening C10 in the distribution game execution round (40ms + 28000ms = 28040ms in this example) is the total opening time of the large winning opening C10 in the normal round (28000ms) and the distribution game execution. It is configured to be longer than the total opening time (40 ms) of the big winning opening C10 in the round. Further, in the distribution game execution round in which the large winning opening C10 is opened in the distribution length opening pattern, the total opening time of the large winning opening C10 (28040 ms in this example) is the total closing time of the large winning opening C10 (28040 ms in this example). In this example, it is configured to be longer than 3000 ms). Further, the maximum value of one opening time of the large winning opening C10 (28,000 ms in this example) in the round is longer than the maximum value of the closing time of the large winning opening C10 (3000 ms in this example). It is configured to be. With such a configuration, in the distribution game execution round, when the large winning opening C10 is opened in the distribution length opening pattern (that is, in the round assuming the entry into the specific area C22), the large winning opening It becomes easier to put the game ball into C10. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the opening mode of the large winning opening C10, for example, during a certain distribution game execution round, after performing a short opening operation of 40 ms, the game ball It may be configured to execute a long opening (for example, opening of 5000 ms) for easy entry of a ball a plurality of times.

Next, in step 3368, the special game execution means MP33 sets the large winning opening valid period (the period during which the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening C10 is valid) as the first large winning opening in the running round. Set the period from the opening timing to 940ms after the closing timing of the last big winning opening. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the start timing of the large winning opening valid period is the first opening timing of the large winning opening C10, and the end timing of the large winning opening valid period is the large winning opening C10. Regardless of the opening pattern, the timing is such that a predetermined time (940 ms in this example) has elapsed since the final closing of the large winning opening C10 in the running round. In the eighth embodiment, the end timing of the valid period of the large winning opening is set to the timing when 940 ms has elapsed since the large winning opening C10 was last closed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening C10 is opened. It may be determined based on the pattern, the time value from the closing timing of the large winning opening C10 may be changed, it may be until the final closing timing of the large winning opening C10, or the large winning opening C10 may be changed. It may be from the first opening timing to the elapse of a predetermined time.

Next, in step 3370, the special game executing means MP33 sets a period from the opening timing of the first shielding member C24 to the closing timing of the last shielding member C24 in the running round as the specific area valid period. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the start timing of the specific area valid period is the first opening timing of the shielding member C24, and the end timing of the specific area valid period is the final closing timing of the shielding member C24. It has become. In the eighth embodiment, the specific region effective period is configured to continue to be effective from the first opening timing to the last closing timing of the shielding member C24, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effective period is limited to the shielding member C24. It may be determined based on the opening / closing pattern of, for example, it may be configured to be effective until a predetermined time elapses from the last closing timing of the shielding member C24, or it may be predetermined from the first opening timing of the shielding member C24. It may be configured to be valid until the lapse of time.

Next, in step 3372, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning number counter 1175d to zero. Next, in step 3374, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 3376, the special game execution means MP33 drives the large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the large winning opening C10 to open the large winning opening C10, and sets the special game timer 1176t (particularly the opening time timer). Start and move to the next process {process of step 1750 (8th)}. Even if No in step 3352, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (eighth)}.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the specific area entry determination process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1752, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the special game is a special game related to a long-open symbol (3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the round being executed is a distribution game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1754, in step 1756, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 during the round. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the special game execution means MP33 is a command for entering a normal round specific area (a command to the sub-control board S side, and is a command to the sub-control board S side, and is a specific area in the normal round of the jackpot related to the long open symbol. A command related to the fact that the game ball has been detected in C22) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1618). Even if No in step 1752, step 1754, or step 1756, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1618). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 is detected in the normal round of the big hit related to the long open symbol, the abnormal entry into the specific area C22 is detected. It is configured to determine that it has been done and send a normal round specific area entry command to the sub-control board S side. It should be noted that the process of step 1752 does not have to be provided, that is, even when the special game related to the short open symbol is executed (even in all special games), the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the normal round. If it is detected, it may be configured to transmit a normal round specific area entry command to the sub-control board S side. Further, when the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 is detected in the distribution game execution round of the special game related to the short open symbol, the normal round specific area entry command is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the specific area entry determination process B according to the subroutine of step 3150 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the special game is a special game related to a long-open symbol (3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the round being executed is a distribution game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 3154, the special game executing means MP33 determines in step 3156 whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 during the round. In the case of Yes in step 3156, in step 3158, the special game execution means MP33 is a distribution round specific area entry command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a big hit distribution game execution round related to the long open symbol. Set (a command related to the fact that the game ball has not been detected in the specific area C22 and ended), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1850 (eighth)}. Even if No in step 3152, step 3154, or step 3156, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1850 (eighth)}. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 is not detected in the big hit distribution game execution round related to the long open symbol, the ball enters the specific area C22. It is configured to determine that no ball has been detected in the power round and to send a distribution round specific area non-ball command to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the discharge ball shortage determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1852, the special game executing means MP33 determines whether or not the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is 0 or less. If Yes in step 1852, it is determined in step 1854 whether or not the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1858, the special game executing means MP33 adds (increments) 1 to the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1860, the special game executing means MP33 closes the shielding member C24, ends the opening pattern, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1639). Further, when No in step 1854, that is, when the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is smaller than 0, an excess of discharged balls has occurred, and the process related to the excess of discharged balls is executed in the process of FIG. 118. Therefore, in the process of step 1850 (eighth), the process related to the excess number of ejected balls is not executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1639). On the other hand, if No in step 1852, that is, if the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is larger than 0, in step 1864, the special game execution means MP33 is a discharge ball shortage command (a command to the sub-control board S side). , A command related to the fact that the discharge ball shortage has occurred) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1639). In the eighth embodiment, even if there is a shortage of ejected balls, the progress of the special game (progress of the game) is configured to be continuously executed without stopping. With this configuration, if a shortage of ejected balls occurs at the end of the special game and is not resolved thereafter, the main game symbol (first main game symbol) under the condition that the insufficient ejected balls have occurred. Changes in the game symbol and the second main game symbol) can be executed.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 118 in the eighth embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1727-1 (8th) and step 1727-1 (8th), that is, in step 1726 (2nd), the specific game control means MP50 shortens the time. After setting the predetermined number of times (150 times in this example) in the number counter MP52c, in step 1727-1 (8th), the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number of times (150 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52. ) Is set, and the process proceeds to step 1704. Further, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag, and then in step 1727 (eighth), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency flag and proceeds to step 1708. ..

Next, FIG. 126 is an action diagram relating to the special game (particularly, a timing chart relating to the opening of the large winning opening in the normal round) in the eighth embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the second round (normal round) to the start of the fourth round (distribution round) during the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7A" will be described. In the figure, "..." in the large winning opening state is the period from the end of driving from the open state to the closed state of the large winning opening C10 to the start of the period under preparation. The grand prize opening C10 is in a closed state.

First, at the timing 1 in the figure, when the second round of the special game is started, the large winning opening C10 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening → closing of 28000ms), and the large winning opening C10 is opened. The winning period (and the discharge ball detection period) will be started (valid). Further, since the second round is not a distribution game execution round (it is a normal round), the shielding member C24 is not opened (remains closed), and the specific area C22 is not effective either.

Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the opening of the large winning opening C10 is completed (for example, the opening is completed by the completion of the predetermined opening pattern or the entry of 10 balls into the large winning opening). Then, the big winning opening C10 is closed. It should be noted that the predetermined period after the closing of the big winning opening C10 (or the period during closing, which is the period until the big winning opening is completely closed) is to wait for the detection (and discharge) of the game balls remaining in the big winning opening C10. In addition, the winning validity period (and the ejection ball detection period) to the large winning opening C10 continues. As described above, the time during which the winning valid period continues is from the closing timing of the large winning opening C10 to 940 ms later.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, after the closing of the large winning opening C10 (and the period during closing), a sufficient period (940 ms in this example) for detecting the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening C10 has elapsed. With this as an opportunity, the valid period of winning the prize in the large winning opening C10 ends (becomes invalid), and the round waiting time starts as a preparation period for starting the next round.

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the third round is started when the round waiting time of 60 ms has elapsed. In addition, with the start of the third round, the large winning opening C10 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening → closing of 28000 ms), and the winning valid period (and ejected ball detection period) of the large winning opening C10. ) Is started (valid). Further, since the third round is not a distribution game execution round, the shielding member C24 is not opened (remains closed), and the specific area C22 is not effective either.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the opening of the large winning opening C10 is completed (for example, the opening is completed by the completion of the predetermined opening pattern or the entry of 10 balls into the large winning opening). Then, the big winning opening C10 is closed. The duration of the winning validity period of the large winning opening C10 is 940 ms after the closing timing of the large winning opening C10, as in the second round. When the opening of the large winning opening C10 is completed, the discharge waiting time for detecting the shortage of discharge balls is started.

Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the valid period of the large winning opening ends when 940 ms has elapsed from the closing timing of the large winning opening C10. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the round waiting time is started as a preparatory period for starting the next round, triggered by the elapse of 3000 ms, which is the discharge waiting time, from the closing of the large winning opening C10.

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the fourth round is started when the round waiting time of 60 ms has elapsed.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, since the discharge waiting time is not provided in the first round to the second round, the discharge ball abnormality for determining whether the winning ball and the discharge ball are consistent with each other. It is configured so that the determination of the presence or absence of is not executed. Therefore, in the round immediately before the distribution game execution round (in this example, the third round), it is summarized whether the winning balls and the discharging balls are consistent during the period from the first round to the third round. Is configured to run.

Next, FIG. 127 is an action diagram relating to the special game (particularly, a timing chart relating to the opening of the large winning opening in the distribution game execution round) in the eighth embodiment. In this example, the operation of the fourth round (distribution game execution round) will be described.

First, a case will be described in detail during the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7A” in the upper part of the figure, that is, when the opening mode of the jackpot C10 is long opening.

First, at the timing 1 in the figure, triggered by the start of the fourth round of the special game, the large winning opening C10 follows the distribution length opening pattern (40ms open → 3000ms closed → 28000ms open → closed). At the same time as being opened, the winning valid period (and the ejection ball detection period) to the large winning opening C10 is started (validated), the shielding member C24 is started to be opened, and the specific area valid period is started. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the first opening (opening of 40 ms) in the distribution game execution round is completed, and the first closing (closing of 3000 ms) is started. Further, the shielding member C24 is also closed in the same manner as the large winning opening C10. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the first closing in the distribution game execution round is completed, and the second opening (opening of 28,000 ms) is started. Further, the shielding member C24 is also opened in the same manner as the large winning opening C10. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the second opening (opening of 28,000 ms) in the distribution game execution round is completed, and the second closing (final closing) in the distribution game execution round is started. , The discharge standby time (3000 ms in this example) is started.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the valid period of the large winning opening ends when 940 ms has elapsed from the last closing of the large winning opening C10 in the distribution game execution round. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, when the discharge waiting time elapses, the driving of the shielding member C24 ends, the effective period of the specific area C22 ends, and the round waiting time (60 ms in this example) starts. Will be done. Next, in FIG. 7, the fifth round is started when the round waiting time (60 ms in this example) has elapsed. In the eighth embodiment, and in the eighth embodiment, the round standby time is started from the timing when the shielding member C24 is changed from the open state to the closed state (timing 6 in the figure), and the shielding member C24 is closed. The time required from the start to the closing is 20 ms, which is shorter than the round standby time of 60 ms. Therefore, by the time the next round (fifth round) is started, the shielding member It is configured so that the closure of C24 is complete. With this configuration, even if the next round (fifth round) of the distribution game execution round (fourth round in this example) is started, the shielding member C24 is not completely closed, so that during the next round It is possible to prevent an unintended situation in the design of the game machine, such as a game ball entering the large winning opening C10 entering the specific area C22.

Next, a case will be described in detail during the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” in the lower part of the figure, that is, when the opening mode of the jackpot C10 is long opening.

First, the processing of the timings 1 to 6 in the jackpot related to "5A" shown in the lower part of the figure is the same as the processing of the timings 1 to 6 in the jackpot related to "7A" shown in the upper part of the figure. Detailed explanation is omitted because it is the action of. Further, since the number of rounds executed in the jackpot related to "5A" is "4R", the "4th R", which is the distribution game execution round shown in the figure, is the final round. Therefore, since the next round does not exist in the "4th R", the round waiting time is not provided, and the special game ends at the timing of 6 in the figure. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the distribution game execution round (4R in this example), the execution time of the round may be different even if the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening C10 is the same (“7A””. In the case of a big hit related to "40 + 3000 + 28000 + 140 + 800 + 2060 + 60 = 34100 ms", in the case of a big hit related to "5A", "40 + 3000 + 28000 + 140 + 800 + 2060 = 34040 ms").
Next, FIG. 128 is an action diagram relating to the special game (particularly, a timing chart relating to the opening of the large winning opening in the normal round) in the eighth embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the 14th round (normal round) to the end of the 16th round (the normal round and the final round in the special game) during the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7A" will be described. It should be noted that the description of the same part as the action of FIG. 126 in the action of the same figure will be omitted.

First, at the timings 1 to 7 in the figure, the same actions as those of the second round (a round which is a normal round and does not determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the discharge ball) described in detail in FIG. 126 are performed in the 14th round and the 14th round. It is executed in 15 rounds (at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is the same as the start of the third round). Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the opening of 28,000 ms is completed as in the 14th and 15th rounds, and the discharge waiting time (in the 16th round, the discharge is performed in order to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the discharge ball. The waiting time will be 3000 ms) is started. With this configuration, the winning balls and the discharging balls to the large winning opening C10 from the start timing of the next round of the distribution game execution round to the timing of starting the discharge waiting time in the final round of the special game are collectively collected. It is possible to monitor (measure) and shorten the time between rounds when executing a special game.

Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the valid period of the large winning opening ends when 940 ms has elapsed from the closing timing of the large winning opening C10. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, the special game ends with the lapse of 3000 ms, which is the discharge waiting time, from the closing of the large winning opening C10. As described above, in the final round in the special game, the round waiting time is not provided because the next round does not exist. Further, in the eighth embodiment, in the case of a big hit related to a long open symbol in which the number of execution rounds is "4R", the distribution game execution round "4th R" is the final round, so that the round is waiting. Compared to the big hit related to the long open symbol where the number of execution rounds such as "7A" is other than "4R", the big prize of the distribution game execution round (4R in this example) The opening mode of the mouth C10 is different (the closing time of the last big winning mouth C10 in the round is different, and the round execution time of the distribution game execution round is also different).

FIG. 129 is an error control list 4 according to the eighth embodiment. First, from the left side, error type, error detection specifications ([detection subject], [detection object]), error occurrence specifications ([occurrence condition], [operation control when occurrence], [notification control when occurrence]), error Specific errors are listed in the order of release specifications ([release condition], [operation control at the time of release], [notification control at the time of release]). The details are as follows.
1. 1. Error type: Sorting round Specific area non-entry ball error Error detection specification: [Detecting subject] Main control board, [Detected object] Specific area incoming ball detection device Error occurrence specification: [Occurrence condition] During special game related to long open symbol In, when the ball entering a specific area is not detected in the distribution game execution round, [motion control at the time of occurrence] does not change (the game state does not change).
[Notification control when occurrence] Frame decoration LED lighting error cancellation specification: [Release condition] When the power is turned on again or when the next special game starts (for example, when the special game transition permission flag of step 1606 is turned on)
[Operation control at the time of release] No change (No change in game state)
[Notification control at the time of release] End of error notification on the left The above error is an error that occurs when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round of the special game related to the long open symbol. It is notified that an error has occurred not by the display on the effect display device SG or the sound output from the speaker D24 but by the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. Further, the error notification may be continuously output until the next special game start (for example, the timing when the special game transition permission flag in step 1606 is turned on). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, the time-reduced game is configured to shift to the time-reduced game state after the special game is completed. The error notification may be terminated when the big hit is won in the state.
2. Error type: Normal round Specific area entry error Error detection specification: [Detecting subject] Main control board [Detection object] Specific area entry detection device Error occurrence specification: [Occurrence condition] Normally during a special game related to a long open symbol When a ball entering a specific area is detected in the round [Motion control when it occurs] No change (No change in game state)
[Notification control at the time of occurrence] Error display on the effect display device SG Error cancellation specifications: [Release condition] Power cycle [Operation control at release] No change (No change in game state)
[Notification control at the time of cancellation] End the error notification on the left. Error type: Insufficient ejected ball error Error detection specifications: [Detecting subject] Main control board [Detection object] Sensors provided in the large winning opening (Great winning opening winning detection device AC12, ejecting ball detection device C19, specific area entry detection Device C22a, Grand prize opening winning detection device BC14)
Error occurrence specifications: [Occurrence condition] When the discharge confirmation counter value> 0 in the discharge standby time [Operation control when occurrence]: No change (no change in game state)
[Notification control at the time of occurrence] Error display on the effect display device SG Error cancellation specifications: [Release condition] When the discharge confirmation counter value = 0, or when the power is turned on again [Operation control at the time of release] No change (gaming state) No change)
[Notification control at the time of cancellation] End of error notification on the left When the above error occurs, the progress of the special game does not stop, so an error of insufficient ejection ball occurs at the end of the special game, and an error of insufficient ejection ball continues after that. If this is not resolved, the main game symbol may fluctuate in a situation where a discharge ball shortage error has occurred. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the progress of the special game may be stopped when an error of insufficient discharge ball occurs.
4. Error type: Excessive ejected ball error Error detection specifications: [Detecting subject] Main control board [Detection object] Sensors provided in the large winning opening (Great winning opening winning detection device AC12, ejecting ball detection device C19, specific area entry detection Device C22a, Grand prize opening winning detection device BC14)
Error occurrence specifications: [Occurrence condition] When the discharge confirmation counter value <0 in the discharge standby time [Operation control when occurrence]: Stop the game [Notification control when occurrence] Error display error on the effect display device SG Release specifications: [Release condition] When the discharge confirmation counter value = 0, or when the power is turned on again [Operation control at the time of release] Resume the game [Notification control at the time of release] End the error notification on the left When the above error occurs The progress of the special game will be stopped. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the progress of the special game may not be stopped when an error of excessive ejection balls occurs.

With the above configuration, in the game machine according to the eighth embodiment, the ball entry detection device (ball entry port) can be provided by providing two ball entry detection devices (ball entry ports) in the large winning opening. Compared with the case where only one is provided, the time for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening to be discharged to the outside of the large winning opening can be shortened. In addition, even if the discharge waiting time between rounds is set to a short time, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to execute the discharge of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening, and the round execution time and the special game execution. The time can be shortened, and special games with a better tempo can be executed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the shortage of the discharged balls can be detected in the discharge waiting time in the discharge waiting round, and the excess of the discharged balls can be detected in all the periods during the special game. .. Further, the count of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is configured to continuously (cumulatively) count during the entire period during the special game.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, since the sensor for detecting the ejected ball is not provided at the destination where the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 flows down, the large winning opening winning detection device BC14 is used. When the game ball has passed, the consistency between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls can be guaranteed by executing 1 addition and 1 subtraction with respect to the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b.

Further, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is configured to be able to detect a shortage of discharged balls as a discharge ball abnormality during the discharge standby time. A round in which a discharge standby time is provided may also be referred to as a discharge standby round. Further, in the special game executed by one big winning opening, the opening / closing pattern of the shielding member C24 and the specific area valid period are different depending on the round, so that the distribution game execution round and the normal round are executed by one big winning opening. The discharge waiting round is executed only in the round immediately before the distribution game execution round, the distribution game execution round, and the final round, and after the discharge standby time ends (or at the start of the special game). ) To the end timing of the discharge waiting time of the next discharge waiting round, the winning balls and the discharged balls are measured together, so that the discharge waiting round is the minimum round only for the rounds that have a large influence on the progress of the game. In addition to being able to increase the number, the time between rounds other than the discharge waiting round can be shortened, and the execution time of the special game can be shortened, so that the game machine can execute the special game with a better tempo.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, since the discharge waiting time is provided in the round immediately before the distribution game execution round and the distribution game execution round, which are the discharge waiting rounds, a large amount in the executing round is provided. The period from the final closing timing of the winning opening to the first opening timing of the large winning opening in the next round is longer than that of the rounds other than the discharge waiting round. Although the discharge waiting time is provided in the final round, it is excluded from the above configuration because the next round does not exist.

In the eighth embodiment, the execution round during the special game can be executed as the distribution game execution round and the normal round by using only one large winning opening, but a plurality of large winning openings are provided. Also, for example, a round in which a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening are provided to open a second large winning opening having a specific area C22 and a first large winning opening not having a specific area C22 are opened. By setting the round to be played, only in a predetermined round, the game ball is inserted into the specific area C22 (the right to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game is acquired), and the distribution game is executed. It may be configured.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, even in a gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening, the big hit symbol (and the round to be executed) is used to move to the specific area C22 provided in the big winning opening. Drive pattern of the shielding member C24 that restricts the entry of the ball (for example, a drive pattern in which the game ball can enter a specific area and a drive pattern in which the game ball is always closed so that the ball cannot enter, or the game ball can easily enter the specific area. By configuring so that the drive pattern (drive pattern in a specific round such as a distribution game execution round) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area is different, the probability changes after the end of the special game for each jackpot symbol. It is possible to set whether or not to shift to the gaming state. In addition, by reducing the number of large winning openings, the number of members is reduced, which also has the effect of reducing the production cost of the game machine.

In the eighth embodiment, in the distribution game execution round, the shielding member C24 performs an opening operation in a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms open → 2600 ms closed → 28800 ms open → closed) regardless of the jackpot symbol, and the big winning opening By stopping the execution of the predetermined opening pattern and closing the shielding member C24 at the time when a predetermined time elapses from the end of opening, the entry into the specific area C22 at the time of short opening and the time of long opening of the large winning opening. It was configured to have different ball easiness (difficult to enter at short open, easy to enter at long open), but it is not limited to this, for example, in the distribution game execution round, the big winning opening is constant. While opening with an opening pattern (for example, opening 28800 → closing), (1) depending on the jackpot symbol, the opening pattern of the shielding member C24 is changed to “long opening: 31340 ms open → closed” and “short open: 52 ms open →”. Closed (because the opening of the large winning opening and the opening of the shielding member C24 are started at the same time, and it takes 52 ms or more for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening to reach the shielding member C24. , It is difficult to enter the specific area C22) ”, or (2) the opening pattern of the shielding member C24 is changed from“ long open: 31340 ms open → closed ”and“ always closed ”according to the jackpot symbol. Depending on the decision, (3) the jackpot symbol, the entry to the specific area C22 is valid, the entry is invalid (the purpose is to not grant the right to shift to the probability fluctuation game state, and it is counted as the number of ejected balls). May be determined or configured to be possible.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the so-called ball probability type gaming machine has been described, but the concept regarding the opening mode of the large winning opening and the shielding member C24 (and the specific area C22) in these examples is described in the large winning opening. Depending on the entry into the specific area C22 provided, some benefits {especially benefits other than prize balls, such as the right to shift to a special game, the right to execute subsequent rounds, the time-saving game state and / or probability fluctuation. A game in which the right to shift to the game state (or the number of continuous upper limit changes in the time reduction / probability change state) and other predetermined game states (for example, the variation mode and / or effect of the main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol are different from those in the normal state). It can also be applied to a type of game machine (for example, a conventional two-type game machine or a one-type one-type small hit development type game machine) to which the right to shift to (state) is granted. I will add that. As a configuration example to which the concept regarding the opening mode of the large winning opening and the shielding member C24 (and the specific region C22) in the eighth embodiment can be applied, for example, the shape is the same as that of the eighth embodiment. It has one big winning opening and a second big winning opening having a shape different from that of the eighth embodiment, and when a game ball enters a specific area C22 in the first big winning opening, it shifts to a big hit. In the case of a type 1 type 1 small hit development type gaming machine (the second large winning opening does not have a specific area C22), the large winning opening opened during the small hit game is the first large winning opening. Therefore, the big winning opening opened during the big hit may be configured to be the second big winning opening. As a specific flow of the game in a game machine having such a configuration, when a small hit is won, the first big winning opening is opened, and during the execution of the small hit, the game ball is placed in the specific area C22 in the first big winning opening. With the entry of the ball as an opportunity, the big hit that the second big winning opening opens is started.

In the eighth embodiment, the action when the discharge ball abnormality occurs is not shown, but the next round is not started until the discharge ball abnormality is resolved, and the round waiting time does not occur. It may be configured to be shorter than the time, and the specific area valid period is invalid from (1) the timing when the discharge ball abnormality is detected, and (2) invalid from the drive end timing of the shielding member C24. (3) It may be invalidated from the timing when the discharge ball abnormality is resolved. Further, the drive of the shielding member C24 ends at the timing when (1) the discharge ball abnormality is detected, (2) the drive ends at the timing when the opening pattern of the shielding member C24 ends, and (3) the discharge ball abnormality is eliminated. The drive may be terminated at the same timing. Regarding the error notification when the discharge ball abnormality occurs, (1) the error notification is executed when the discharge ball abnormality occurs, and (2) the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the discharge ball abnormality occurs. During that time, the error notification may be executed when the discharge ball abnormality is not resolved. In addition, although excess discharge balls and insufficient discharge balls are provided as abnormal discharge balls, the above configurations (1) to (3) may be applied to each of the excess discharge balls and the shortage of discharge balls (1) to (3) above. The action when an excess of ejected balls occurs and the action when an insufficient ejected ball occurs) may be different.

It should be noted that the aspect of the large winning opening in the configuration in which the distribution game execution round and the normal round (rounds other than the distribution game execution round) can be executed using one large winning opening described in detail in the eighth embodiment. For example, when a game ball enters the large winning opening, a first large winning opening winning detection device and a second large winning opening winning detection device are provided as detection devices through which the game ball passes. When passing through the 1st big prize opening prize detection device, the counter value of the number of winning balls counter is incremented by 1 in the same way as the big winning opening winning detection device used in this example, and the 1st big winning opening winning detection device It is configured to increase the counter value of the discharge number counter by 1 when passing through a discharge port provided downstream or a specific area (when a game ball is discharged from a large winning opening, it always passes through either of them). On the other hand, when the player passes through the second prize opening winning detection device, both the counter value of the number of winning balls counter and the counter value of the discharging number counter are incremented by one (the second winning opening winning detection device). The game ball that has passed through is ejected without passing through another detection device). With such a configuration, even if a large number of game balls enter the large winning opening in a short time, ball clogging is less likely to occur, so that a predetermined number of game balls that close the large winning opening. It is possible to design the ball to be executed in a short time, and it is possible to shorten the execution time of the special game. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening is configured to pass through the first large winning opening winning detection device more easily than the second large winning opening winning detecting device.

In the eighth embodiment, in the special game executed in one big winning opening, the opening / closing pattern of the shielding member C24 and the specific area valid period are different depending on the round, so that the special game is shaken in one big winning opening. Both the distribution game execution round and the normal round can be executed, and the round for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality in the discharge ball (also called the discharge standby round) is the round immediately before the distribution game execution round and the distribution game execution. It is executed only in the round and the final round, and it is configured to measure the winning balls and the discharged balls collectively from the end of the discharge waiting time (or at the start of the special game) to the end of the next discharge waiting time. The present invention is not limited, and all rounds in the special game may be configured to be discharge waiting rounds (all rounds in the special game determine the discharge ball abnormality).

Further, in the eighth embodiment, in the distribution game execution round in the long open big hit (the big hit that makes it relatively easy to enter the specific area C22), the effect display device SG is like "Aim for V!". It may be configured to execute an effect (sometimes referred to as a specific area launch effect) instructing the player to launch a game ball toward the big winning opening (in the distribution game execution round in all jackpots). May be executed). In addition, in the round immediately before the distribution game execution round, an effect of instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the big prize opening is executed, such as "Aim for V in the next round". It may be configured as follows. In addition, if it is configured so that the specific area launch effect can be executed in the distribution game execution round or the round immediately before the distribution game execution round, the first hit (non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game). It may be configured so that the production mode of the specific area launch effect in the state (during the big hit won in the state) and the specific area launch effect in the continuous villa (during the big hit won in the time reduction game state) is different, or in the case of the consecutive villa. It may be configured not to execute the specific area firing effect. As an example, the specific area firing effect at the time of the first hit may be configured so that the display area of "Aim for V!" Is larger than the specific area firing effect at the time of consecutive villas. Further, even when the ending effect described above is configured to be able to be executed, the specific area launch effect may be configured to be able to be executed, and the specific area launch effect executed during the jackpot while the ending effect is being executed may be executed. The effect mode may be configured to be different from the effect mode of the specific area launch effect executed during the big hit in which the ending effect is not executed, or the specific area launch may be performed during the jackpot in which the ending effect is executed. It may be configured not to execute the effect. As an example, the specific area launch effect during the jackpot without the ending effect is configured so that the display area of "Aim for V!" Is larger than the specific area launch effect during the jackpot with the ending effect. You may.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, there is a case where the game ball enters a specific area during the big hit (particularly during the big hit on the first main game side) won in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state. While the production tendency after the end of the big hit is different depending on the case where the ball is not played, the game ball enters a specific area during the big hit (especially during the big hit on the second main game side) won in the time-saving game state. It may be configured so that the effect tendency after the end of the big hit is the same in the case where the ball is not entered and in the case where the ball is not entered. Regarding the production tendency, "the production tendency is the same" may mean that the production content itself to be executed is the same, and as the production group, the production group A to which the productions A1 to A5 belong (for example, the production group A). As the effect to which the character is introduced, the effect in which the character is introduced is executed), and the effect group B to which the effects B1 to B5 belong (for example, the battle effect is executed as the effect belonging to the effect group B). ) And, if at least, the effects A1 and the effect A2, etc., belong to the same effect group (the effect A1 and the effect A2 belong to the same effect group A). It may be said that "the production tendency is the same". Further, "the production tendency is different" may mean that the production content itself to be executed is different, and as the production group, the production group A to which the productions A1 to A5 belong (for example, the production group A belongs to the production group A). As a production, a production in which a character is introduced is executed), and a production group B to which the productions B1 to B5 belong (for example, a battle production is executed as a production belonging to the production group B). A and B2, etc., which belong to different production groups (the production groups to which the production A1 and the production B2 belong are different between the production group A and the production group B). It may be said that "the production tendency is different". The concept related to the effect tendency can be applied to all the configurations (implements) related to this example. Further, the same concept can be applied to "same production", "different production", "same production mode", and "different production mode".

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) In a jackpot group that is a long-open jackpot, there is at least a jackpot A with 4 execution rounds and a jackpot B with 16 execution rounds (the distribution game execution round is the 4th round).
(2) Holds that are scheduled to be big hits for the holds that exist during the big hits (especially the hold on the second main game side) {All big hits regardless of the number of execution rounds and whether or not it is a long open big hit It may be put on hold, or it may be only on the long open jackpot where the number of execution rounds is the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds)}, and if there is a hold that will be a jackpot on the running jackpot The hold-in-ream villa effect, which is an effect suggesting the existence of, is configured to be feasible, and the hold-in-ream villa effect can be executed in the jackpot B, but the hold-in-ream villa effect is not executed in the jackpot A.
(3) In a jackpot with 16 execution rounds, a round-up effect (for example, 4 rounds) is an effect as if the number of execution rounds increased during the jackpot without notifying the actual number of execution rounds at the start of the jackpot. (Displayed as "+12 rounds" at the end of the eye) may be made executable.
(4) When the round-up effect is executed at the jackpot B, the reserved inner consecutive villa effect is not executed during the jackpot, or both the round-up effect and the reserved inner consecutive villa effect are executed at the jackpot B. The execution timing of the Hold Inner Renso effect is different between the case of performing and the case of executing only the Hold Inner Renso effect at the jackpot B (in either case, the execution timing of the Hold Inner Renso effect is the distribution game execution. Timing after the round).
(5) There are two holds that will be big hits in the holds that exist during the special game, of which the hold that is scheduled to be digested first is the hold that will be big hit A, and the hold that is scheduled to be digested later If it is a hold that will be a jackpot B, the effect of the consecutive villas will not be executed, but if the hold that is scheduled to be digested first and the hold that is scheduled to be digested later is a hold that will be a jackpot B, it will be within the hold. It is possible to perform a series of villa productions.

Further, the configuration detailed in the eighth embodiment has a small hit as in the fifth embodiment described above, and the small hit ends when the game ball enters the V winning opening during the execution of the small hit. It may also be applied in a configuration in which a jackpot is executed later.

(Example 1 of change from the eighth embodiment)
In the eighth embodiment, the shortage of discharge balls can be detected only in the discharge standby round in the special game, the detection of excess discharge balls can be detected during the execution of the special game, and the measurement of the discharge confirmation sensor is performed. Although it is configured to accumulate and measure during the execution of the special game, the monitoring mode of the ejection ball abnormality during the special game is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which a discharge ball abnormality is monitored during a special game different from the eighth embodiment is set as a change example 1 from the eighth embodiment, and only the changes from the eighth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 (eighth) in FIG. 113 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. First, the change from the eighth embodiment is step 1649-6 (eighth variation 1), that is, in step 1850, after the special game execution means MP33 executes the discharge ball shortage determination process, step 1649. At -6 (8th variation 1), the special game executing means MP33 resets (zero clears) the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, and proceeds to step 1646.

First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 (eighth) in FIG. 113 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. The change from the eighth embodiment is step 1849-7 (eighth variation 1), that is, in step 1630, when the special game control means MP30 has a timer value of the discharge standby timer 1173t of 0, the step. At 1649-7 (8th variation 1), the counter value of the discharge confirmation timer 1173b is reset (zero clear), and the process proceeds to step 3150 (8th). Further, in FIG. 130, steps 2150 (eighth), step 1645-1, step 1645-2, step 1645-3, and step 1639, which are the processes related to the excess number of ejected balls provided in the eighth embodiment. Processing has been deleted.

Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the discharge ball shortage determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (eighth) in FIG. 130 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. The change from the eighth embodiment is step 1866 (eighth variation 1), that is, in step 1854, when the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is not 0 (greater than 0), step 1866 (first). In 8 variation 1), the special game control means MP30 sets a command for excess ejection balls (a command for the sub-control board S side and a command for information that excess ejection balls have occurred), and the following The process proceeds to the process {process of step 1649-6 (8th variation 1)}.

As described above, in the first modification from the eighth embodiment, the monitoring of the excess discharge balls is executed in the discharge standby time of the discharge standby round in the same manner as the monitoring of the shortage of discharge balls, and the discharge standby of the discharge standby round is performed. By configuring the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b to be cleared to zero each time the time ends, that is, resetting the accumulated measurement result of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b, it is possible to collectively monitor the discharge ball abnormality for a plurality of rounds. By resetting the monitoring result regarding the discharge ball abnormality every time the discharge standby round ends, it is possible to easily grasp at what timing the discharge ball abnormality occurred during the execution of the special game.

(Example 2 of change from the eighth embodiment)
In the eighth embodiment and the change example 1 from the eighth embodiment, a shortage of discharge balls and an excess of discharge balls are provided as discharge ball abnormalities, and the entry and discharge status of the large winning opening during the execution of the special game is monitored. Although the configuration for monitoring the ball entry and discharge status is illustrated, the configuration for monitoring such a ball entry and discharge status is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration. Therefore, the configuration for monitoring the ball entry and discharge status different from the change example 1 from the 8th embodiment and the 8th embodiment is set as the change example 2 from the 8th embodiment, and the changes from the 8th embodiment are described below. Only detailed.

First, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the specific area entry determination process B according to the subroutine of step 3150 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the second modification from the eighth embodiment. The change from the eighth embodiment is step 3158 (8th variation 2), that is, in step 3156, the special game execution means MP33 executes the distribution game execution round during the special game related to the long open symbol. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the specific area C22, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the distribution round specific area non-entry flag in step 3158 (8th variation 2), and the next process { The process proceeds to step 1850 (eighth)}.

Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the discharge ball shortage determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (eighth) in FIG. 118 in the second modification from the eighth embodiment. First, the changes from the eighth embodiment are step 1870 (8th variation 2), step 1872 (8th variation 2), and step 1874 (8th variation 2), that is, in step 1854, the special game. When the execution means MP33 determines that the counter value of the discharge confirmation counter 1173b is not 0 (a discharge ball abnormality has occurred), in step 1870 (8th variation 2), the special game execution means MP33 has a distribution round. Determines whether or not the specific area non-entry ball flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1870 (8th change 2), in step 1872 (8th change 2), the special game execution means MP33 is a discharge ball error command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the discharge ball abnormality occurs. Set the command) related to the information that it has occurred. Next, in step 1874 (8th variation 2), the special game executing means MP33 turns off the distribution round specific area non-entry flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1639). Even if No in step 1870 (8th variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1639). As described above, in the second modification from the eighth embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the special game related to the long open symbol, and the discharge ball is abnormal. Is configured to send a command related to the information that an error has occurred to the sub-control board S side when the above occurs. In the second modification from the eighth embodiment, the excess number of ejected balls and the insufficient number of ejected balls are collectively regarded as one ejection ball abnormality as a mismatch between the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls. Further, in the second modification from the eighth embodiment, when an error related to the discharge ball abnormality occurs, the progress of the special game is not stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this and is related to the discharge ball abnormality. When an error occurs, the progress of the special game may be stopped, and when the error is resolved, the progress of the special game may be restarted.

Next, FIG. 134 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side in the second modification from the eighth embodiment. First, the changes from the eighth embodiment are step 5750 (8th variation 2) and step 5800 (8th variation 2). That is, after the sub-control board S executes the error notification execution process in step 5700, the sub-control board S executes the error command reception control process described later in step 5750 (8th variation 2). Next, in step 5800 (8th variation 2), the sub-control board S executes the standby demo display control process described later, and shifts to the process of step 5020.

Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the error command reception control process according to the subroutine of step 5750 (8th variation 2) in FIG. 134 in the second modification from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 5754, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not a discharge ball error command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5754, in step 5756, the error notification control means SM30 adds 1 to the counter value of the error counter ER10c, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5800 (8th variation 2)}. Even if No in step 5754, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5800 (8th variation 2)}.

Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart of the standby demo display control process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (8th variation 2) in FIG. 134 in the second modification from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 5802, the effect display control means SM20 determines whether or not the game has been executed for a predetermined period. Here, if the game is not executed, (1) various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, large winning opening C10, etc.) are entered. Various entrances (1st main game start opening A10, 2nd main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, large winning opening C10, out opening D80, auxiliary game starting opening H10, etc. ), (3) The game ball is not launched (the player does not touch the launch handle D44 (the player touches the touch sensor provided on the launch handle D44). If you touch, it is determined that the game ball has been launched), the game ball has not flowed down into the game area D30, etc.), and it may be determined that the game has not been executed.

In the case of Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the effect display control means SM20 is a standby demo screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device SG when the game has not progressed for a predetermined period, for example, character introduction or story. A command to display (a moving image such as an introduction is displayed) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5806. The display of the standby demo screen will end when the execution of the game is resumed. In addition, when the execution of the game is resumed, (1) the game to various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, large winning opening C10, etc.) Detects ball entry and various entry ports (1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, general winning opening P10, large winning opening C10, out opening D80, auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) Detecting the entry of the game ball into, (3) Detecting the launch of the game ball (the player touches the launch handle D44, the game ball is flowing down into the game area D30, etc.). It may be determined that the execution of is resumed. On the other hand, even if No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5806. Next, in step 5806, the effect display control means SM20 determines whether or not the standby demo screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case of Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the effect display control means SM20 determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB (for example, a long press operation that is turned on for 1 second or longer). The condition of Yes in the process of step 5808 is not limited to that of this example, and for example, the sub input button SB is simply operated (for example, "0.1 second on → off" as a single operation. It may be operated as). In the case of Yes in step 5808, in step 5810, the effect display control means SM20 displays the counter value of the error counter ER10c on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020). On the other hand, even if No in step 5806 or step 5808, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020). As a display mode of the counter value of the error counter ER10c displayed on the effect display device SG, for example, a small display is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device SG, and the display is continued until the power is turned off and then on. , It may be a display mode that is not so conspicuous. Further, the display of the counter value of the error counter ER10c may be configured to end when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display. Further, the conditions for displaying the counter value of the error counter ER10c on the effect display device SG are not limited to those of this example, and for example, a cross as an operating member connected to the sub-control board S different from the sub-input button SB. The counter of the error counter ER10c is provided by providing the key SB-2 (the four buttons of the up button, right button, down button, and left button can be operated) and operating the cross key SB-2 while the standby demo screen is displayed. It may be configured to display the value, or the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the standby demo screen is not displayed and the game is not executed, and the menu screen is displayed. The counter value of the error counter ER10c may also be displayed by operating the cross key SB-2 during the display (for example, operating the lower button three times).

With the above configuration, in the second modification from the eighth embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the special game related to the long open symbol. In addition, when a discharge ball abnormality occurs, a command related to the information that an error has occurred is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side is provided with the information that the error has occurred. Even if such a command is received, it is not immediately displayed (notified) on the effect display device SG or the like, but the number of times an error has occurred when the player operates the sub input button SB on the standby demo screen is displayed. It was configured as follows. With this configuration, an error has occurred in a situation different from the case where an illegal game is executed, in which the entry into the specific area C22 is not detected during the period in which the entry into the specific area C22 is easy. It can be configured so that the player can select whether or not to confirm. In addition, all the errors illustrated in this example may be configured to be able to be displayed (notified) by the effect display device SG or the like, or may be displayed by the effect display device SG or the like by operating the sub input button SB or the like. (Notification) It may be configured to be possible. In such a configuration, as the content to be displayed on the effect display device SG, in addition to the number of error occurrences, the time when the error occurred, the total period during which the error occurred, etc. may be displayed, and a plurality of types may be displayed. Information about the error may be displayed at the same time.

In the second modification from the eighth embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round of the special game (sometimes referred to as a long-open jackpot) related to the long-open symbol. In this case, it may be configured to detect a specific area non-entry ball error as an error different from the above-mentioned discharge ball error (error related to the discharge ball error command), and the specific area non-entry ball error is detected. If so, it may be configured to notify (for example, notify by a frame decoration lamp) at the time of detection. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round of the special game (sometimes referred to as a short open jackpot) related to the short open symbol, the above-mentioned discharge ball error and the specific It may be configured to detect a specific area entry error which is an error different from the area non-entry error, and when the specific area entry error is detected, it is notified at the time of detection (for example, a frame). It may be configured to notify by a decorative lamp).

(Example 3 of change from the eighth embodiment)
When the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the second modification from the eighth embodiment to the eighth embodiment described above, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game. The mode of the signal output to the external terminal (sometimes referred to as the external terminal output signal) in the gaming machine is not limited to the above. Therefore, a configuration in which such an external terminal output signal is provided will be referred to as a modification 3 from the eighth embodiment, and will be described in detail below as a difference from the eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of an external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 113 in the third modification from the eighth embodiment. First, the change from the eighth embodiment is step 3504-8 (eighth third), that is, in step 3502, after the external signal output control means MG confirms the state of the game machine, step 3504 In -8 (8th and 3rd), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 8 and based on the confirmed state of the game machine, via the external relay terminal plate G. , A signal indicating the state of the game machine is output to the hall computer HC, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the third modification from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

Signal number 58
Signal type: Big hit system Signal outline: Distribution of special game related to long open symbol Signal 1 signal configuration related to the first entry into a specific area in the game execution round: [Output timing] Special related to long open symbol Game distribution In the game execution round, the first ball entry timing into the specific area C22 [output period] 1 second on → off (sometimes called a one-shot signal)
Duplication of output period: [Possibility of duplication] There is no duplication of the same signal, but other signals (the above-mentioned jackpot signals such as signal number 8 and signal number 9 and signal number 26 and signal number 27). (Similarly, signals other than signal number 58, which is described as having no possibility of duplication, may overlap with other signals).
Remarks: The signal is not output when the game state is a time-saving game state (including the electric support state).

With the above configuration, in the change example 3 from the eighth embodiment, the external terminal is output at the first ball entry timing into the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round of the special game related to the long open symbol. By outputting a signal that is turned on for only one second as a signal, the first entry of the specific area C22 into an external device connected to a pachinko game machine such as a liquid crystal device that can display information such as game history, that is, special By outputting the external terminal output signal at the timing when it is confirmed that the game will shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the game, the external device executes an effect linked to the entry into the specific area C22. Will be possible.

The configuration of the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board, which can be applied in the third modification from the eighth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the following external relay terminal board can be used. The transmission signal of the above may be configured to be output.
<1>
Signal type: Outline of jackpot signal: It is judged that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls to the big winning opening from the start of the special game to the end of the distribution game execution round do not match (the emission confirmation counter value is not 0). Signal 1 signal configuration: [Output timing] End timing of distribution game execution round (End timing of discharge standby time in distribution game execution round)
[Output period] 0.3 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off Duplicate output period: [Possibility of duplication] None Remarks: An error occurs in the effect display device SG when it is determined twice that an error has occurred. This is displayed, the sound effect related to the error occurrence is output from the speaker D24, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L lights up in the lighting mode related to the error occurrence. There is no change in the game state when an error occurs (the progress of the special game does not stop). The error notification ends 30 seconds after the start of the notification.
<2>
Signal type: Outline of jackpot signal: It is judged that the number of ejected balls is larger than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the execution of the special game (when the emission confirmation counter value is less than 0, the number of ejected balls is excessive). Signal 1 signal configuration: [Output timing] Timing when 8 ms has passed since it was determined that the number of balls ejected was greater than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the execution of the special game [Output] Period] 240 seconds on → off Overlapping output period: [possible duplication] Yes [Action when duplication is possible] 300 seconds on → off after the last error is detected Remarks: When an error occurs, the effect display device The SG indicates that an error has occurred, the speaker D24 outputs a sound effect related to the occurrence of the error, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L lights up in the lighting mode related to the occurrence of the error. The power is turned off and then turned on, or the error notification ends 300 seconds after the error notification starts. There is no change in the game state when an error occurs (the progress of the special game does not stop).
<3>
Signal type: Outline of jackpot signal: It is judged that the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the execution of the special game (when the emission confirmation counter value is larger than 0, the ejected balls are insufficient). Signal 1 signal configuration: [Output timing] Timing when 8 ms has passed since it was determined that the number of balls ejected was less than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the execution of the special game [Output] Period] 240 seconds on → off Overlapping output period: [possible duplication] Yes [Action when duplication is possible] 300 seconds on → off after the last error is detected Remarks: When an error occurs, the effect display device The SG indicates that an error has occurred, the speaker D24 outputs a sound effect related to the occurrence of the error, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L lights up in the lighting mode related to the occurrence of the error. After the error is resolved, the error notification ends when the power is turned off and then on. When an error occurs, the fluctuation of the main game symbol and the progress of the special game are stopped (the game does not proceed until the error is resolved).
<4>
Signal type: Big hit system Signal outline: During the execution of a short open big hit (a big hit that is relatively difficult to enter the specific area C22) related to the first main game side, no entry into the big winning opening is detected. Signal to be output when discharge is detected (determined to be excessive discharge balls) Signal 1 Signal configuration: [Output timing] Discharge during short-open jackpot related to the first main game side Timing when it is determined that there are too many balls [Output period] 290 seconds on → Off Overlapping output periods: [Possibility of duplication] Yes [Action when duplication is possible] 290 seconds on → Off after the last error was detected Remarks: When an error occurs, the effect display device SG displays that an error has occurred, the speaker D24 outputs a sound effect related to the error occurrence, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L changes to the lighting mode related to the error occurrence. Lights up. When the signal output ends, the error notification also ends. There is no change in the game state when an error occurs (the progress of the special game does not stop). It should be noted that not only the excess of discharged balls but also the shortage of discharged balls may be canceled after a predetermined time (for example, 290 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error.

(9th Embodiment)
In the ninth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, in the small hit game and in the situation where the V winning opening ball detection device C26s is effective, the V winning opening C26 (V winning opening ball detecting device C26s) is used. The jackpot is configured to start when the game ball enters. Other configurations of such a game machine will be described in the ninth embodiment, and only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 139 is a main flowchart showing a general flow performed by the main control board M in the ninth embodiment. The differences from the fifth embodiment are step 1300 (9th), step 1800 (9th), and step 1900 (9th). That is, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process, and then in step 1300 (9th), the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. The process proceeds to step 1400. Further, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process, and then in step 1800 (9th), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1900 (9th), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the distribution accessory control process described later, and shifts to the process of step 6200 (fifth). Here, the process executed in step 1900 (9th) is a member that determines whether or not the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20 enters the V winning opening C26 at the time of executing the small hit. This is a drive control process for the distribution accessory.

Next, FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 139 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1302, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start opening entry information from the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. Is received or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the reserved balls related to the side) are not the upper limit (4 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 uses the newly generated hold command (the number of holds, the hold random value, or the pre-determined pass / fail result or main based on the hold random value. The stop symbol of the game symbol, information related to the variation mode, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Is done), and the process proceeds to step 1312. Further, in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the second main game start port entry ball from the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine if information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1313, whether or not the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B does not satisfy the predetermined error condition regarding the illegal entry into the second main game start port B10. To judge. Here, in the ninth embodiment, according to the aspect of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, in the non-time shortened gaming state (even if the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened). The ball is not entered into the second main game start port B10, and in the time-reduced game state (assuming that the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is scheduled to open for 2.0 seconds). Also) Since the second main game start port B10 is configured so that it is difficult for the number of balls to enter exceeding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to occur, the predetermined error condition is this configuration (design). ), A condition for monitoring whether or not a ball has entered the second main game starting port B10 is set. In the case of Yes in step 1313, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the reserved balls related to the side) are not the upper limit (4 in this example). The maximum number of holdings for the second main game is not limited to four, and may be less than four. In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 uses the newly generated hold command (the number of holds, the hold random value, or the pre-determined pass / fail result or main based on the hold random value. The stop symbol of the game symbol, information related to the variation mode, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Further, in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

The processing in the case of No in step 1313, that is, when the predetermined error condition regarding the illegal entry into the second main game start port B10 is satisfied is not particularly limited, but for example, in the non-time reduction game state. When a ball enters the second main game start port B10, only an error notification is executed to continue the game progress, while a predetermined number (a predetermined number) of the second main game start port B10 is used in the time-reduced game state. For example, when there are more than 6 balls entered, an error notification may be executed and the game progress may be stopped (processing after the processing is interrupted) (processing in step 1322). Is applicable). Further, the execution conditions of the error notification are as follows: (1) When the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened once, the second main game starts from the time when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is activated. When the number of balls entered in the starting port B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 6), (2) the second main game starting when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d accumulated during the game is closed. When the number of balls entered into the mouth B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3), (3) the second main game start mouth is after the timing when the error notification condition of (1) or (2) is satisfied. It may be every time one game ball enters B10. Further, the predetermined number related to the error condition in step 1313 may be less than 6 and more than 1 (for example, 3) in the non-time reduction gaming state.

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number and the second main game content determination random number are stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting stuck). In addition, regarding the winning / failing lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the already recorded game state related to the hold) between the acquisition of the winning / failing lottery random number and the execution of the winning / failing lottery related to the winning / failing lottery random number Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of executing the winning / failing lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). Is configured to store the lottery random number until the execution of.

Here, the main game table 1 shown in FIG. 141 is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, there is only one type of table for determining whether or not the game is on the first main game side and the second main game side, that is, it has a so-called probability fluctuation function. (It is a feature of the ninth embodiment that a plurality of jackpots can be continuously performed in a short period of time even if it does not have a probability fluctuation function). Instead, as a type of hit, in addition to a big hit {a hit that allows a so-called round (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "R") to be executed multiple times}, a small hit (a so-called round can be executed only once). (Hit), and as will be described later, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit, a big hit is induced after that (even if the result of the hit / fail judgment is not a big hit). Has been done. Since the configuration for inducing the big hit may be realized by at least one of the first main game side and the second main game side, the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit is the first main game. It may be configured so that it occurs at at least one of the tables on the side and the second main game side (however, in order to make a plurality of big hits continuous in a short period of time, the table for determining whether or not the second main game side is successful Therefore, it is preferable to configure it so that it wins a small hit). In the ninth embodiment, in particular, the second main game side is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/6) (temporarily, four reservations are made on the second main game side). If it exists, if the small hit is won at about 1/6, the probability of winning the small hit is about 50% by the time the hold for the four pieces is exhausted). The configuration of the main game table 1 is not limited to this, and a small hit may not be provided on the first main game side, or a loss may not be provided on the second main game side.

Here, the main game table 2 shown in the figure is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game symbol is a big hit from a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "7A" and "7B"). It is configured to be determined as a symbol. The number of rounds of the special game and the opening time of the big winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are "7A" as a "4R" big hit and "7B" as a "15R" big hit. The random value and the type of stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. In the ninth embodiment, the number of rounds of the special game related to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game related to the second main game are different, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game is different. However, the number of rounds of the special game related to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game related to the second main game are both set to "15R", and the opening mode of the large winning opening is set. By making the difference, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game may be made different.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in the figure is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the ninth embodiment, the variation mode of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state Fluctuation time) can be determined. For example, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) for a certain random number value, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and the main game time reduction flag is turned on. In the case of (time saving game state), it is configured so that the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short can be easily determined (other matters characteristic of the fluctuation time will be described later). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side. When is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game side to hold the game by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Further, as shown in this figure, in this example, the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol in the non-time shortened game state is 1 of 15 seconds when the game is lost and 60 seconds when the game is hit (big hit, small hit). It is configured so that only the type of variation time is selected, and in the non-time reduction game state, the same effect (the effect is related to the variation of the decorative symbol, but the details will be described later) is performed according to the variation time. It is configured to be executed (in the case of a hit, the effect of notifying the hit is executed after the effect at the time of loss is executed). The configuration of the main game table 3 is not limited to this, and the shortest fluctuation time on the first main game side in consideration of all the game states, the win / fail results, and the number of holds is the all game states and the win / fail results. It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time on the second main game side in consideration of the number of holdings. For example, as the case where the shortest fluctuation time is obtained, the non-time shortened gaming state and the first When the number of main game pending is the maximum number and is lost (or when the time is shortened game state and is lost), the shortest fluctuation time on the first main game side is set to "1 second", and the time shortened game state and the first 2 The shortest fluctuation time on the second main game side when the number of reserved main games is the maximum and is lost may be set to "3 seconds". Further, only the fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened game state, the type and selection rate of the selection candidate of the fluctuation time depend on the number of main game reservations {others (for example, the first main game in the time shortened game state). In the case of a change on the side, a change on the second main game side in the non-time shortened game state, and a change on the second main game side in the time shortened game state), it does not depend on the number of reserved main games}.

Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 139 in the ninth embodiment. First, the differences from the fifth embodiment are step 1648-1 (9th), step 1648-2 (9th), step 1648-5 (9th), step 1648-7 (9th), and step 1648. -8 (9th), step 1648-9 (9th), and step 1700 (9th). That is, when the special game executing means MP33 determines in step 1602 that the condition device operation flag is on, in step 1648-1 (9th), the special game executing means MP33 sets the special game end demo flag (special game). Determines if the flag that turns on during the end demo time) is off. If Yes in step 1648-1 (9th), the process proceeds to step 1606, and if No in step 1648-1 (9th), the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (9th). Further, in step 1644, the special game execution means MP33 issues a special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and a command related to the end of the final round in the special game) on the sub-main control unit side. After setting in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990), the special game is executed in step 1648-2 (9th). Means MP33 turns on the special game end demo flag. Next, in step 1648-5 (9th), the special game execution means MP33 starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 5 seconds) in the special game end demo time timer MD34t (decrement timer), and starts in step 1648-. Move to 7 (9th). Next, in step 1648-7 (9th), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the timer value of the special game end demo time timer MD34t is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1648-7 (9th), in step 1648-8 (9th), the special game executing means MP33 turns off the special game end demo flag. Next, in step 1648-9 (9th), the special game execution means MP33 issues an end demo end command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a command related to the end of the special game end demo time). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1642, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag. Next, in step 1700 (9th), the special game execution means MP33 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1800 (9th)}. Even if No in step 1648-7 (9th), the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (9th)}.

Next, FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 142 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1747-1, the specific game control means MP50 is currently stopped after the special game related to the first main game side (after the special game related to the first main game big hit symbol and the first main game small hit symbol). (Including both after the special game related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 triggered by). If Yes in step 1747-1, the process proceeds to step 1747-3. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1747-1, in other words, in the case of after the completion of the special game related to the second main game symbol, in step 1747-2, the specific game control means MP50 was elected in the time-reduced game state. After the end of the special game (both after the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol and after the special game related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol Includes). In the case of Yes in step 1747-2, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1800 (9th)} (the game state becomes the non-time shortened game state), and in the case of No in step 1747-2, step 1747. Move to -3. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, after the special game related to the first main game side is completed, the special game is not dependent on the game state (whether or not the time is shortened game state) at the time of winning the special game. While the game state after the end of the game is determined, after the end of the special game related to the second main game side, the said state depends on the game state (whether or not the time is shortened game state) at the time of winning the special game. It is configured to determine the game state after the end of the special game. In addition, (1) after the end of the big hit won in the time-shortened game state, or after the end of the big hit related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-shortened game state, Regardless of whether the big hit or small hit is a big hit or a small hit related to either the first main game side or the second main game side, the game always shifts to the time reduction game state, (2) non-time reduction. After the end of the big hit won in the game state, or after the end of the big hit related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time reduction game state, the big hit or the small hit is the first. 1 If it is a big hit or a small hit related to the main game side, it may not shift to the time-shortened gaming state, but if the big hit or a small hit is a big hit or a small hit related to the second main game side, it may not shift to the time-shortened gaming state. All shift to the time shortened game state, or the transition rate to the time shortened game state is higher than the case of the big hit or the small hit related to the first main game side, (3) Based on the big hit symbol in the time shortened game state. If a big hit is won, after the end of the big hit, the game shifts to the time-reduced game state, or the big hit related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured such that the transition rate to the time shortening game state is higher than that after the end.

Next, in step 1747-3, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1747-4 and step 1747-5, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag. Process {process of step 1800 (9th)}.

Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (9th) in FIG. 139 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1840-1, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is a flag that is turned on in the small hit end demo flag (described later in step 1841-5). , The flag that turns on at the end of the small hit demo time) is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 1840-1, in step 1840-2, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the small hit flag (when the small hit is won). It is determined whether or not the flag to be turned on) is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1840-2, in step 1840-3, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1840-4, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in the case of the small hit symbol "2AK": 0.73 seconds open. → Closed, small hit symbol "4AK": "Open for 0.13 seconds → Closed for 0.5 seconds" is repeated 3 times → Open for 0.13 seconds → Closed, Small hit symbol "7AK": 0.13 Open for seconds → Close for 5.87 seconds → Repeat “0.13 seconds open → 0.87 seconds close” twice → Open for 0.25 seconds → Close, for small hit symbol “BK”: Open for 0.09 seconds → 5. Set for 91 seconds closed → "0.09 seconds open → 0.91 seconds closed" repeated 5 times → 0.09 seconds open → closed). Next, in step 1840-5, the small hit game control means MP40 sets a small hit execution flag (a flag that is turned on during execution of the small hit) in the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b. turn on. Next, in step 1840-6, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the second large winning opening C20 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (timer value is counted down).

On the other hand, if No in step 1840-2, in step 1840-8, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is the small hit execution flag turned on? Determine if not. If Yes in step 1840-8, the process proceeds to step 1840-9.

Next, in step 1840-9, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s, and determines whether or not there is a winning (winning ball) in the second big winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1840-9, in step 1841-1, the small hit game control means MP40 has a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the second large winning opening C20 with reference to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. ) Is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1841-1, the process proceeds to step 1843-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1840-9 or step 1841-1, in step 1841-2, the small hit game control means MP40 relates to the small hit game timer MP41t and relates to the opening of the second big winning opening C20. Predetermined time (in this example, for example, in the case of the small hit symbol "2AK": 0.73 seconds open → closed, in the case of the small hit symbol "4AK": "0.13 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed" 3 Repeat twice → Open for 0.13 seconds → Closed, in the case of small hit symbol “7AK”: Open for 0.13 seconds → Closed for 5.87 seconds → Repeat “0.13 seconds open → 0.87 seconds closed” twice → 0.25 seconds open → closed, small hit symbol “BK”: 0.09 seconds open → 5.91 seconds closed → “0.09 seconds open → 0.91 seconds closed” repeated 5 times → 0.09 It is determined whether or not the time from opening to closing per second) has elapsed. If Yes in step 1841-2, the process proceeds to step 1841-3.

Next, in step 1841-3, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1841-4, the small hit game control means MP40 is a small hit end display instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a command related to the completion of the execution of the round related to the small hit). Is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1841-5, the small hit game control means MP40 is in the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is a small hit end demo flag (a flag that is turned on at the small hit end demo time). Turn on. Next, in step 1841-6, the small hit game control means MP40 starts with setting a predetermined value (for example, 10 seconds) in the small hit end demo time timer MP41t-2 (decrement timer), and starts in step 1841-7. Move to. Further, even if No in step 1840-1, the process proceeds to step 1841-7.

Next, in step 1841-7, the small hit game control means MP40 determines whether or not the timer value of the small hit end demo time timer MP41t-2 is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1841-7, the flag during the small hit end demonstration in the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b is turned off. Next, in step 1841-9, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1841-10, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the next process {step 1900 (9th). Process}. In addition, even if No in step 1840-8, step 1841-2 or step 1841-7, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900 (9th)}. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the small hit end demo time of 10 seconds is longer than the big hit end demo time of 5 seconds. That is, the small hit end demo time is longer than the big hit end demo time triggered by the small hit, and by configuring in this way, the second main game side is put on hold during the small hit execution. You can secure the time to do it. In the ninth embodiment, when the small hit related to the second main game side is won in the time shortened game state, the game shifts to the non-time shortened game state after the big hit triggered by the small hit. , Because it is a game property whether or not the small hit on the second main game side can be won again due to the symbol change related to the hold on the second main game side remaining at the end of the big hit, the small hit is being executed. In, it is important to cause a hold on the second main game side. The configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the small hit end demo time may be configured to be shorter than the jackpot end demo time triggered by the small hit. When the small hit and the big hit are in a row, the speed of the row can be increased, that is, the speed of increase of the game ball in the series can be increased.

Further, the configuration related to the jackpot start demo time, the jackpot end demo time, the small hit start demo time, and the small hit end demo time may be configured as follows. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.
(1) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol is longer than the small hit start demo time.
(2) The big hit start demo time related to the stop of the big hit symbol is shorter than the small hit start demo time.
(3) The big hit start demo time and the small hit start demo time related to the stop of the big hit symbol are the same time value.
(4) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol is longer than the small hit end demo time.
(5) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol is shorter than the small hit end demo time.
(6) The big hit end demo time and the small hit end demo time related to the stop of the big hit symbol are the same time value.
(7) The jackpot start demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-shortened game state. It is longer than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(8) The jackpot start demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-shortened game state. It is shorter than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(9) The jackpot start demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-shortened game state. It is the same time value as the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(10) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is longer than the small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(11) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is shorter than the small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(12) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the same time value as the small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(13) The small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state is the big hit start demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state ( Or, it is longer than the small hit start demonstration period in the small hit).
(14) The small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state is the big hit start demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state ( Or, it is shorter than the small hit start demonstration period in the small hit).
(15) The small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state is the big hit start demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state ( Or, it is the same time value as the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(16) The big hit end demonstration time related to the stop of the big hit symbol won in the time shortened game state is the big hit related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time shortened game state. It is longer than the jackpot end demo time.
(17) The jackpot end demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-shortened game state. It is shorter than the jackpot end demo time.
(18) The big hit end demonstration time related to the stop of the big hit symbol won in the time shortened game state is the big hit related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time shortened game state. It is the same time value as the jackpot end demo time.
(19) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is longer than the small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(20) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is shorter than the small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(21) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is the same time value as the small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state.
(22) The small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state is from the big hit end demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state. Is also a long time.
(23) The small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state is from the big hit end demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state. Is also a short time.
(24) The small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state is the big hit end demo time related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state. Same time value.
(25) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is longer than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(26) The jackpot start demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is shorter than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(27) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same time value as the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(28) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is longer than the small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(29) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(30) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(31) The small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit start demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is longer than the time (or the small hit start demonstration period in the small hit).
(32) The small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit start demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is shorter than the time (or the small hit start demonstration period in the small hit).
(33) The small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit start demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same time value as the time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit).
(34) The big hit end demonstration time related to the stop of the big hit symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is longer than the big hit end demo time.
(35) The big hit end demonstration time related to the stop of the big hit symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is shorter than the big hit end demo time.
(36) The jackpot end demonstration time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same time value as the big hit end demo time.
(37) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is longer than the small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(38) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(39) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(40) The small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit end demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It's longer than time.
(41) The small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit end demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It's shorter than time.
(42) The small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state is the big hit end demo related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. It is the same time value as the time.
(43) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is longer than the jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time-reduced game state.
(44) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is shorter than the jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time-reduced game state.
(45) The jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the jackpot start demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state.
(46) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time shortened game state is longer than the jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state.
(47) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time-reduced game state is shorter than the jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state.
(48) The jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the jackpot end demo time related to the stop of the jackpot symbol won in the non-time shortened game state.
(49) The small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state is longer than the small hit start demo time won in the non-time-reduced game state.
(50) The small hit start demo time won in the time-reduced game state is shorter than the small hit start demo time won in the non-time-reduced game state.
(51) The small hit start demo time won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit start demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(52) The small hit end demo time won in the time-reduced game state is longer than the small hit end demo time won in the non-time-reduced game state.
(53) The small hit end demo time won in the time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(54) The small hit end demo time won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit end demo time won in the non-time shortened game state.
(55) The big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state is not. The time is longer than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the game state. ..
(56) The big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state is not. Time reduction It is shorter than the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the game state. ..
(57) The big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state is not. Time reduction At the same time value as the big hit start demo time (or the small hit start demo period in the small hit) related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit won in the game state. is there.
(58) V during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state The big hit end demonstration time related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26 is the V during the small hit won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is longer than the jackpot end demonstration time of the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26.
(59) V during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state The big hit end demonstration time related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26 is the V during the small hit won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is shorter than the jackpot end demonstration time of the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26.
(60) V during the small hit won in the time-reduced game state The big hit end demonstration time related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26 is the V during the small hit won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is the same time value as the jackpot end demo time of the jackpot related to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening C26.
(61) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is longer than the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state.
(62) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state.
(63) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state. ..
(64) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is longer than the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. is there.
(65) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. is there.
(66) The small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit start demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. Is.
(67) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is longer than the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state.
(68) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state.
(69) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the time shortened game state. ..
(70) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is longer than the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. is there.
(71) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is shorter than the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. is there.
(72) The small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol A won in the non-time shortened game state is the same time value as the small hit end demo time related to the small hit symbol B won in the non-time shortened game state. Is.
The small hit symbol A and the small hit symbol B may be configured as follows.
(A) During the small hit related to the small hit symbol A, it is easy to enter the ball into the V winning opening C26, and during the small hit related to the small hit symbol B, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V winning opening C26.
(B) The opening pattern of the large winning opening is different between the small hit related to the small hit symbol A and the small hit related to the small hit symbol B.
(C) The transition rate to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit executed by entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit related to the small hit symbol A is V during the small hit related to the small hit symbol B. It is higher than the transition rate to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the big hit executed by entering the winning opening C26.
(D) The expected value (or the number of execution rounds) for winning a big hit executed by entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit related to the small hit symbol A is the small hit related to the small hit symbol B. It is larger than the expected value (or the number of execution rounds) of the big hit prize ball that was executed by entering the V winning opening C26.
(E) At the time of winning a small hit, the small hit symbol A is easier to be selected than the small hit symbol B.
It may be configured as follows.

Next, FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 139 in the ninth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3504-9 (9th), that is, in step 3502, after the external signal output control means MG confirms the state of the game machine, step 3504-9 (9th). In 9), the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination tables 1 and 9, and based on the confirmed state of the game machine, plays a game on the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G. A signal indicating the state of the machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

Signal number: 48
Signal type: Outline of big hit system signal: Signal 1 signal that outputs that a special game or a small hit game is being executed, or the game state is in a time-shortening game state (that is, a state advantageous to the player). Configuration: [Output timing] Conditional device operation flag off → Timing 0.504 seconds after on [Output period] Conditional device operation flag On → Timing when the main game time reduction flag is off when off, or Main game time reduction flag on → Outputs the on signal until the timing when the condition device operation flag is off when it is off. Output period overlap: [possibility of duplication] None Remarks: When the condition device operation flag is turned on → off and the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state. However, it can be turned on until all the fluctuations related to the hold on the second main game side existing at the transition timing are completed, that is, it can be output over the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state. In addition, in the above, if a small hit is won by the symbol change related to the last one hold on the second main game side and the big hit triggered by the small hit is executed, the time after the end of the big hit When it shifts to the shortened game state, it continues to be on, while when it shifts to the non-time shortened game state after the jackpot ends, it turns on → off. In addition, as the configuration of the ninth embodiment, after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit won by the symbol change on the second main game side, both the non-time shortening game state and the time shortening game state can be obtained. It may be configured so that it can be transferred, and in such a configuration, a big hit triggered by a small hit is executed in a situation where the time is shortened and the hold on the second main game side remains. After the end of the big hit, the game becomes a non-time shortened game state, and when the big hit triggered by the small hit is won again due to the change of the second main game symbol related to the remaining hold on the second main game side, after the end of the big hit. When the gaming state (where the jackpot end timing is the timing B) is the time-shortening gaming state, the signal of signal number 48 is continuously output at the timing B, but after the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends). If the game state of (the end timing is timing B) is a non-time shortened game state, and there are no holds on the second main game side after the end of the jackpot, the signal of signal number 48 is The output can be configured to end at the timing B. In addition, a big hit triggered by a small hit is executed in a situation where the time is shortened and the hold on the second main game side remains, and after the big hit is completed, the non-time shortened game state is entered, and the second main game side If a small hit is won due to a change in the second main game symbol related to the last remaining hold, and there is no entry into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit, the end of the small hit is terminated. As an opportunity, the output of the signal with signal number 48 ends. Further, a jackpot signal may be output in addition to the signal number 48, and when the jackpot signals A, B, and C are configured, (1) the jackpot signal A is divided into a small hit and a jackpot. (2) The big hit signal B is output during the big hit but not during the small hit, and (3) The big hit signal C is during the small hit won in the non-time reduction game state. Regardless of the winning game state, it may be configured to be output with all jackpots.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the transition mode of the gaming state may have the following configuration.
(1) After the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit won by the first main game symbol and the symbol change on the second main game side, it shifts to both the non-time shortened game state and the time shortened game state. Can,
(2) In the non-time shortened game state, the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the end of the big hit when the jackpot related to the hold on the first main game side is won is A%.
(3) In the time-reduced game state, the small hit related to the hold on the second main game side is won, and the transition rate to the time-reduced game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit is B%.
(4) In the non-time shortened game state, the small hit related to the hold on the second main game side is won, and the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit is C%.
In the case of, it may be configured to be “A <B” and “A <C”, or it may be configured to be “A> B” and “A> C”. That is, the transition rate (A) to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the first hit may be configured to be the lowest, or the transition rate (A) to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the first hit may be the highest. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in addition to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of reservations on the second main game side, "C <50 (%)", in other words, the second main game side in the non-time reduction game state. The small hit may be won by the remaining hold of, and the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit may be designed to be larger than 50%. In such a configuration, the average probability of winning one or more small hits due to the symbol variation related to any of the remaining hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortened game state becomes larger than A. It may be designed as follows.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, when the game shifts to the non-time shortened gaming state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit, after the end of the big hit according to the number of reservations on the second main game side at the end of the big hit. It may be configured so that the production tendency can be different. In addition, when the game shifts to the non-time shortened gaming state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit, it is executed at the end demo time of the big hit according to the number of reservations on the second main game side at the end of the final round of the big hit. It may be configured so that the production tendency can be different. In addition, when the game shifts to the non-time shortened gaming state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit, the effect tendency during the symbol change of the second main game side after the end of the big hit according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. May be configured to be different.

With the above configuration, in the ninth embodiment, when the small hit related to the second main game side is won in the time-shortened game state, it is not after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit. It shifts to the time shortening game state, and it becomes a game property whether or not the small hit on the second main game side can be won again due to the symbol change related to the hold on the second main game side remaining at the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is appropriate to assume that the consecutive villas have not ended if a small hit is won on the hold of the second main game side that remains in the non-time shortened game state, and it is related to the consecutive villas. The signal of signal number 48, which is an external terminal output signal, is also based on the game playability of the ninth embodiment, and the on signal is continued when the hold on the second main game side remains even in the non-time reduction game state. It is configured so that it can be output. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the big hit end demo time and the small hit end demo time are provided, and the small hit end demo time is configured to be longer than the big hit end demo time triggered by the small hit. As a result, it is possible to secure the time for the second main game side to hold the hold during the small hit execution.

(Example 1 of change from the ninth embodiment)
In the ninth embodiment, the end demo time of the small hit is set to be longer than the end demo time of the big hit, but a game in which the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit as in the ninth embodiment. The composition of the end demo time in sex is not limited to that of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the end demo time different from that of the ninth embodiment is referred to as change example 1 from the ninth embodiment, and only the changes from the ninth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 139 in the first modification from the ninth embodiment. First, the change from the ninth embodiment is step 3550 (9th variation 1). That is, in step 1648-2 (9th), the special game execution means MP33 turns on the special game end demo flag, and then in step 3550 (9th variation 1), the special game execution means MP33 ends the jackpot, which will be described later. The demo time determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1648-7 (9th).

Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the jackpot end demo time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3550 (9th variation 1) in FIG. 147 in the first modification from the ninth embodiment. First, in step 3552, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the jackpot being executed is a jackpot that was won in the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 3552 (yes also in the case of a big hit triggered by a small hit symbol stopped in the non-time shortened game state), in step 3554, the special game execution means MP33 uses the special game end demo time timer MD34t. (Decrement timer) is set to a predetermined value A (a value that is longer than the predetermined value B described later, which is 6 seconds in this example) and started, and the next process {step 1648-7 (9th). Process}. On the other hand, if No in step 3552, in step 3556, the special game execution means MP33 has a predetermined value B (a value shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined value A) in the special game end demo time timer MD34t (decrement timer). , In this example, 4 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1648-7 (9th)}.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (9th) in FIG. 139 in the first modification from the ninth embodiment. The change from the ninth embodiment is step 3250 (9th variation 1). That is, in step 1841-5, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit end demo flag, and then in step 3250 (9th variation 1), the small hit end demo time determination process described later is executed, and the step Move to 1841-7.

Next, FIG. 150 is a flowchart of the small hit end demo time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3250 (9th variation 1) in FIG. 149 in the modification 1 from the 9th embodiment. First, in step 3252, the small hit game control means MP40 determines whether or not the small hit being executed is a small hit won in the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the small hit game control means MP40 sets a predetermined value C (a predetermined value to be described later) to the small hit end demo time timer KSt (a timer that is a decrement timer and measures the small hit end demo time). It is longer than the value D, and in this example, 10 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1841-7). On the other hand, if No in step 3252, in step 3256, the small hit game control means MP40 tells the small hit end demo time timer KSt (decrement timer) a predetermined value D (shorter than the predetermined value C described above, and is shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined value C. In the example, 2 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1841-7). As described above, in the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment, the predetermined value A and the predetermined value B are set as the time values that can be determined as the big hit end demo time, and the time value that can be determined as the small hit end demo time. It has a predetermined value C and a predetermined value D (the time value at which the big hit end demo time and the small hit end demo time can be determined may be changed, or the types of time values may be increased). Further, since the predetermined value A = 6 seconds, the predetermined value B = 4 seconds, the predetermined value C = 10 seconds, and the predetermined value D = 2 seconds, in the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment, the non-time is shortened. The length of the small hit end demo time (predetermined value C) related to the small hit won in the game state and the length of the small hit end demo time related to the small hit won in the time shortened game state (predetermined value D). And the length of the big hit end demo time (predetermined value A) related to the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state, and the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the time shortened game state The length of the jackpot end demo time (predetermined value B) is different from each other. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the predetermined value A, the predetermined value B, the predetermined value C, and the predetermined value D may be configured to have the same value. It may be configured so that the predetermined value C and the predetermined value D are different from each other. When the length of the small hit end demo time related to the small hit is set to be relatively longer than the length of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit, the same as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, it is possible to secure the time for causing the hold on the second main game side during the small hit execution. Further, when the length of the small hit end demo time related to the small hit is set to be relatively shorter than the length of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit, the same as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, the rate of increase of the game balls in the consecutive villas can be increased. It should be noted that the time value of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit can be different depending on the game state after the big hit ends (whether the non-time shortened game state or the time shortened game state). You may.

With the above configuration, in the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment, whether or not the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the time-shortened game state, and whether or not the small hit end demo time is the big hit. By configuring the time value of the end demo time to be different depending on whether it is the end demo time, it is possible to execute an effect according to the state of the game or change the tempo of the game.

(Example 2 of change from the ninth embodiment)
In the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment, a plurality of types of time values can be determined as the end demo time in the game playability in which the big hit is executed with the small hit as an opportunity. The configuration is not limited to that of modification 1 from the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the big hit and the small hit different from the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment is referred to as the change example 2 from the ninth embodiment, and the changes from the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment are described in detail below. Describe.

Next, FIG. 151 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (9th) in FIG. 139 in the second modification from the ninth embodiment. First, the changes from the first modification from the ninth embodiment are step 1842-1 (9th variation 2), step 3450 (9th variation 2), step 1842-2 (9th variation 2), and step. It is 1842-3 (9th variation 2). That is, in step 1840-4, after the small hit game control means MP40 sets the opening pattern of the round, in step 1842-1 (9th variation 2), the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit start demo flag. Turn on (the flag that turns on at the small hit start demo time). Next, in step 3450 (9th variation 2), the small hit game control means MP40 executes the small hit start demo time determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1842-2 (9th variation 2). Even if the small hit game control means MP40 determines in step 1840-8 that the small hit execution flag is not on, the process proceeds to step 1842-2 (9th variation 2). Next, in step 1842-2 (9th variation 2), the small hit game control means MP40 has a timer value of the small hit start demo time timer KKt (a decrement timer, which measures the small hit start demo time). It is determined whether or not it is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1842-2 (9th variation 2), in step 1842-3 (9th variation 2), the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit start demo flag and proceeds to step 1840-5. .. As described above, in the second modification from the ninth embodiment, the small hit end demo time is not provided, while the small hit start demo time is newly provided.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart of the small hit start demo time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (9th variation 2) in FIG. 151 in the second modification from the ninth embodiment. First, in step 3452, the small hit game control means MP40 determines whether or not the small hit that is started to be executed is a small hit that was won in the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 3452, in step 3454, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit start demo time timer CKt (decrement timer) to a predetermined value E (a longer time than the predetermined value F described later, and in this example, it is longer than the predetermined value F described later. 10 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1842-2 (9th variation 2)}. On the other hand, if No in step 3452, in step 3456, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit start demo time timer CKt (decrement timer) to a predetermined value F (shorter than the predetermined value E described above, and is shorter than the predetermined value E described above. In the example, 2 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1842-2 (9th variation 2)}. As described above, in the second modification from the ninth embodiment, the predetermined value A and the predetermined value B are set as the time values that can be determined as the big hit end demo time, and the time value that can be determined as the small hit start demo time. It has a predetermined value E and a predetermined value F (the time value at which the big hit end demo time and the small hit start demo time can be determined may be changed, or the types of time values may be increased). Further, since the predetermined value A = 6 seconds, the predetermined value B = 4 seconds, the predetermined value E = 10 seconds, and the predetermined value F = 2 seconds, the non-time is shortened in the change example 2 from the ninth embodiment. The length of the small hit start demo time (predetermined value E) related to the small hit won in the game state and the length of the small hit start demo time related to the small hit won in the time shortened game state (predetermined value F). And the length of the big hit end demo time (predetermined value A) related to the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state, and the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the time shortened game state The length of the jackpot end demo time (predetermined value B) is different from each other. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the predetermined value A, the predetermined value B, the predetermined value E, and the predetermined value F may be configured to have the same value. For example, the predetermined value A and the predetermined value B may be set to the same value. It may be configured so that the predetermined value E and the predetermined value F are different from each other. .. When the length of the small hit start demo time related to the small hit is set to be relatively longer than the length of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit, the same as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, it is possible to secure the time for causing the hold on the second main game side during the small hit execution. Further, when the length of the small hit start demo time related to the small hit is set to be relatively shorter than the length of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit, the same as in the ninth embodiment. In addition, the rate of increase of the game balls in the consecutive villas can be increased. It should be noted that the time value of the big hit end demo time related to the big hit triggered by the small hit can be different depending on the game state after the big hit ends (whether the non-time shortened game state or the time shortened game state). You may. Further, the configuration of the change example 1 from the ninth embodiment and the configuration of the change example 2 from the ninth embodiment are combined so as to have a small hit start demo time and a small hit end demo time during the small hit. Then, the predetermined value A, the predetermined value B, the predetermined value C, the predetermined value D, the predetermined value E, and the predetermined value F may be different from each other, or any of them may be the same value.

With the above configuration, in the second modification from the ninth embodiment, whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the time-shortened gaming state, and whether it is the small hit start demo time or the big hit. By configuring the time value of the start demo time or the end demo time to be different depending on whether it is the end demo time, it is possible to execute an effect according to the state of the game or change the tempo of the game. Can be done.

(Example 3 of change from the ninth embodiment)
In the second embodiment of the modification from the ninth embodiment to the ninth embodiment, the configuration in which the jackpot can be executed triggered by the small hit is described in detail, but various production modes during the jackpot in such a configuration can be considered. Therefore, an example of the effect to be executed at the jackpot end demo time will be referred to as change example 3 from the ninth embodiment, and only the changes from the ninth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 153 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47 in the third modification from the ninth embodiment. The changes from the ninth embodiment are step 3650 (9th change 3), step 5640-1 (9th change 3), step 5640-2 (9th change 3), and step 5640-3 (9th change 3). 3) That is, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds, the number of winnings, and the number of acquired game balls, and then in step 3650 (9th variation 3), the background. The effect display control means SM23 executes the effect display control process during the big hit, which will be described later. Next, in step 5640-1 (9th variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5640-1 (9th variation 3), in step 5640-2 (9th variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot end demo display, and steps 5640-3. Move to (9th change 3). On the other hand, even if No in step 5640-1 (9th variation 3), the process proceeds to step 5640-3 (9th variation 3). Next, in step 5640-3 (9th variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the end demo end command has been received from the main control board M side. In step 5640-3 (9th variation 3), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 5630, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700).

Next, FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the big hit middle effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (9th variation 3) in FIG. 153 in the modification 3 from the 9th embodiment. First, in step 3652, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game triggered by a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the small hit that triggered the special game being executed is the small hit on the first main game side. If Yes in step 3654, the process proceeds to step 3656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3654, that is, when the small hit on the second main game side triggers the special game being executed, in step 3658, the background effect display control means SM23 is the special during execution. It is determined whether or not the small hit that triggered the game is a small hit on the side of the second main game that was won in the time-reduced game state. In the case of Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the background effect display control means SM23 remains as an effect during the special game, as a challenge effect (because it shifts to the non-time reduction game state after the end of the special game, it remains at the end of the special game. Set a command to execute (a production that encourages whether or not a small hit can be won again by holding the second main game side), and the process proceeds to step 3662. If No in step 3658, the process proceeds to step 3656. Next, in step 3656, the background effect display control means SM23 wins a small hit again after the end of the special game because the background effect display control means SM23 produces a high-profit blessing effect (to shift to the time-shortening game state after the end of the special game). A command for executing the effect of notifying that it is easy is set, and the process proceeds to step 3662. Even if No in step 3652, the process proceeds to step 3662.

Next, in step 3662, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game triggered by the jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3662, in step 3664, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game on the first main game side. If Yes in step 3664, the process proceeds to step 3666. On the other hand, if No in step 3664, that is, if the special game being executed is a special game on the second main game side, in step 3668, the background effect display control means SM23 is a time-saving game for the special game being executed. It is determined whether or not the special game is won in the state. In the case of Yes in step 3668, in step 3670, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to execute the challenge effect as the effect during the special game, and the next process {step 5640-1 (9th variation 3) Move to process}. If No in step 3668, the process proceeds to step 3666. Next, in step 3666, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to execute a high profit blessing effect as an effect during the special game, and next process {process of step 5640-1 (9th variation 3). }. On the other hand, even if No in step 3662, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5640-1 (9th variation 3)}. The high-profit blessing effect and the challenge effect may be performed at any time (period) of the jackpot start demo time, the jackpot end demo time, or the period during which the round is being executed, and may be executed at a plurality of times (period). It may be executed over a period of time).

Next, FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the small hit-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5850 (9th variation 3) in FIG. 47 in the modification 3 from the 9th embodiment. Although not shown in FIG. 47, in the third modification from the ninth embodiment, the process is executed after the process of step 5600 in FIG. 47 is executed. Further, since the processing is the same as the special game-related display control processing except for the effect executed during the big hit (small hit) in FIG. 153, the command transmission timing on the main control board M side is not shown. However, as in the case of executing the special game, the small hit start display instruction command is set at the start of the small hit, the small hit end display instruction command is set at the start timing of the small hit end demo time, and the small hit end demo end command is set. Will be set at the timing when the small hit end demo ends. First, in step 5852, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small hit display in-progress flag (the flag that is turned on during the execution of the small hit) is off. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a small hit start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5854, in step 5862 and step 5864, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the small hit display displaying flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and displays the effect. A command related to the small hit start display is set on the device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5866. Even if No in step 5852, the process proceeds to step 5866.

Next, in step 5866, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings and the number of acquired game balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. .. Next, in step 5868, the background effect display control means SM23 produces a big hit fanning effect as an effect during the execution of the small hit (a production that encourages whether or not the right to execute the big hit can be obtained by winning the V winning opening). Set the command to execute. It should be noted that the effect executed during the execution of the small hit has the same effect mode (effect tendency) regardless of the stopped small hit symbol. Next, in step 5870, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hit end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5870, in step 5782, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the small hit end demo display, and proceeds to step 5874. On the other hand, even if No in step 5870, the process proceeds to step 5874. Next, in step 5874, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hit end demo end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5874, in step 5876, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the small hit display in-progress flag and shifts to the next process (process in step 5700). Even if No in step 5854 or 5874, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5700). In addition, the big hit fanning effect may be executed at any time (period) of the small hit start demo time, the small hit end demo time, or the period during the round execution, and at a plurality of times (periods). It may be executed over.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the third modification from the ninth embodiment has a high-profit blessing effect and a challenge effect as the effects to be executed during the big hit, and the running big hit is Depending on whether it is a big hit related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side or a big hit related to the small hit symbol on the second main game side, it depends on whether the high profit blessing effect or the challenge effect is executed. It was configured to be possible. On the other hand, as for the effect to be executed during the small hit, only the big hit fan effect is executed. That is, the effect during the big hit may differ depending on the small hit symbol triggered by the big hit, while the effect during the small hit is configured so that the same effect is executed regardless of the small hit symbol, depending on the situation of the game. It can be an appropriate production mode that is combined.

In the third modification from the ninth embodiment, the difference between the small hit symbol on the first main game side and the small hit symbol on the second main game side has been described in detail, but the small hit symbol on the first main game side has been described in detail. It is not limited to whether it is a hit symbol or a small hit symbol on the second main game side, and if the small hit symbol is different, a small hit as in the change example 3 from the ninth embodiment is triggered. It is also possible to apply a configuration that makes the effect during the big hit different. Here, when the small hit symbols are different, for example, (1) the ease of entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit is different, and (2) the opening pattern of the large winning opening during the small hit is different. Different, (3) Time reduction after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit The transition rate to the gaming state is different, (4) Expected value of winning the prize ball of the big hit triggered by the small hit (or the number of execution rounds) ) Are different, and (5) the ratio selected as the stop symbol when a small hit is won may be different. Further, there may be a plurality of types of small hit symbols on the first main game side, or there may be a plurality of types of small hit symbols on the second main game side. It may be configured so that the profit of the big hit or the ease of entering the V winning opening C26 during the small hit is different. The above configuration may be applied to any embodiment in which a big hit is executed by entering the V winning opening during a small hit, which is exemplified in this example. It should be noted that, due to the difference in the small hit symbol, the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit is different, which means that the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state It may be configured so that the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the end is different, or the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the time shortened game state is different. It may be configured so that the transition rate to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit is different regardless of the gaming state in which the small hit is won.

In this example, when the small hit symbol A and the small hit symbol B different from the small hit symbol A are provided, the small hit start demo time, the round execution period related to the small hit, and the small hit end demo time are provided. In the above, even if the effect tendency executed by the small hit related to the small hit symbol A and the small hit related to the small hit symbol B is the same, the big hit is triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol A. The jackpot A and the jackpot B, which is a jackpot triggered by the jackpot symbol B, are executed during the round execution period (multiple round execution periods) during the jackpot execution and / or the jackpot end demo time. The production tendency may be configured to be different. In such a configuration, the period during which the effect tendencies executed by the jackpot A and the jackpot B are different is (1) the effect tendency after the timing of entering the V winning opening during the small hit, (2). It may be configured so that the effect tendency is different from the timing in the middle of the jackpot round execution period (for example, the start time of the fourth round) and (3) the start timing of the jackpot end demo time.

Further, in this example, when the small hit symbol A and the small hit symbol B different from the small hit symbol A are provided, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) When the effect executed during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol A and the effect executed during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol B are the same, during the small hit related to the small hit symbol A. The effect to be executed and the effect to be executed during the small hit related to the small hit symbol B may be the same. In such a configuration, the effect during the big hit triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol A and the effect during the big hit triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol B may be different.
(2) When the effect executed during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol A and the effect executed during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol B are the same, during the small hit related to the small hit symbol A. The effect to be executed and the effect to be executed during the small hit related to the small hit symbol B may be different. In such a configuration, the effect during the big hit triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol A and the effect during the big hit triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol B may be different.

(10th Embodiment)
In this example, various error modes have been described in detail, but the error modes applicable to this example are not limited to those described above. Therefore, an applicable configuration different from the above-described error mode is set as the tenth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 155 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, a left general winning opening P10-1 and a right general winning opening P10-2 are provided as entry openings for which prize balls are paid out by entering the ball, and left-handed. When (launching a game ball with a relatively weak firing strength) is executed, it is easy (and possible) to enter the left general winning opening P10-1, and right-handed (relatively strong firing strength). It is configured so that it is easy (possible) to enter the right general winning opening P10-2 when the game ball is fired at. Further, the right-handed game ball is configured so as to easily flow down in the vicinity of the second main game start opening B10, and the right general winning opening P10-2 is provided downstream of the second main game start opening B10. .. In addition, during the special game, the player will perform a right-handed strike, and during the special game, in addition to the prize ball based on the entry into the large winning opening, the entry into the right general winning opening P10-2. Prize balls based on the balls will be paid out.

Next, FIG. 157 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are step 5550 (10th), step 3600 (10th), step 5650 (10th), step 3700 (10th), step 3750 (10th), and step 3800 (10th). The tenth). That is, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process, and then in step 5550 (10th), the main control board M executes the first main game short-term entry rate determination process, which will be described later. .. Next, in step 3600 (10th), the main control board M executes the first main game long-term ball entry rate determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 5650 (10th), the main control board M executes the left general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3700 (10th), the main control board M executes the left general winning opening long-term winning rate determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3750 (10th), the main control board M executes the right general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3800 (10th), the main control board M executes the right general winning opening long-term ball entry rate determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the process of step 1900.

Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are step 2211-1 (10th) and step 2211-2 (10th). That is, in step 2211, after the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the first main game start opening ball entry counter MJ10c-A, step 2211- In 1 (10th), the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds 1 to the counter value of the first main game short-term entry rate counter N10c. Next, in step 2211-2 (10th), the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the first main game long-term entry rate counter N20c. The process proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the left (right) general winning opening ball detection process according to the subroutines of steps 2400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. Since the processes related to the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 are the same, they will be described in detail together. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2411-1 (10th) and step 2411-2 (10th). That is, in step 2410, after the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on by the general winning opening detection means MJP, in step 2411-1 (10th), the general winning opening entry determining means MJP is left ( Right) Add (increment) 1 to the counter value of the general winning opening short-term ball entry rate counter N30c. Next, in step 2411-2 (10th), the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the left (right) general winning opening long-term entry rate counter N40c, and steps 2420. Move to.

Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the first main game short-term ball entry rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 5550 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 5552, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A is set to the first main game short-term confirmation flag (the first main game start port A10 is not excessively entered in a short period of time. It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on at the timing of starting the monitoring) is off. In the case of Yes in step 5552, in step 5554, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game short-term confirmation flag. Next, in step 5556, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A clears the counter value of the first main game short-term entry rate counter N10c to zero. Next, in step 5558, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the first main game short-term confirmation timer K10t, and starts in step 5560. Move to the processing of. Even if No in step 5552, the process proceeds to step 5560. Next, in step 5560, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the counter value of the first main game short-term entry rate counter N10c is smaller than the error value (for example, seven). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 5560, in step 5562, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the timer value of the first main game short-term confirmation timer K10t is 0. If Yes in step 5562, the process proceeds to step 5566. On the other hand, if No in step 5560, in step 5564, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is the first main game short-term excess winning command (command to the sub-control board S side, and the first A command relating to the occurrence of excessive ball entry in a short period of time is set in the main game start port A10, and the process proceeds to step 5566. Next, in step 5566, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game short-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3600 (10th)}. Further, even if No in step 5562, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3600 (10th)}.

Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the first main game long-term ball entry rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 3600 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3602, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is set to the first main game long-term confirmation flag (the first main game start opening A10 does not have excessive ball entry for a long period of time. It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on at the timing of starting the monitoring) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3602, in step 3604, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game long-term confirmation flag. Next, in step 3606, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A clears the counter value of the first main game long-term entry rate counter N20c to zero. Next, in step 3608, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 30 seconds) in the first main game long-term confirmation timer K11t, and processes in step 3610. Move to. Even if No in step 3602, the process proceeds to step 3610. Next, in step 3610, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the counter value of the first main game long-term entry rate counter N20c is smaller than the error value (for example, 20). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 3610, in step 3612, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the timer value of the first main game long-term confirmation timer K11t is 0. If Yes in step 3612, the process proceeds to step 3616. On the other hand, if No in step 3610, in step 3614, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is the first main game long-term excessive winning command (command to the sub-control board S side, and the first A command relating to the occurrence of excessive ball entry for a long period of time is set in the main game start port A10, and the process proceeds to step 3616. Next, in step 3616, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game long-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5650 (10th)}. Further, even if No in step 3612, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5650 (10th)}.

Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the left general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 5650 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 5652, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts monitoring whether the left general winning opening P10-1 has excessive ball entry in a short period of time. Determines whether or not the flag that is turned on in) is off. In the case of Yes in step 5652, in step 5654, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns on the left general short-term confirmation flag. Next, in step 5656, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP clears the counter value of the left general winning opening short-term ball entry rate counter N31c to zero. Next, in step 5658, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the left general short-term confirmation timer K31t, and proceeds to the process of step 5660. Even if No in step 5652, the process proceeds to step 5660. Next, in step 5660, the general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N31c determines whether or not the counter value of the left general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N31c is smaller than the error value (for example, 7). In the case of Yes in step 5660, in step 5662, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the timer value of the left general short-term confirmation timer K31t is 0. If Yes in step 5662, the process proceeds to step 5666. On the other hand, if No in step 5660, in step 5664, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP is a left general short-term excess winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a short-term to the left general winning opening P10-1). A command relating to the occurrence of excessive ball entry) is set in between, and the process proceeds to step 5666. Next, in step 5666, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns off the left general short-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3700 (10th)}. Further, even if No in step 5662, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3700 (10th)}.

Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the left general winning opening long-term winning rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 3700 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3702, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts monitoring whether or not excessive ball entry has occurred in the left general winning opening P10-1 for a long period of time. Determines whether or not the flag that is turned on in) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns on the left general long-term confirmation flag. Next, in step 3706, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP clears the counter value of the left general winning opening long-term ball entry rate counter N41c to zero. Next, in step 3708, the general winning opening ball entry determination means starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) in the left general long-term confirmation timer K41t, and proceeds to the process of step 3710. Even if No in step 3702, the process proceeds to step 3710. Next, in step 3710, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the counter value of the left general winning opening long-term entry rate counter N41c is smaller than the error value (for example, 20). In the case of Yes in step 3710, in step 3712, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the timer value of the left general long-term confirmation timer K41t is 0. If Yes in step 3712, the process proceeds to step 3716. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3710, in step 3714, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP is a left general long-term excessive winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side and is long on the left general winning opening P10-1). A command relating to the occurrence of excessive ball entry during the period) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3716. Next, in step 3716, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns off the left general long-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3750 (10th)}. Further, even if No in step 3712, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3750 (10th)}.

Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the right general winning opening short-term ball entry rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 3750 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3752, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts monitoring whether the right general winning opening P10-2 has excessive ball entry in a short period of time. Determines whether or not the flag that is turned on in) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3752, in step 3754, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns on the right general short-term confirmation flag. Next, in step 3756, the general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N32c clears the counter value of the general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N32c to zero. Next, in step 3758, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the right general short-term confirmation timer K32t, and proceeds to the process of step 3760. Even if No in step 3752, the process proceeds to step 3760. Next, in step 3760, the general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N32c determines whether or not the counter value of the right general winning opening short-term entry rate counter N32c is smaller than the error value (for example, 7). In the case of Yes in step 3760, in step 3762, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the timer value of the right general short-term confirmation timer K32t is 0. If Yes in step 3762, the process proceeds to step 3766. On the other hand, if No in step 3760, in step 3764, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP is a right general short-term excess winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a short-term to the right general winning opening P10-2). A command related to the fact that an excessive number of balls have been inserted is set in the meantime, and the process proceeds to step 3766. Next, in step 3766, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns off the right general short-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3800 (10th)}. Further, even if No in step 3762, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3800 (10th)}.

Next, FIG. 165 is a flowchart of the right general winning opening long-term winning rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 3800 (10th) in FIG. 157 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3802, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the right general long-term confirmation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP is set to the right general long-term confirmation flag (whether excessive ball entry has occurred in the right general winning opening P10-2 for a long period of time. Turn on the flag that turns on when monitoring starts). Next, in step 3806, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP clears the counter value of the right general winning opening long-term ball entry rate counter N42c to zero. Next, in step 3808, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds) in the right general long-term confirmation timer K42t, and proceeds to the process of step 3810. Even if No in step 3802, the process proceeds to step 3810. Next, in step 3810, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the counter value of the right general winning opening long-term entry rate counter N42c is smaller than the error value (for example, 20). In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP determines whether or not the timer value of the right general long-term confirmation timer K42t is 0. If Yes in step 3812, the process proceeds to step 3816. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3810, in step 3814, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP is a right general long-term excessive winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side and is long on the right general winning opening P10-2). A command relating to the occurrence of excessive ball entry during the period) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3816. Next, in step 3816, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns off the right general long-term confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Further, even if No in step 3712, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, short-term over-entry and long-term over-entry at the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, and the right general winning opening P10-2. It is configured so that the occurrence of and can be determined, and a short-term judgment period (sometimes referred to as a short-term judgment period) and / or a long-term judgment period (sometimes referred to as a long-term judgment period) for each entry port. Is configured to be different from. In addition, the number of balls entered (sometimes referred to as the number of short-term excessive balls) and / or the number of long-term excessive balls determined to have occurred at each entry port. It is configured so that the number of balls (sometimes referred to as the number of balls entered for a long period of time) can be different. The short-term judgment period for the first main game start port A10 is 0.5 seconds, the number of short-term balls entered is 7, and the long-term judgment period for the first main game start port A10 is 30 seconds, which is long. The number of balls entered during the period is 20, the number of short-term balls related to the left general winning opening P10-1 is 7, and the short-term judgment period related to the left general winning opening P10-1 is 0.5 seconds. The number of balls is 20, the long-term judgment period for the left general winning opening P10-1 is 80 seconds, the long-term number of balls entered is 20, and the short-term judgment period for the right general winning opening P10-2 is 0. It is .5 seconds and the number of long-term balls is 7, and the long-term judgment period related to the right general winning opening P10-2 is 15 seconds and the number of long-term balls is 20. That is, a short-term judgment period for determining 7 balls, which is the short-term number of balls entered at the first main game starting port A10, and a short-term determination period for determining 7 balls, which is the short-term number of balls entered at the left general winning opening P10-1. Rather than the difference (0 in this example), the long-term judgment period for determining 20 balls, which is the long-term number of balls entered at the first main game starting port A10, and the long-term number of balls entered at the left general winning opening P10-1. The difference (50 in this example) from the long-term determination period for determining a certain 20 balls is configured to be larger. In addition, a short-term judgment period for determining 7 balls, which is the short-term number of balls entered at the first main game starting port A10, and a short-term determination period for determining 7 balls, which is the short-term number of balls entered at the right general winning opening P10-2. Rather than the difference (0 in this example), the long-term judgment period for determining 20 balls, which is the long-term number of balls entered at the first main game starting port A10, and the long-term number of balls entered at the right general winning opening P10-2. The difference from the long-term determination period for determining a certain 20 balls (15 in this example) is configured to be larger.

With the above configuration, it is possible to monitor the entry status of the first main game start opening and the general winning opening (left general winning opening, right general winning opening), and it is possible to enter the ball due to fraudulent activity. In addition, it will be possible to monitor illegal adjustments of game nails, etc. in the game machine. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155, a general winning opening P10-2 is provided downstream of the second main game starting opening. With this configuration, by hitting right in the time-saving game state or the special game state, the game ball that did not enter the second main game start opening enters the general winning opening P10-2. Therefore, more balls can be obtained by the difference of the game balls paid out by the incoming ball than the balls obtained by the normal game. In addition, by configuring the first main game start opening, the left general winning opening, and the right general winning opening so that short-term over-entry and long-term over-entry can be monitored, respectively, various forms of fraud are illegal. It will be possible to notify the error corresponding to the excessive ball entry. Further, in the tenth embodiment, a short-term over-entry at the first main game start opening, a long-term over-entry at the first main game start opening, a short-term over-entry at the left general winning opening, and a left It is configured to be able to determine six abnormalities: long-term over-entry in the general winning opening, short-term over-entry in the right general winning opening, and long-term over-entry in the right general winning opening. By setting the period for judging an abnormality and the number of balls to be judged as abnormal for each abnormality (there are the same ones with different numerical values), the ball can be easily entered at each entrance. Appropriate abnormality detection can be executed.

In the tenth embodiment, the time values of the long-term determination period and / or the short-term determination period may be different depending on the game state. For example, the right general winning opening P10-2 may be configured to have a non-time reduction game. The time value of the long-term judgment period and / or the short-term judgment period may be different between the state (including during the execution of the jackpot) and the time-reduced gaming state. For example, the right general winning opening P10-2 may be configured. , The time value of the long-term determination period and / or the short-term determination period in the time-reduced gaming state is relative to the time value of the long-term determination period and / or the short-term determination period in the non-time-reduced gaming state (including during the execution of the jackpot). It may be configured to take a long time. With such a configuration, the game ball hit right in the time-reduced game state as in the tenth embodiment frequently enters the second main game start port B10, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second main game start port B10 than in the non-time-reduced game state. However, even when the time-saving game state is configured so that it is more difficult to enter the right general winning opening P10-2, it is possible to execute an appropriate determination of excess ball entry. In the non-time shortened game state, since the game is mainly left-handed, the right general winning opening P10-2 has a long-term judgment period and / or a short-term judgment period in the time-shortened game state. The time value may be configured to be relatively shorter than the time value of the long-term determination period and / or the short-term determination period in the non-time shortened gaming state (including during the execution of the jackpot). Further, it may be configured so that the determination of excessive ball entry is not executed (the long-term determination period and / or the short-term determination period is not provided) in either the time-reduced gaming state or the non-time-reduced gaming state. Further, the number of long-term balls and / or the number of short-term balls may be different depending on the game state. For example, the right general winning opening P10-2 may be configured to be in a non-time shortened game state (during a big hit). (Including), the number of long-term balls and / or the number of short-term balls may differ in the time-reduced game state (for example, the number of long-term balls in the time-reduced game state for the right general winning opening P10-2). And / or the number of short-term balls may be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of long-term balls and / or the number of short-term balls in the non-time-reduced gaming state (including during the execution of the jackpot). Good. Further, in the tenth embodiment, (1) when the entry ports for determining excessive entry are different, the time value of the long-term determination period is common (for example, 60 seconds), but the number of long-term entry balls. (For example, 40 for the first main game start opening A10, 15 for the left general winning opening P10-1, 80 for the right general winning opening P10-2), (2) Excessive ball entry during the short-term judgment period. The determination of is also configured in the same manner as the determination of excess ball entry in the long-term determination period, that is, the short-term determination period is determined by the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, and the right general winning opening P10-2. The time value and / or the number of short-term balls entered can be different (for example, even if the time value of the short-term judgment period is the same, the number of short-term balls is different, even if the number of short-term balls is the same. The time values in the short-term judgment period may be different, and in that case, the relationship between the number of balls to be judged as excessive balls per unit time is the same as the judgment of excess balls in the long-term judgment period. It may be configured as such.

In the tenth embodiment, as a measurement mode of the long-term judgment period or the short-term judgment period, when the judgment period (long-term judgment period, short-term judgment period) has elapsed and no excessive ball entry has occurred, the ball is again entered. It was configured to reset the long-term judgment period or the short-term judgment period and start the measurement, but it is not limited to this, and each entry port (first main game start opening A10, left general winning opening P10-1, right). Every time a ball is entered into the general winning opening P10-2), a timer corresponding to each entry opening is started (when the long-term judgment period or the short-term judgment period has not passed since the timer started, a new entry opening is newly entered. When the ball enters the ball, a timer different from the timer being measured is started further), and the timer value becomes 0 (the long-term judgment period or the short-term judgment period has elapsed since the timer measurement was started. Whether or not excessive ball entry has occurred at the timing (for each winning) is determined for each timer, that is, excessive ball entry occurs during the long-term judgment period or short-term judgment period measured from any ball entry. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is not. Further, even in such a configuration, as in the tenth embodiment, the determination (monitoring) of excessive ball entry between the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 is separately executed. Alternatively, the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 may be combined to determine the excess ball entry for the general winning opening, the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2. It may be configured to add up the game balls that have been entered into and to execute the determination of excessive entry. In addition, during the short-term judgment period, the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 are separately determined for excessive ball entry, while for the long-term judgment, the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right are executed separately. It may be configured to add up and execute the judgment of the excess ball with the general winning opening P10-2, or during the long-term judgment period, the excess of the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 may be executed. While the determination of the entry ball is executed separately, the determination of the excess entry of the left general winning opening P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2 may be combined and executed for the short-term determination. ..

In the tenth embodiment, in the process on the main control board M side, is the number of balls entered related to the excess balls counted, the timer of the long-term judgment period or the short-term judgment period timed, and whether the excess balls are generated? It is configured to execute the determination process of whether or not, but the process is not limited to this, and the count of the number of incoming balls related to the excessive entry, the timer of the long-term determination period or the short-term determination period is performed in the process on the sub-control board S side. Timekeeping, execute the determination process of whether or not excessive entry has occurred (both the excess entry related to the long-term determination period and the excess entry related to the short-term determination period are executed on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the capacity required for excessive ball entry on the main control board M side can be reduced.

(Example 1 of change from the 10th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, the mode of the error relating to the excessive ball entry into various entrances has been described in detail, but the mode of the error applicable to this example is not limited to the configuration of the tenth embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the error mode of the tenth embodiment will be referred to as a modification 1 from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment will be described in detail below. In the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the out-port entry ball detection device C80s capable of measuring the game ball that has entered the out-port D80 is provided.

First, FIG. 166 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the change from the tenth embodiment is step 1850 (tenth variation 1). That is, in step 1600, after the main control board M executes the special game control process, in step 3850 (10th variation 1), the main control board M executes the ball entry rate determination process described later, and step 1900. Move to the processing of.

Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are step 2211-3 (10th variation 1) and step 2230-1 (10th variation 1). That is, in step 2211, after the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the first main game start opening ball entry counter MJ10c-A, step 2211- In 3 (10th variation 1), the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the first main game start opening ball entry rate counter NT10c, and in step 2216. Transition. Further, in step 2230, after the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, in step 2230-1 (10th variation 1), the second The main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the second main game start opening ball entry rate counter NT20c, and proceeds to step 2240.

Next, FIG. 168 shows the left (right) general winning opening ball detection according to the subroutines of steps 2400 (1), (2) and (10th) in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart of processing. The change from the tenth embodiment is step 2411-3 (tenth variation 1). That is, in step 2410, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJP turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag, and then in step 2411-3 (10th variation 1), the general winning opening entry ball determination means MJP Left (right) 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the general winning opening ball entry rate counter NT30c, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The change from the tenth embodiment is step 2609 (tenth variation 1). That is, in step 2608, the out-port entry / exit determination means MJ11-C80 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the entry-in number counter MJ10c, and then in step 2609 (10th variation 1), the out-port entry / exit determination is made. The means MJ11-C80 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the out-port entry rate counter NO10c, and proceeds to step 2620.

Next, FIG. 170 is a flowchart of the ball entry rate determination process according to the subroutine of step 3850 (10th variation 1) in FIG. 166 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3852, the ball entry determination means MJ10 has a counter value of the out-port entry rate counter NO10c, a counter value of the first main game start port entry rate counter NT10c, and a second main game start port entry rate counter NT20c. The total number of balls entered is calculated by adding all the counter values of the counter value of (right) and the counter values of the left (right) general winning opening ball entry rate counter NT30c. Next, in step 3854, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the calculated total number of balls entered has reached a predetermined value (for example, 100). In the case of Yes in step 3854, in step 3856, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the counter value of the first main game start port entry rate counter NT10c is an error value (for example, 33) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3856, in step 3858, the entry determination means MJ10 receives a first main game excess winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and excessive entry to the first main game start port A10). A command related to the fact that it has occurred) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3860. Even if No in step 3856, the process proceeds to step 3860.

Next, in step 3860, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the counter value of the left general winning opening ball entry rate counter NT31c is an error value (for example, 27) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3860, in step 3862, the entry determination means MJ10 has a left general over-winning command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an over-entry to the left general winning opening P10-1 has occurred. The command related to this is set, and the process proceeds to step 3864. On the other hand, even if No in step 3860, the process proceeds to step 3864.

Next, in step 3864, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the counter value of the right general winning opening ball entry rate counter NT32c is an error value (for example, 55) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3864, in step 3866, the entry determination means MJ10 has a right general over-winning command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and an over-entry to the right general winning opening P10-2 has occurred. The command related to this is set, and the process proceeds to step 3868. On the other hand, even if No in step 3864, the process proceeds to step 3868. Next, in step 3868, the ball entry determination means MJ10 has a counter value of the out-port entry rate counter NO10c, a counter value of the first main game start port entry rate counter NT10c, and a second main game start port entry rate counter. The counter value of the NT20c and the counter value of the left (right) general winning opening ball rate counter NT30c are all cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Further, even if No in step 3854, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

With the above configuration, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the out-port entry ball detection device C80s capable of detecting the entry into the out-port is provided, the out-port D80, and the first main game start. A buffer is assigned to each of the opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the left general winning opening P10-1, and the right general winning opening P10-2 so that the number of balls entered can be measured. Every time the total number of balls entered into the entry opening reaches 100, an excessive entry into the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, or the right general winning opening P10-2 occurs. Each ball is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it has occurred, and the number of balls to be determined that excessive ball entry has occurred can be different for each ball entry port. It is possible to execute an appropriate error judgment according to the ease of entering the ball of the mouth.

In the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first main game start port, the second main game start port, the left general winning opening, the right general winning opening, and the out opening is added up. It is configured to clear the number of balls entered every time the total number of balls entered reaches 100 balls, but it is not limited to this, and each ball is stored in the ring buffer after reaching 100 balls. As the process of, when the 101st ball is detected, the data related to the 1st ball is overwritten with the data related to the 101st ball, and when the 102nd ball is detected, the data is overwritten. The data relating to the entry of the second ball may be stored so as to overwrite the data relating to the 102nd ball. In such a configuration, if the data related to the ball entry is not saved 100 times (when the data related to the ball entry is saved less than 100 times), the data related to the ball entry is insufficient and the ball is excessively entered. Because the accuracy of determining is low, it is configured not to execute the determination of whether or not an excessive ball has occurred (or even if it is determined that an excessive ball has occurred, an error is not determined), and the ball is entered. When the data is saved 100 times, every time the data related to the subsequent ball entry (data related to the 101st ball entry, data related to the 102nd ball entry ...) is rewritten, It may be configured to perform a determination as to whether or not an excessive ball has occurred. As a starting point for starting the 100-time count, the count is started after the RAM is cleared or after the power is turned off (the data related to the first ball entered after the RAM is cleared or after the power is turned off is used as the first ball. It may be the relevant data). In addition, when the data has not been saved 100 times, that is, when the number of data corresponding to the saved game progress status (ball entry status to the ball entry port), which is counted after the RAM is cleared or after the power is turned off and restored, is small, In order not to execute the determination of whether or not an excessive ball has occurred, the determination of whether or not an excessive ball has occurred may be performed with the number of data of 99 times or less. If the number of data related to ball entry is less than a predetermined number of times (a number different from 99 times and a number of times that can guarantee the accuracy of determining excessive ball entry to some extent, for example, 50 times), it is excessive. If the number of data related to ball entry is more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to determine whether or not excessive ball entry has occurred without executing the determination of whether or not ball entry has occurred. It may be configured.

In the first modification from the tenth embodiment, it is possible to determine excessive entry into the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, or the right general winning opening P10-2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an excessive entry into the second main game start port B10 may be detected. Further, as a mode for determining that excessive ball entry has occurred, excessive ball entry occurs when the ratio of the number of balls entering the predetermined entry port to the number of balls entering the out port D80 becomes a certain value or more. It may be configured to determine that it is present.

In the first modification from the tenth embodiment, when the out-port entry ball detection device D80s detects the entry into the out-port D80, the external terminal output signal may be output. However, in such a configuration, if the occurrence of an error based on the ball entering the out port D80 can be detected, the external terminal output signal and the out port D80 related to the normal entry into the out port D80 It may be configured to output a signal (signal type is different) different from the external terminal output signal related to the occurrence of an error due to the entry into the ball.

In the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the process relating to excessive entry into the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, or the right general winning opening P10-2, that is, Count related to the number of balls entered into the first main game start opening A10, the left general winning opening P10-1, or the right general winning opening P10-2 (count for determining whether excessive entry has occurred), The process of determining whether or not excessive ball entry has occurred is configured to be executed by the process on the main control board M side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start opening A10 and the left general winning opening Count related to the number of balls entered into P10-1 or the right general winning opening P10-2 (count for determining whether excessive entry has occurred), determination of whether excessive entry has occurred The process may be configured to be executed by the process on the sub-control board S side.

In addition, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the position where the out-port in-ball detection device is provided may be changed. As an example, all the game balls that have entered the game board and each entry port (the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, etc.) An out-port / in-ball detection device may be arranged in the collecting flow path. With such a configuration, the number of game balls detected by the out-mouth / in-ball detection device = the number of game balls fired on the game board, and as in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, every 100 game balls. In the case of determining whether or not excessive entry into each entry port has occurred, the determination process may be executed every time the out opening entry ball detection device detects 100 game balls. It is not necessary to provide the process of step 3852 of 170. In such a configuration, the number of balls entered in the first main game start port, the second main game start port, the left general winning opening, the right general winning opening, and the out opening is not the total number of balls, but each The ball entry information may be stored in the ring buffer as described above for each entry port. As an example, 100 balls are inserted into the ring buffer related to the entry into the first main game start opening A10. Ball information can be saved, and if there is a ball entering the first main game start port A10, "1" is written, and if there is a ball entering other than the first main game start port A10 (first). "0" is written in the out port entry ball detection device without entering the ball in the main game start port A10), and as described above, 101 balls to the first main game start port A10. If there is an eye hit, the data related to the first ball is overwritten, and the second main game start opening B10 and the left general winning opening are the same as the first main game start opening A10. The data related to 100 balls may be stored in P10-1 and the right general winning opening P10-2. Further, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, as illustrated in the process of step 3852 of FIG. 170, the first main game start opening, the second main game start opening, the left general winning opening, and the right general It is configured to determine whether or not excessive ball entry has occurred by adding up the number of balls entered into the winning opening and the out opening, but it is not limited to this, and to other entry openings such as the large winning opening. It may be configured to add up including the entry of the ball.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (1) is
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that executes the main game,
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A member attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can take an open state and a closed state, and when in the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting). The game ball can enter the mouth B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the closed state. Alternatively, a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state,
Auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10) where a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can enter.
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information is provided.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
The first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires the first random number triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). -A) and
First hit / fail determination means (for example, first main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A). MN11-A) and
First identification information display content that determines the stop first identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A) and
First identification by the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit MN41-A). The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop first identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A). The first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) that temporarily stores the first random number as a hold until the hit / fail judgment is permitted.
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a second random number when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B) and
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a win / fail judgment based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). MN11-B) and
Second identification information display content that determines the stop second identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / loss lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) makes the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop second identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) that temporarily stores the second random number as a hold until the hit / fail judgment is permitted.
When the winning / failing judgment result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the stop first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second winning / failing determination means ( For example, when the winning / failing determination result by the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed, and then the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the first) It is a means for executing a special game in which the two major winning openings C20) are in an advantageous state for the player, and the execution contents of the special game include the first special game and a specific area (for example, specific) rather than the first special game. A special game control means (for example, special game control) that has a second special game that facilitates entry into the area C22) and executes a special game in the execution content of either the first special game or the second special game. Means MP30) and
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. With a lottery state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that a high-probability lottery state can be obtained after the execution of the special game is completed when the ball enters the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). ,
The shortest period in which the variable display period of the first identification information can be taken or the shortest period in which the variable display period of the second identification information can be taken is a long-term variable state in which the predetermined period and the shortest possible period in which the variable display period of the first identification information can be taken. It has a short-term variable state in which the shortest period that the variable display period of the period or the second identification information can be taken is a shorter period than the predetermined period, and controls so that the short-term variable state can be obtained after the execution of the special game is completed. If the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) is provided with the variable state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) and there is a hold, the first hit / fail determination is made. Whether or not the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) has a hold while the hit / fail judgment by the means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is not permitted. Regardless of this, it is configured so that the winning / failing determination by the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) can be permitted, and the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game). When the winning / failing judgment result by the game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) was winning, the winning / failing judgment result by the first winning / losing judgment means (for example, the first main game winning / losing lottery means MN11-A) was winning. It is configured so that the special game is easier to be executed in the second special game than in the case.
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), the auxiliary game random number related to the open state drive of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is acquired. Auxiliary game random number acquisition means (for example, auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H) and
Auxiliary game identification information display content determining means (for example,) for determining stop identification information of auxiliary game identification information based on auxiliary game random numbers acquired by auxiliary game random number acquisition means (for example, auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H). Auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H, auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H),
Auxiliary game identification information display content display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the determination by the auxiliary game identification information display content determining means (for example, auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H, auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H). Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information of the auxiliary game identification information after the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed in
Stop of auxiliary game identification information After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, it is possible to execute an easy-to-enter ball game in which a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is driven and controlled in an open state. Variable member opening control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) and
Auxiliary game Auxiliary game that has a normal game state and an auxiliary game specific game state in which an easy-to-enter ball game is more easily executed than the auxiliary game normal game state, and controls so that the auxiliary game specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is provided with a game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50), and is configured to be in an auxiliary game specific game state when it is in a variable state for a short period of time.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information that the special game is being executed and information that the special game is in a fluctuating state for a short period of time, and the second information is a specific area (for example, when the special game related to the first special game is executed). , A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to provide information indicating that a ball has entered the specific area C22).

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (2) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
The first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) that executes the win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). When,
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When,
When the winning / failing determination result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, or when the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) ) Is won, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, and the third information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is information for the second start port (for example, the second start port). It becomes information that one ball has entered the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example). , The information is configured so that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the second main game start port B10) has reached a predetermined number.
The first information is output when one ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start. One piece of information is output when one ball enters the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start). One piece of information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the opening A10) and / or the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) reaches a predetermined number.
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the third information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any of the above-mentioned first information to the third information. And, for example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information) is in progress, it is one of the certain types of external output information (the first information to the third information described above). , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to third information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the third information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to third information, for example, the first information). It is a characteristic pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (2) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) that executes the win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). When,
First identification information display content that determines the stop first identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A) and
First identification by the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit MN41-A). The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop first identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When,
Second identification information display content that determines the stop second identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / loss lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) makes the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop second identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the winning / failing judgment result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the stop first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second winning / failing determination means ( For example, when the result of the winning / failing determination by the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the special game control means for executing the special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed. (For example, special game control means MP30)
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, the fourth information, and the fifth information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the information indicating that the ball has entered the second starting port (for example, the second starting port (for example, the second). It becomes information that one ball has entered the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example). , The information that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the second main game start port B10 has reached a predetermined number, and the fourth information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start). It becomes information that one ball has entered the opening A10) or the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10), and the fifth information stops after the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to provide information to the effect that it has been displayed.
The first information is output when one ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start. One piece of information is output when one ball enters the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start). One piece of information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the opening A10) and / or the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) reaches a predetermined number. The fourth information is triggered by one entry into the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). One piece of information is output,
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the fourth information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any one of the above-mentioned first information to the fourth information. For example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information) is in progress, it is one of the certain types of external output information (the first information to the fourth information described above). , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (any of the above-mentioned first information to fourth information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the fourth information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to fourth information, for example, the first information).
When the first identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first identification information is not newly started, and when the fifth information is output, the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period when the stop display is displayed after that, and the shortest period in the variable display period of the first identification information is longer than the predetermined period. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being configured in this way.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (3) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) that executes the win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). When,
First identification information display content that determines the stop first identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A) and
First identification by the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit MN41-A). The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop first identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When,
Second identification information display content that determines the stop second identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / loss lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) makes the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop second identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the winning / failing judgment result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the stop first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second winning / failing determination means ( For example, when the result of the winning / failing determination by the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the special game control means for executing the special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed. (For example, special game control means MP30)
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, the fourth information, and the fifth information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the information indicating that the ball has entered the second starting port (for example, the second starting port (for example, the second). It becomes information that one ball has entered the main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) and / or the second start port (for example). , The information that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the second main game start port B10 has reached a predetermined number, and the fourth information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start). It becomes information that one ball has entered the opening A10) or the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10), and the fifth information stops after the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to provide information to the effect that it has been displayed.
The first information is output when one ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start. One piece of information is output when one ball enters the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is the first start port (for example, the first main game start). One piece of information is output when the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the opening A10) and / or the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) reaches a predetermined number. The fourth information is triggered by one entry into the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) or the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). One piece of information is output,
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the fourth information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any one of the above-mentioned first information to the fourth information. For example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information) is in progress, it is one of the certain types of external output information (the first information to the fourth information described above). , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the fourth information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (any of the above-mentioned first information to fourth information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the fourth information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to fourth information, for example, the first information).
When the first identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first identification information is not newly started, and when the fifth information is output, the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period when the stop display is displayed after that, and the shortest period in the variable display period of the first identification information is longer than the predetermined period. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being configured in this way.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (4) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can enter.
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires the first random number triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). -A) and
First hit / fail determination means (for example, first main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A). MN11-A) and
First identification information display content that determines the stop first identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A) and
First identification by the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit MN41-A). The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop first identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a second random number when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B) and
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a win / fail judgment based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). MN11-B) and
Second identification information display content that determines the stop second identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / loss lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) makes the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop second identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the winning / failing judgment result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the stop first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second winning / failing determination means ( For example, when the winning / failing determination result by the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed, and then the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the first) It is a means for executing a special game in which the two major winning openings C20) are in an advantageous state for the player, and the execution contents of the special game include the first special game and a specific area (for example, specific) rather than the first special game. A special game control means (for example, special game control) that has a second special game that facilitates entry into the area C22) and executes a special game in the execution content of either the first special game or the second special game. Means MP30) and
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. With a lottery state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that a high-probability lottery state can be obtained after the execution of the special game is completed when the ball enters the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). With
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information that the ball has entered a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing the special game related to the first special game, and the second information is information at the time of executing the special game. Is configured to provide information that there was an illegal entry into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20).
The first information is output when the ball enters a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of executing the special game related to the first special game (however, it is variable in the second special game). If it is easier to enter a specific area by opening the variable winning opening for a long period of time after opening the winning opening for a short period of time, it means that the ball entered the specific area when the winning opening was opened for a short period of time. The second information may be output as an opportunity), regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening) is used when the special game is executed. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be output when an illegal ball is entered into C10, the second major winning opening C20).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) on which the game ball can enter, which is provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30),
A second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) on which the game ball can enter, which is provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30),
A collection path (for example, a flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached) for collecting the game ball driven on the game area (for example, the game area D30), and
The first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) that executes the win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). When,
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) that executes a win / fail judgment when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When,
When the winning / failing determination result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, or when the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) ) Is won, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is provided.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, and the third information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the information indicating that the ball has entered the second starting port (for example, the second starting port (for example, the second). The information indicates that one ball has entered the main game start port B10), and the third information is the number of game balls that have passed through the collection path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). Is configured to be information that the specified number has been reached.
The first information is output when one ball enters the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is output when the ball enters the second starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). It is output when one ball enters the second main game start port B10), and the third information passes through the collection path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). It is output when the number of game balls has reached a predetermined number, which is more than one, and after reaching the predetermined number, the number of game balls has reached the predetermined number starting from the arrival point (for example,). When the predetermined number = 10 pieces, the pachinko machine is configured to output when it reaches 10 pieces and then output when it reaches 10 pieces).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) on which the game ball can enter, which is provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30),
A second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) on which the game ball can enter, which is provided on the game area (for example, the game area D30),
A collection path (for example, a flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached) for collecting the game ball driven on the game area (for example, the game area D30), and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires the first random number triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). -A) and
First hit / fail determination means (for example, first main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A). MN11-A) and
First identification information display content that determines the stop first identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A). Determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A) and
First identification by the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit MN41-A). The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop first identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A). The first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) that temporarily stores the first random number as a hold until the hit / fail judgment is permitted.
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21) that acquires a second random number when the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). -B) and
A second hit / fail determination means (for example, a second main game win / fail lottery means) that executes a win / fail judgment based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B). MN11-B) and
Second identification information display content that determines the stop second identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / loss lottery means MN11-B). Determining means (for example, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) makes the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the stop second identification information after the information is variablely displayed.
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second hit / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) that temporarily stores the second random number as a hold until the hit / fail judgment is permitted.
When the winning / failing determination result by the first winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is winning, the stop first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second winning / failing determination means ( For example, when the result of the winning / failing determination by the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the special game control means for executing the special game advantageous to the player after the stop second identification information is stopped and displayed. (For example, the special game control means MP30) is provided, and when the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) has a hold, the first hit / fail determination means (for example, for example). While the winning / failing determination by the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is not permitted, regardless of whether or not there is a hold in the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A). , The second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is configured to allow the winning / failing determination, and the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the ball is smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10). ,
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, the third information, and the fourth information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and the second information is the information indicating that the ball has entered the second starting port (for example, the second starting port (for example, the second). The information indicates that one ball has entered the main game start port B10), and the third information is the number of game balls that have passed through the collection path (for example, the flow path to which the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is attached). Is information that the number has reached a predetermined number, and the fourth information is configured to be information that the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped.
The first information is output when one ball enters the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), and the second information is the second start. One piece of information is output when one ball enters the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10), and the third information is transmitted by the collection path (for example, the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). The number of game balls that have passed through the attached flow path) has reached a predetermined number, which is more than one, and after reaching the predetermined number, the number of game balls has reached the predetermined number starting from the arrival point. It is output as an opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number = 10 pieces, it is output when it reaches 10 pieces, and then it is output when it reaches 10 pieces).
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the third information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any of the above-mentioned first information to the third information. And, for example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information) is in progress, it is one of the certain types of external output information (the first information to the third information described above). , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the third information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to third information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the third information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to third information, for example, the first information).
When outputting the fourth information, it is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period when the first identification information or the second identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening) in which a game ball can be entered,
A winning opening ball detection unit (for example, a winning opening ball detection unit) that detects the entry of a game ball into each winning opening at the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). , 1st main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, 2nd main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, general winning opening entry ball detection device),
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
Variable winning opening winning ball detection unit (for example, first large winning opening winning detection device C11s, which detects the entry of a game ball into a variable winning opening (for example, first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20), 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21s) and
Predetermined winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening A10, second) among the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening). The winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the main game starting port B10). When,
If the result of the winning / failing judgment by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening) It is provided with a special game control means (for example, a special game control means MP30) for executing a special game in which C10 (C10, the second prize opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player.
At least the first information can be output as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information includes information that an illegal ball has been entered into any of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). It is configured to be information indicating one of the information indicating that there was an illegal entry into the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20), and the illegality. It is configured to be output as the same signal when at least one of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition for determining that the ball has entered is satisfied.
The first condition is a predetermined period from the detection of a certain game ball entering a certain winning opening to the detection of a further entry of a game ball into the certain winning opening. It is satisfied when the number of times that the specified number of times is satisfied reaches a predetermined number of times, and the second condition continues to detect the entry of the game ball at a certain winning opening for a predetermined period. The third condition is the number of balls detected in the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) during the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be satisfied by exceeding a predetermined number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A specific entry port (for example, a specific entry port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, execution of first main game random number acquisition determination) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired (for example, a hit / fail determination means (for example). 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
Identification that determines the stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). Information display content determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Identification information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) based on the determination, identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C) and
When the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and then the game. A special game state transition right granting means (for example, special game control means MP30) that grants a transition right to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the person, and
After the transfer right to the special game state is granted, the game ball is placed in the specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10) under the condition that the granted transfer right has not been exercised yet. When the ball is entered, the special game state transition right exercise control means (for example, the special game control means MP30) for exercising the transition right to the special gaming state, which is the unexercised state, to shift to the special gaming state, and
When the state shifts to the special game state, the special game control means (for example, special) for executing the special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player. Game control means MP30) and
There are a long-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the variable display period of the identification information can be taken is a predetermined period, and a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period that the variable display period of the identification information can be taken is a shorter period than the predetermined period. However, it is provided with a variable state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that the special game can be changed to a variable state for a short period of time after the execution of the special game is completed, and the right to shift to the special game state is not exercised. , The right to shift to the special game state is not exercised until the game ball enters the specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10).
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information indicates that the right to shift to the special gaming state has not been exercised and that the special game is being executed when the right to shift to the special gaming state that has not been exercised has been exercised. It becomes information indicating any of the information, and the second information is information that the right to shift to the special gaming state is not exercised, and when the right to shift to the special gaming state that is not exercised is exercised. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be information indicating either information indicating that a special game is being executed or information indicating that the special game is in a fluctuating state for a short period of time.
The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (8) may have the following configurations.
The first information and the second information are configured to be output when a predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the stop identification information to which the right to shift to the special gaming state is granted. , Whether or not the special game will be in a fluctuating state for a short period of time after the execution of the special game is completed can be determined according to the type of stop identification information to which the right to shift to the special game state is granted. , The output duration is configured to differ depending on the type of stop identification information.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A specific entry port (for example, a specific entry port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, execution of first main game random number acquisition determination) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired (for example, a hit / fail determination means (for example). 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
Identification that determines the stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). Information display content determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Identification information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) based on the determination, identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C) and
When the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is the first stop identification information or the first stop identification information. (Ii) A special game state transition right granting means (for example, special game control means MP30) that grants a transition right to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the stop is displayed by the stop identification information.
After the transfer right to the special game state is granted, the game ball is placed in the specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10) under the condition that the granted transfer right has not been exercised yet. When the ball is entered, the special game state transition right exercise control means (for example, the special game control means MP30) for exercising the transition right to the special gaming state, which is the unexercised state, to shift to the special gaming state, and
Special game automatic transition control that shifts the game ball to the special game state without entering the specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10) after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed by the third stop identification information. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40) and
When the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening) A unit game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) are in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into C20) or a predetermined period has elapsed. When a special game in which the above is executed multiple times is possible and the state is shifted to the special game state due to the stop display of the third stop identification information, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning) Players use variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30, small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game once, which is advantageous for the player.
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and the execution of the special game is completed. A lottery state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls so that a high probability lottery state can be obtained later,
There are a long-term fluctuation state in which the shortest possible period for the variable display period of the identification information is a predetermined period, and a short-term fluctuation state in which the shortest period for which the variable display period of the identification information can be taken is a shorter period than the predetermined period. However, it is provided with a variable state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that the special game can be changed to a variable state for a short period of time after the execution of the special game is completed, and the right to shift to the special game state is not exercised. , The right to shift to the special game state is not exercised until the game ball enters the specific entry port (for example, the specific entry port H10), and the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed. After the execution of the special game due to the fact is completed, the lottery state and the variable state for a long period of time are entered, and after the execution of the special game due to the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed is completed, the probability is high. Before and after the execution of the special game caused by the lottery state and the short-term fluctuation state and the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the game state and the long-term fluctuation state related to the high-probability lottery state and the low-probability lottery state, and It is configured so that it does not change from the gaming state related to the short-term fluctuation state.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information that the right to shift to the special gaming state is not exercised and that the special game is being executed when the right to shift to the special gaming state that is not exercised is exercised. It becomes information indicating any of the information, and the second information is information that the right to shift to the special gaming state is not exercised, and when the right to shift to the special gaming state that is not exercised is exercised. Information that the special game is being executed, information that at least the special game is being executed due to the fact that the third stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and that the third stop identification information is stopped and displayed. The period until the variable display of the identification information becomes possible after the execution of the special game due to the above (for example, this period is provided as a period for production although the above-mentioned variable winning opening is not opened. It is configured to be information indicating any of the information indicating the period (which can be mentioned as the so-called demonstration period after a small hit).
In the second information, the information indicating the period until the variable display of the identification information becomes possible after the execution of the special game due to the stop display of the third stop identification information is the start of execution of the special game. Occasionally, if it is in a fluctuating state for a long period of time, it is output over the first period, and if it is in a fluctuating state for a short period of time at the start of execution of the special game, it is output over a second period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (10) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, execution of first main game random number acquisition determination) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired (for example, a hit / fail determination means (for example). 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
Identification that determines the stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). Information display content determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Identification information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) based on the determination, identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C) and
When the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is the first stop identification information or the first stop identification information. (Ii) When the stop is displayed in the stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20), or a predetermined period has elapsed. It is possible to execute a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is placed in an advantageous state for the player, and a unit game is executed a plurality of times. When the stop is displayed in the third stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20), or a predetermined period has elapsed. A special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player is executed once. , Special game control means MP30, small hit game control means MP40),
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and the execution of the special game is completed. A lottery state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls so that a high probability lottery state can be obtained later,
There are a long-term variable state in which the shortest period that the variable display period of the identification information can be taken is a predetermined period, and a short-term variable state in which the shortest period that the variable display period of the identification information can be taken is a shorter period than the predetermined period. However, it is provided with a variable state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that the special game can be changed to a variable state for a short period of time after the execution of the special game is completed, and the first stop identification information is stopped and displayed. After the execution of the game is completed, the high-probability lottery state and the long-term fluctuation state are reached, and after the execution of the special game is completed due to the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the high-probability lottery state and the short-term fluctuation state are reached. Before and after the execution of the special game caused by the stop display of the third stop identification information, the game state related to the high-probability lottery state and the low-probability lottery state, the long-term fluctuation state, and the short-term fluctuation state are related. It is configured so that it does not change from the game state,
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information indicating that a special game is being executed due to the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, and the second information is the first stop identification information or the first stop identification information. Information that the special game is being executed due to the second stop identification information being stopped and displayed, and the special game caused by the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed in the case of a long-term fluctuation state. It is configured to be information that indicates one of the information that is being executed.
In the second information, the information that the special game is being executed due to the third stop identification information being stopped and displayed in the case of a long-term fluctuation state is the first time before the unit game is executed in the special game. A series of periods from the production time to the state in which the unit game is being executed, the variable winning opening closing period after the unit game execution is completed, and the final production time (for example, during this period, the variable winning opening is opened. Although there is no such thing, it includes a period provided as a period for directing, and can include a series of periods that are the so-called pre-small hit demo period + small hit execution + so-called small hit post-execution demo period) It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be continuously output over a period of time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (11) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening) in which a game ball can be entered,
Predetermined winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening A10, second) among the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening). The winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the main game starting port B10). When,
When the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A game control means (for example, a special game control means MP30) is provided.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, and the third information can be output separately.
The first information is information that one ball has entered any of the predetermined winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10). The second information is that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entered into the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening) reaches a predetermined number. The third information is information that the ball has been illegally entered into any of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). It is structured so that the information includes at least the fact that it was there.
The first information is output when one ball is entered into the predetermined winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10). The second information determines the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). When the number is reached, one piece of information is output,
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the second information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any of the above-mentioned first information to the second information. For example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information is in progress, it is one of the above-mentioned first information to the second information. , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to second information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the second information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information).
When outputting the third information, there was an illegal entry into any of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). It is configured to continuously output for a predetermined period with this as an opportunity.
While the output period of the first information and the second information is the same when the first information and the second information are output, the output of the first information and the second information when the first information and the second information are output are the same. The period is different from the predetermined period when the third information is output, and the third information is longer than the output period of the first information and the first information when the second information is output. Is configured so that the predetermined period when outputting is longer.
If the condition for outputting the third information is satisfied during the period in which the third information is continuously output over the predetermined period, the condition is calculated from the time when the condition is satisfied. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to continuously output the third information for the predetermined period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (12) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A winning / failing determination means (for example, a first main game winning / failing lottery means) that executes a winning / failing determination when a game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10). MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
When the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A game control means (for example, a special game control means MP30) is provided.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information, the second information, and the third information can be output separately.
The first information is information that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10) has reached a predetermined number. The second information is information that the number of game balls that have been paid out out of the number of prize balls to be paid out has reached a predetermined number, and the third information is for identifying the type of pachinko gaming machine. It is structured to be the information of
The first information is triggered by the fact that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10) reaches a predetermined number. Information is output, and one piece of information is output from the second information when the number of game balls that have been paid out out of the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number.
When outputting the one information, the output period of the one information is formed by outputting a predetermined signal over a predetermined period, and a certain kind of external output information (described above). Any of the first information to the second information, for example, when one information in the first information is output, any of the above-mentioned first information to the second information. For example, when the output period of the previously output one information in the first information is in progress, it is one of the above-mentioned first information to the second information. , For example, after the output period of the previously output one information in the first information), the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information). Is configured to output one piece of information in, and outputs one piece of information in a certain kind of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to second information, for example, first information). In this case, the output period of one piece of information in the type of external output information (one of the above-mentioned first information to the second information, for example, the second information) different from the certain type of external output information. Even if it is inside, it is configured to output one piece of information in the certain kind of external output information (one of the first information to the second information described above, for example, the first information).
When outputting the third information, the information for identifying the type of the pachinko game machine is the first identification signal having the number of first bytes, the second identification signal having the number of second bytes, and the number of third bytes. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can output in the order of the third identification signal, and is configured to output in a signal format different from the signal format when outputting the above-mentioned one information.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (13) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening) in which a game ball can be entered,
A winning opening ball detection unit (for example, a winning opening ball detection unit) that detects the entry of a game ball into each winning opening at the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). , 1st main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, 2nd main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, general winning opening entry ball detection device),
A winning opening discharge detection unit (for example, a winning opening discharge detection unit) that detects the discharge of a game ball that has entered each winning opening at the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening). , Total emission confirmation sensor C90s),
It is provided with information initialization means (for example, main control board M) for initializing information temporarily stored by a predetermined temporary storage means.
At least the first information can be output as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information includes information that an illegal ball has been entered, information that the information temporarily stored by the predetermined temporary storage means has been initialized, and the plurality of winning openings (for example, the plurality of winning openings). It is configured to be information indicating any of the information indicating that there was an abnormality in the discharge of the game ball that entered any of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning opening). Ori,
When outputting the first information, an illegal entry into any of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening) is detected. One piece of information is output when the information is temporarily stored, or one piece of information is output when the information temporarily stored by the predetermined temporary storage means is initialized, and the one piece of information is output. Is configured to output a predetermined signal over a predetermined period of time.
When outputting the first information, an abnormal discharge of a game ball that has entered any of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening) occurs. When it is detected, even during the period in which the predetermined signal over the predetermined period is output as the one information, the predetermined emission abnormality is newly detected from the time when the discharge abnormality is detected. Until the information temporarily stored by the temporary storage means of the above is initialized, the first information is continuously output, and the discharge abnormality is detected as a trigger. When the first information is continuously output, the first information is continuously output even if the first information should be newly output during the continuous output period. Is configured to
As the external output information, the first information and the second information different from the first information (for example, the information to be output when one ball enters the starting port, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out or the number of prize balls already paid out are predetermined. Information to be output when the number is reached, etc.) and) are configured to be output separately, and the output period for outputting one piece of information when outputting the second information, and the first information This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the output period for outputting one piece of information at the time of outputting is the same period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (14) is
A payout means (for example, a prize ball payout unit KE10) capable of paying out a game ball by performing a payout operation,
The payout control means (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) that controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout means (for example, the prize ball payout unit KE10),
A pachinko gaming machine provided with a switch member (for example, an error release switch KH3a) that can be operated by an operator.
The payout control means (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) is
An error determination means (for example, an error control means 3200) for determining whether or not an error related to the payout operation of the game ball has occurred, and
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by an error determining means (for example, error control means 3200), if a predetermined release condition is satisfied, an error canceling means (for example, for example) that releases the error state. Equipped with error control means 3200)
The types of errors include at least a first-class error, a second-class error, and a third-class error, and the first-class error, the second-class error, and the third-class error are error determination means (for example, an error). The conditions for determining that an error has occurred differ depending on the control means 3200).
In the case of an error state related to any of the first-class error, the second-class error, and the third-class error, the payout operation by the payout means (for example, the prize ball payout unit KE10) is configured to be stopped. Cage,
In the case of an error state related to the first-class error, the error state related to the first-class error can be canceled when the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is operated. And
In the case of an error state related to a type 2 error, the period of the error state related to the type 2 error is a predetermined period even if the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is not operated. It is configured so that the error state related to the second type error can be canceled when the above is reached.
In the case of an error state related to the third type error, even if the switch member (for example, the error release switch KH3a) is operated, the error state related to the third type error cannot be released and the third type error is not released. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the error state related to the third type error cannot be canceled even by the period of the error state related to the third type error.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (15) is
An outer frame body (for example, outer frame unit D12), which is a frame body for fixing at a predetermined installation location, and
An inner frame (eg, front) that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame (eg, outer frame unit D12) and is openable and closable to the outer frame (eg, outer frame unit D12). Frame unit D14) and
A frame body including a transparent plate (for example, a transparent plate unit D16), and a frame body with a transparent plate (for example, a door unit D18) attached to an inner frame body (for example, a front frame unit D14) so as to be openable and closable. ,
A frame body open detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, a door unit) for detecting whether or not the frame body with a transparent plate (for example, the door unit D18) is in an open state with respect to the inner frame body (for example, the front frame unit D14). Equipped with a door opening sensor attached to D18)
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) that can output sound,
At least a decorative lamp portion (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided in a frame body with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18), and
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in the decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) is further provided.
The main control unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the game symbol display unit B21g).
When the identification information stopped and displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is in a predetermined mode, a special game advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
An error determining means (for example, fraud detection information management means) for determining whether or not the frame is open based on the detection state of the frame open detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, the door open sensor attached to the door unit D18). The error state is determined to be in the open state by the error determination means (for example, the fraud detection information management means ME), or the error state is determined by the error determination means (for example, the fraud detection information management means ME). It is configured to be able to execute variable display and stop display of identification information regardless of whether it is in a non-error state determined to be not in the open state.
The sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), and the decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) is made to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode. It is configured so that when the error state becomes the non-error state, the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode is terminated after the output of the predetermined sound is terminated.
The period from the error state becoming the non-error state to the end of the output of the predetermined sound can be within the shortest period in which the variation display period of the identification information can be taken, while the error state is the non-error state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the period from the time when the light is emitted to the end of the light emission based on the predetermined light emitting mode is configured so that the variable display period of the identification information exceeds the shortest possible period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16) is
A main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A member attached to a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a main game start port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ), And a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open.
A sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player (for example, a decorative LED of the sub-input button SB),
An image display unit that can display images (for example, an effect display device SG),
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
Controls sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24), light emission from the decorative lamp unit (for example, the decorative LED of the sub input button SB), and image display to the image display unit (for example, effect display device SG). A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) is provided.
The main control unit (for example, the main control board M) is
The main game is advanced based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), and the result of advancing the main game is a predetermined result. When becomes, the main game control means (for example, the game progress means MP) that controls to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
When the auxiliary game is advanced based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) and the result of advancing the auxiliary game is a specific result, a variable member (for example, for example). Auxiliary game control means (for example, game progress means MP) that controls the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) so as to be in an open state, and
Displacement state of variable member (for example, second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and entry status to main game start port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) When any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the above is satisfied, an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred, and
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME), if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, the error release means for canceling the error state. (For example, fraud detection information management means ME) is provided, and the progress of the main game and the progress of the auxiliary game are possible regardless of whether or not the error state is present.
The sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is
The effect video display control means (for example, the effect display control means SM20) that controls the effect image to be displayed on the image display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) according to the progress of the main game.
With the effect lamp light emission control means (for example, the effect display control means SM20) that controls the decorative lamp unit (for example, the decorative LED of the sub input button SB) to emit light based on the predetermined light emission mode corresponding to the display content of the effect image. With
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24) and the decorative lamp unit (for example, a sub input button) is output based on a specific light emitting mode different from the predetermined light emitting mode. It is configured to emit light from the SB decorative LED).
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, even if the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. After the decorative lamp unit (for example, the decorative LED of the sub-input button SB) is made to emit light based on the specific light emitting mode for a longer period than the predetermined period, the light emission is terminated. It is a characteristic pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (17) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
At least two variable winning openings (eg, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening) that are displaceable into an open state and a closed state and are arranged at different positions on a game area (for example, game area D30). Mouth C20) and
A sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit (for example, a frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player, and
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling sound output to a sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in a decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) is provided.
The main control unit (for example, the main control board M) is
When the game is advanced based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10), and the result of advancing the game is a predetermined result. A special game is advanced in which any of the two variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the first major winning opening C10). A game control means (for example, a game progress means MP) that controls the second big winning opening C20 so as to open the second prize opening C20 under the same conditions of maximum opening period = 30 seconds, maximum count number = 10, and number of prize balls = 15. When,
The displacement state of the two variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) and the two variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). An error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the entry status to the ball is satisfied, and
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME), if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, the error release means for canceling the error state. (For example, the fraud detection information management means ME) is provided, and the special game can be advanced regardless of whether or not the error state occurs, and when the special game is advanced, the above-mentioned The two variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) are filled with a predetermined number of balls or the predetermined period elapses. The first special game, which is a special game in which any of the 1st big winning opening C10 and the 2nd big winning opening C20) can be executed a plurality of times to make the unit game advantageous to the player, and the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times. And the first special game is a special game in which the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the first special game is an opening mode (for example, maximum) of the two variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). The opening period is the same as 30 seconds, but the pattern that keeps opening or the pattern that repeats opening and closing) or the two variable winning openings to be opened (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) It is configured to be able to execute any of the second special games in which at least one of the types is different, and a threshold value related to the number of balls entered during the special game under a certain type of error determination condition (for example, in each of the above-mentioned unit games). If the error determination condition is whether or not the total number of balls entered during the execution period of the special game has reached the upper limit value, the upper limit value becomes the threshold value). It is configured so that the special game and the second special game are different.
The sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), and the decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) is made to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode. It is composed and
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, even if the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) is made to emit light for a longer period than the predetermined period, and then the light emission is terminated. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18) is
An outer frame body (for example, outer frame unit D12), which is a frame body for fixing at a predetermined installation location, and
An inner frame (eg, front) that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame (eg, outer frame unit D12) and is openable and closable to the outer frame (eg, outer frame unit D12). Frame unit D14) and
A frame body including a transparent plate (for example, a transparent plate unit D16), and a frame body with a transparent plate (for example, a door unit D18) attached to an inner frame body (for example, a front frame unit D14) so as to be openable and closable. ,
A frame body open detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, a door unit) for detecting whether or not the frame body with a transparent plate (for example, the door unit D18) is in an open state with respect to the inner frame body (for example, the front frame unit D14). Equipped with a door opening sensor attached to D18)
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) that can output sound,
At least a decorative lamp portion (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided in a frame body with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18), and
A first effect displacement member (for example, effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y) that is provided on a frame body with a transparent plate (for example, door unit D18) and can be displaced from a predetermined initial position.
It is provided on the game board attached to the inner frame body (for example, the front frame unit D14), and shields the display area of the second effect displacement member (for example, the effect display device SG) that can be displaced from a specific initial position. It is a member that can be displaced to a position where it is struck and a position where it is not shielded, and corresponds to a so-called movable member for production).
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
Sound output to the sound output unit (for example, speaker D24), light emission in the decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decorative lamp D18-L), and first effect displacement member (for example, effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y). And the displacement drive of the second effect displacement member (for example, a member that can be displaced between a position that shields the display area of the effect display device SG and a position that does not shield the display area, and corresponds to a so-called movable member for effect). Further provided with a sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling,
The main control unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A game control means (for example, game progress means MP) for advancing the game based on the entry of the game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10).
An error determining means (for example, fraud detection information management means) for determining whether or not the frame is open based on the detection state of the frame open detection unit with a transparent plate (for example, the door open sensor attached to the door unit D18). The error state is determined to be in the open state by the error determination means (for example, the fraud detection information management means ME), or the error state is determined by the error determination means (for example, the fraud detection information management means ME). It is configured so that the game can proceed regardless of whether it is in a non-error state determined to be not in the open state.
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), and the decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decorative lamp D18-L) is made to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode. It is configured so that when the error state becomes the non-error state, the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode is terminated after the output of the predetermined sound is terminated. Moreover, even if the error state does not become the non-error state, the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period.
When the non-error state becomes the error state and the first effect displacement member (for example, the effect opening / closing accessory D18-Y) does not exist at the predetermined initial position, the first effect When the displacement member for effect (for example, the opening / closing accessory D18-Y for effect) is displaced to the predetermined initial position while the non-error state becomes the error state, the displacement member for second effect (for example, for example) A member that can be displaced between a position that shields the display area of the effect display device SG and a position that does not shield the display area (corresponding to a so-called movable member for effect) does not exist at the specific initial position. Also, the second effect displacement member (for example, a member that can be displaced to a position that shields the display area of the effect display device SG and a position that does not shield the display area, and corresponds to a so-called movable member for effect) is specified above. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to be displaced to the initial position.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (19) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit (for example, a frame decorative lamp D18-L) having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player, and
A main control unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control unit (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling sound output to a sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and light emission in a decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) is provided.
The main control unit (for example, the main control board M) is
When the game is advanced based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10), and the result of advancing the game is a predetermined result. A game control means (for example, a game progress means MP) that controls a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) to advance a special game that is advantageous to the player.
Displacement state of the variable winning opening (for example, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20) and the entry status to the variable winning opening (for example, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20) When the error determination condition based on the above is satisfied, an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred, and
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME), if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, the error release means for canceling the error state. (For example, fraud detection information management means ME)
The sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is
A first error notification mode in which an error notification is performed by outputting a predetermined sound from a sound output unit (for example, speaker D24) and causing a decorative lamp unit (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode. Then, while the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output unit (for example, the speaker D24), the decorative lamp unit (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) is made to emit light based on the predetermined light emitting mode to perform error notification. It has a second error notification mode, and during the period in the error state, either the first error notification mode or the second error notification mode can be executed.
The first-class error judgment condition, which is an error judgment condition that is satisfied when the first error notification mode is executed, and the second-class error judgment condition, which is an error judgment condition that is satisfied when the second error notification mode is executed. Is configured to be different, and when the first error notification mode is executed, the error notification is terminated after the error notification is performed for a predetermined period, and the second error notification mode is executed. In that case, the error notification is terminated after the error notification is performed for a specific period different from the predetermined period.
The second error notification mode is executed after the second type error judgment condition is satisfied until the first type error judgment condition is satisfied, and the first type error judgment is executed during the execution of the second error notification mode. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to newly execute the first error notification mode when the conditions are satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5-1) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
It is equipped with a second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information.
The first random number acquisition means that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, the first hit / fail judgment means that executes the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means, the stop identification information of the first identification information is determined, and the first identification information display content determination means
First identification information display content First identification information that controls to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the determination means. Display control means and
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second pass / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, the second pass / fail judgment means that executes the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the second identification information, and
Second identification information display content The second identification information is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the determination means. Display control means and
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, or the second hit / fail judgment If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times, in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until there is or a predetermined period has elapsed.
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. In preparation, if the second hold exists, the first right / wrong judgment permission condition is not satisfied, while the second right / wrong judgment permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether the first hold exists or not. In addition, the profit given to the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is won is higher than the case where the result of the win / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means is won. It is configured so that the rate is relatively high,
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The first information is output over the first period when the special game is executed in the normal gaming state, and over the second period when the special game is executed in the specific gaming state. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second period is configured to be shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5-2) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
It is equipped with a second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information.
The first random number acquisition means that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, the first hit / fail judgment means that executes the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means, the stop identification information of the first identification information is determined, and the first identification information display content determination means
First identification information display content First identification information that controls to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the determination means. Display control means and
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second pass / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, the second pass / fail judgment means that executes the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the second identification information, and
Second identification information display content The second identification information is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the determination means. Display control means and
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, or the second hit / fail judgment If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times, in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until there is or a predetermined period has elapsed.
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. In preparation, if the second hold exists, the first right / wrong judgment permission condition is not satisfied, while the second right / wrong judgment permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether the first hold exists or not. In addition, the profit given to the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is won is higher than the case where the result of the win / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means is won. It is configured so that the rate is relatively high,
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
When a special game is executed in a normal game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the first period.
When a special game is executed in a specific game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the second period.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8-1) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Identification information display content An identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the win / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening. Alternatively, a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses is executed a plurality of times,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and is provided with a game state transition control means that can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The first information is output over the first period when the special game is executed in the normal game state, and over the second period when the special game is executed in the specific game state. The second period is configured to be shorter than the first period.
When the special game is executed in the specific game state and the special game is returned to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed, the second information includes the specific game state before the special game is executed, the special game is being executed, and the special game is being executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be continuously output over a specific gaming state after the execution of a special game is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8-2) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Identification information display content An identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the win / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening. Alternatively, a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses is executed a plurality of times,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and is provided with a game state transition control means that can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information can be output separately.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
When a special game is executed in a normal game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the first period.
When a special game is executed in a specific game state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demo period is configured to be the second period.
The second period is configured to be shorter than the first period.
When the special game is executed in the specific game state and the special game is returned to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed, the second information includes the specific game state before the special game is executed, the special game is being executed, and the special game is being executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be continuously output over a specific gaming state after the execution of a special game is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9-1) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port,
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means
The identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information, which is the stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the pass / fail determination means.
Identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
After the stop identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information or the special stop identification information, the special game state transition control means for shifting the variable winning opening to the special gaming state which can be advantageous to the player, and the special game state transition control means.
When the game shifts to the special gaming state due to the stop display of the specific stop identification information, the variable winning opening is played until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined period has elapsed. If it is possible to execute a special game that executes a unit game that is advantageous to the player multiple times, and the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and the player shifts to the special game state, a variable prize is awarded. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed once, in which a variable winning opening is placed in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the mouth or a predetermined period has elapsed.
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and after the execution of the special game is completed. In the lottery state control means for controlling the high probability lottery state,
The gaming state related to the variation display period of the identification information includes a normal variation state and a time-saving variation state in which the variation display period of the identification information is relatively shorter than the normal variation state, and the time is shortened after the execution of the special game is completed. Before and after the execution of the special game caused by the specific stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the game state related to the high-probability lottery state and the low-probability lottery state is provided. While at least one of the normal fluctuation state and the game state related to the time reduction fluctuation state can change, the high probability lottery state and the low probability state before and after the execution of the special game due to the stop display of the special stop identification information. It is configured so that the gaming state related to the probability lottery state and the gaming state related to the normal fluctuation state and the time saving fluctuation state do not change.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is configured to be information indicating a period until the variable display of the identification information becomes possible after the execution of the special game due to the stop display of the special stop identification information.
The first information is output over the first period when the special stop identification information is normally in a fluctuating state at the start of execution of the special game due to the stop display, and the special stop identification information is output. If there is a time-saving fluctuation state at the start of execution of the special game due to the stop display, it is configured to be output over the second period, and the second period is the first. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9-2) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open and closed states, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or compared to the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured so that when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port or is more difficult to enter than in the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The first random number acquisition means for acquiring the first random number triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first hit / fail judgment means that executes the hit / fail judgment, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the first stop identification information, which is the stop display mode of the first identification information,
First identification information display control First identification information display control that controls to stop and display the first stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determining means. Means and
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second hit / fail judgment means that executes the hit / fail judgment, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information, which is the stop display mode of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
Second identification information display control Second identification information display control that controls the second stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means. Means and
After the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode, the special game state transition control means for shifting the variable winning opening to a special gaming state that can be advantageous to the player. When,
When the transition to the special gaming state is caused by the stop display of the specific stop identification information as the predetermined stop display mode, there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening or the first period is set. It is possible to execute a special game in which the first unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times until the elapse of time, and the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the predetermined stop display mode. In the case of shifting to the special gaming state due to the above, the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or the second period shorter than the first period elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which the second unit game is executed once, and
As a game state related to the variation display period of the first identification information or the second identification information, the normal variation state and the time saving variation in which the variation display period of the first identification information or the second identification information is relatively shorter than the normal variation state. Before and after the execution of the special game due to the fact that the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the information is provided with a variable state control means that has a state and controls so that the time-saving fluctuation state can be obtained after the execution of the special game is completed. While the gaming state related to the normal fluctuation state and the time saving fluctuation state can change, before and after the execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed, the gaming state related to the normal fluctuation state and the time saving fluctuation state Is configured so that
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and is after the execution end timing of the special game caused by the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the information is output up to the predetermined timing, which is the timing.
The first information is output over the first period when the special game is normally in a fluctuating state at the start of execution of the special game due to the special stop identification information being stopped and displayed, and the special stop identification information is output. If there is a time saving fluctuation state at the start of execution of the special game due to the stop display, it is configured to be output over the second period, and the second period is the first. It is configured to be shorter than the period,
When the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the second stop identification information, the profit margin given to the player is relatively higher than when the specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed as the first stop identification information. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be high.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16-1) is
A start port for the main game where a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
A member attached to the main game start port that displaces between the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the main game start port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the main game start port when it is displaced to the closed state than in the open state.
A sound output unit that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player,
A video display unit that can display video and
The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a sub-control unit that controls sound output to the sound output unit, light emission from the decorative lamp unit, and image display on the image display unit.
The main control unit
It is advantageous for the player when the main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. The main game control means that controls the execution of special games,
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port to advance the auxiliary game, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member is opened. Auxiliary game control means to control the state and
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the ball entry status to the main game start port is satisfied.
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by the error determination means, if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, the error state is provided with an error release means for canceling the error state. Regardless of whether or not, the progress of the main game and the progress of the auxiliary game are configured to be possible.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, one or an operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period in which the variable member can be opened is performed. It is configured to perform an I Ching ball game that can be executed multiple times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is that the starting port for the main game is within the valid period of the ball entering, which is the period during which the ball entering the starting port for the main game is considered to be normal when the easy-entry ball game is executed once. Satisfied when the number of balls entering the ball is equal to or greater than the first number
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the main game start port is equal to or greater than the second number outside the valid period of the ball entry.
Even if the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, or if the second condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, after the error state is satisfied, the main game is used. It is configured so that an error state will occur again when the number of balls entering the starting port exceeds the third number.
The first number is larger than the second number, and the second number is larger than the third number.
The sub control unit
An effect video display control means for controlling the effect image to be displayed on the image display unit according to the progress of the main game.
It is provided with a production lamp emission control means for controlling the decorative lamp portion to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to the display content of the production image.
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit, and the decorative lamp unit is configured to emit light based on a specific light emitting mode different from the predetermined light emitting mode.
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, even if the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to end the light emission after the decorative lamp unit is made to emit light based on the specific light emitting mode for a longer period than the predetermined period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16-2) is
A start port for the main game where a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit for the main game that can display the identification information for the main game,
Auxiliary game identification information display unit that can display auxiliary game identification information,
A member attached to the main game start port that displaces between the open state and the closed state. When the member is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the main game start port or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the ball, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port is equipped with a variable member that is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter compared to the incapable or open state.
It is advantageous for the player when the main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. The main game control means that controls the execution of special games,
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port to advance the auxiliary game, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member is opened. Auxiliary game control means to control the state and
It is provided with an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the ball entry status to the main game start port is satisfied.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, one or an operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period in which the variable member can be opened is performed. It is configured to perform an I Ching ball game that can be executed multiple times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is that the starting port for the main game is within the valid period of the ball entering, which is the period during which the ball entering the starting port for the main game is considered to be normal when the easy-entry ball game is executed once. Satisfied by the number of balls entering the first number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the number of balls entering the main game start port being the second number outside the period of the ball entry validity period.
Even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, or even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, it is determined that an error has occurred. After that, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred again when the number of balls entering the main game start port becomes the third number.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is larger than the second number and the second number is larger than the third number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (17-1) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
A variable winning opening that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A sound output unit that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player,
The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a sub-control unit that controls the sound output to the sound output unit and the light emission in the decorative lamp unit.
The main control unit
A special game in which the identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening to advance the game, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the variable winning opening is placed in an advantageous state for the player. A game control means that controls the progress of
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the ball entry status into the variable winning opening is satisfied, and
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by the error determination means, if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, the error state is provided with an error release means for canceling the error state. Regardless of whether or not the special game is advanced, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player can be executed a plurality of times when the special game is advanced. , The first special game, which is a special game in which a unit game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the second special game, which is a special game in which a unit game is executed a predetermined number of times and has a variable winning opening opening mode different from that of the first special game. Is configured to be executable
As the types of the predetermined modes, there are at least a first predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the first special game and a second predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the second special game.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is that the ball is entered into the variable winning opening within the valid period of the winning ball, which is the period during which the entry into the variable winning opening is considered to be normal when the special game is executed once. Satisfied by becoming more than one number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening is equal to or greater than the second number outside the valid period of the winning ball.
Even if the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, or if the second condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, after the error state is satisfied, the variable winning opening It is configured so that an error state will occur again when the number of balls entering the ball exceeds the third number.
The first number is larger than the second number, and the second number is larger than the third number.
The first number is the case where the first predetermined mode is stopped and displayed and the first special game is executed, and the case where the second predetermined mode is stopped and displayed and the second special game is executed. It is configured so that the value set as the first condition is different.
The sub control unit
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit, and the decorative lamp unit is configured to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode.
Even if the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied, even if the output is terminated after the predetermined sound is output for a predetermined period and the predetermined error cancellation condition is not satisfied. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to end the light emission after the decorative lamp unit is made to emit light based on the predetermined light emitting mode for a longer period than the predetermined period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (17-2) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
Equipped with a variable winning opening that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A special game in which the identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening to advance the game, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the variable winning opening is placed in an advantageous state for the player. A game control means that controls the progress of
It is equipped with an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the ball entry status to the variable winning opening is satisfied, and a variable winning is provided when proceeding with a special game. The first special game, which is a special game in which the unit game in which the mouth is in an advantageous state for the player can be executed a plurality of times and the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the special game, which is a special game in which the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times, are the first. It is configured to be able to execute any of the second special games in which the opening mode of the variable winning opening is different from that of the one special game.
As the types of the predetermined modes, there are at least a first predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the first special game and a second predetermined mode corresponding to the execution of the second special game.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is that the ball is entered into the variable winning opening within the valid period of the winning ball, which is the period during which the entry into the variable winning opening is considered to be normal when the special game is executed once. Satisfied by becoming one number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the number of balls entering the variable winning opening being the second number outside the valid period of the ball entry.
Even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, or even if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, it is determined that an error has occurred. After that, it is configured to judge that an error has occurred again when the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening becomes the third number.
The first number is larger than the second number, and the second number is larger than the third number.
The first number is the case where the first predetermined mode is stopped and displayed and the first special game is executed, and the case where the second predetermined mode is stopped and displayed and the second special game is executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the values set as the first condition are configured to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18-1) is
An outer frame that is a frame for fixing at a predetermined installation location,
An inner frame that matches the opening of the outer frame and is attached to the outer frame so that it can be opened and closed.
A frame body including a transparent plate, which is attached to the inner frame body so as to be openable and closable, and a frame body with a transparent plate.
It is provided with a frame body open detection unit with a transparent plate for detecting whether or not the frame body with a transparent plate is in an open state with respect to the inner frame body.
A starting port where a game ball can enter and
A sound output unit that can output sound,
At least a decorative lamp unit having a plurality of light sources provided in a frame with a transparent plate,
A first effect displacement member that is provided on the frame with a transparent plate and can be displaced from a predetermined initial position.
A second effect displacement member that is provided on the game board attached to the inner frame and can be displaced from a specific initial position,
The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
It further includes a sound output to the sound output unit, light emission in the decorative lamp unit, and a sub-control unit that controls the displacement drive between the displacement member for the first effect and the displacement member for the second effect.
The main control unit
A game control means for advancing the game based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
Based on the detection state of the frame body open detection unit with a transparent plate, the error determination means for determining whether or not the open state is provided is provided, and whether the error state is determined to be the open state by the error determination means. , The game can proceed regardless of the non-error state determined by the error determination means that the game is not in the open state.
During the period of the error state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit and the decorative lamp unit is made to emit light based on a predetermined light emitting mode, and the error state becomes the non-error state. In the case, it is configured to end the light emission based on the predetermined light emission mode after the output of the predetermined sound is finished, and even if the error state does not become the non-error state, it is predetermined. It is configured to end the output after the predetermined sound has been output for a period of time.
When the non-error state becomes the error state and the first effect displacement member does not exist at the predetermined initial position, the first effect displacement member is displaced to the predetermined initial position. On the other hand, when the non-error state becomes the error state, even if the second effect displacement member does not exist at the specific initial position, the second effect displacement member is designated as the specific. It is configured not to be displaced to the initial position,
The decorative lamp part and the displacement member for the first production are arranged adjacent to each other.
The first effect displacement member emits light in a specific light emitting mode when it does not exist at the predetermined initial position, while the first effect displacement member changes from the non-error state to the error state. As a result, when the situation changes from the situation where it does not exist at the predetermined initial position to the situation where it exists at the predetermined initial position, it is configured not to emit light in the specific light emitting mode.
When the non-error state becomes the error state, the first effect displacement member is displaced to the predetermined initial position, and the decorative lamp portion is configured to emit light based on the predetermined light emitting mode. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18-2) is
A start port for the main game where a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit for the main game that can display the identification information for the main game,
Auxiliary game identification information display unit that can display auxiliary game identification information,
A member attached to the main game start port that displaces between the open state and the closed state. When the member is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the main game start port or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the ball, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port is equipped with a variable member that is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter compared to the incapable or open state.
It is advantageous for the player when the main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. The main game control means that controls the execution of special games,
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port to advance the auxiliary game, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member is opened. Auxiliary game control means to control the state and
It is provided with an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the ball entry status to the main game start port is satisfied.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, one or an operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period in which the variable member can be opened is performed. It is configured to perform an I Ching ball game that can be executed multiple times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is the start port for the main game outside the valid period of the ball entry, which is the period during which the entry into the start port for the main game is considered to be normal when the easy entry ball game is executed once. Satisfied by the number of balls entering the first number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the number of balls entering the main game start port being the second number outside the period of the ball entry validity period.
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error notification is performed by a predetermined error notification unit for a predetermined period, while an error occurs by satisfying the second condition. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the predetermined error notification unit is configured to notify the error over a specific period different from the predetermined period.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be larger than the second number, and the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the specific period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (19-1) is
A start port for the main game where a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit for the main game that can display the identification information for the main game,
Auxiliary game identification information display unit that can display auxiliary game identification information,
A member attached to the main game start port that displaces between the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the main game start port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the main game start port when it is displaced to the closed state than in the open state.
A sound output unit that can output sound,
A decorative lamp unit having a plurality of light sources provided at a position visible to the player,
The main control unit that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a sub-control unit that controls the sound output to the sound output unit and the light emission in the decorative lamp unit.
The main control unit
It is advantageous for the player when the main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. The main game control means that controls the execution of special games,
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port to advance the auxiliary game, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member is opened. Auxiliary game control means to control the state and
An error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the ball entry status to the main game start port is satisfied.
In the case of an error state in which an error is determined to have occurred by the error determination means, if a predetermined error release condition is satisfied, an error release means for canceling the error state is provided.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, one or an operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period in which the variable member can be opened is performed. It is configured to perform an I Ching ball game that can be executed multiple times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is the start port for the main game outside the valid period of the ball entry, which is the period during which the entry into the start port for the main game is considered to be normal when the easy entry ball game is executed once. Satisfied when the number of balls entering the ball is equal to or greater than the first number
The second condition is configured to be satisfied when the number of balls entered into the main game start port is equal to or greater than the second number outside the valid period of the ball entry.
The sub control unit
The first error notification mode in which a predetermined sound is output from the sound output unit and the decorative lamp unit is made to emit light based on the predetermined light emission mode, and the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output unit. It has a second error notification mode in which an error notification is performed by causing the decorative lamp portion to emit light based on a predetermined light emission mode, and during the period in the error state, the first error notification mode and the second error notification mode are provided. Is feasible and
When the first condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, the first error notification mode is executed, while when the second condition is satisfied and an error state occurs, the second error notification mode is executed. When the first error notification mode is executed, the error notification is terminated after the error notification is performed for a predetermined period, and the second error notification mode is executed. In this case, the error notification is terminated after the error notification is performed for a specific period different from the predetermined period.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be larger than the second number, and the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the specific period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (19-2) is
A start port for the main game where a game ball can enter, and
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit for the main game that can display the identification information for the main game,
Auxiliary game identification information display unit that can display auxiliary game identification information,
A member attached to the main game start port that displaces between the open state and the closed state. When the member is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the main game start port or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the ball, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port is equipped with a variable member that is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter compared to the incapable or open state.
It is advantageous for the player when the main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. The main game control means that controls the execution of special games,
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port to advance the auxiliary game, and when the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member is opened. Auxiliary game control means to control the state and
It is provided with an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred when any of a plurality of types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member and the ball entry status to the main game start port is satisfied.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, one or an operation of changing the variable member from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable member within the open drive period in which the variable member can be opened is performed. It is configured to perform an I Ching ball game that can be executed multiple times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is the start port for the main game outside the valid period of the ball entry, which is the period during which the entry into the start port for the main game is considered to be normal when the easy entry ball game is executed once. Satisfied by the number of balls entering the first number,
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the number of balls entering the main game start port being the second number outside the period of the ball entry validity period.
If it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error notification is performed by a predetermined sound, while if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the error is notified. It is configured not to notify the error by the specified sound.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be larger than the second number.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A1) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) that controls the stop display after the identification information is changed and displayed by the symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). -C) and
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player is performed. Executable special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
A game state control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and controls the state from the normal game state to the specific game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it is equipped with a specific game control means MP50).
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is configured to be output when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed.
When the identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the period in which the first information is output is configured to be the first period.
When the identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed in the specific game state, the period in which the first information is output is configured to be the second period.
The second period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be relatively shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A2) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a so-called attacker) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, the so-called V zone) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, a so-called attacker) can enter, and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided.
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the first identification information to be displayed in a random number and then stopped.
With the first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing the first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. ,
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the second identification information to be displayed in a random number and then stopped.
A variable winning opening open game that executes a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, a so-called attacker) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group. Control means (for example, control means for executing a so-called small hit game) and
When the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball enters the specific area, the second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player (for example, in the small hit game). A control means for executing a so-called big hit game when the ball enters the V zone),
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal game state is started. It is provided with a game state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) for controlling the specific game state.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is configured to be output when the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed.
The output period of the first information is provided with a plurality of types, and is output when the second identification information is variablely displayed in a specific gaming state and then stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the output period of the first information is configured to be the shortest output period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A3) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) that controls the stop display after the identification information is changed and displayed by the symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). -C) and
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, or after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10) , The second grand prize opening C20) is provided with a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
When the special game is executed due to the stop display of the identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is configured to start outputting one piece of information.
When the special game is executed due to the stop display of the identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the second timing is reached after the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is configured to start outputting one piece of information.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first timing and the second timing are configured to be different from each other.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A4) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided.
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the first identification information to be displayed in a random number and then stopped.
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the second identification information to be displayed in a random number and then stopped.
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a predetermined number of the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) are displayed. The first unit game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times until there is a ball or a predetermined period elapses. After the special game can be executed and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning) A unit in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the opening C20) or a specific period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, control means for executing a so-called big hit game, control means for executing a so-called small hit game) capable of executing a second special game for executing the game once, and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal game state is started. It is provided with a game state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) for controlling the specific game state.
The probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the specific group is higher than the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the specific group. Alternatively, the first identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the second special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the second special game is completed.
The execution period of the second special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the second special game to the start of execution of the unit game, and the unit game execution period from the start of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the unit game. And the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game to the end of execution of the second special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group in the normal game state and the second special game is executed, a variable prize is won in the unit game in the second special game. When the unit game ends due to the elapse of the specific period without entering the mouth (for example, the first prize opening C10, the second prize opening C20), the second special game is performed. During the end demo period, the period during which the first information is output is configured to be the first period.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state and the second special game is executed, a variable prize is won in the unit game in the second special game. When the unit game ends due to the elapse of the specific period without entering the mouth (for example, the first prize opening C10, the second prize opening C20), the second special game is performed. During the end demo period, the period during which the first information is output is configured to be the second period.
The second period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A5) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can enter.
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) that controls the stop display after the identification information is changed and displayed by the symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). -C) and
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player multiple times until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
The game state when the special game is not executed has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the special game is executed and the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is reached. A game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls a specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed when the ball is entered.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
If the game state before the start of execution of the special game and the game state after the execution of the special game are different, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is It is structured to be the first period,
If the game state before the start of execution of the special game and the game state after the execution of the special game are not different, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is It is structured to be the second period,
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second period and the first period are configured to be different.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A6) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) that controls the stop display after the identification information is changed and displayed by the symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). -C) and
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player multiple times until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
A gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are held as game states when the special game is not executed, and the game state is controlled so as to be in the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed. A control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) is provided.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
If the gaming state before the start of execution of the special game is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the execution of the special game is the specific gaming state, the first The period during which information is output is configured to be the first period.
If the gaming state before the start of execution of the special game is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the execution of the special game is the normal gaming state, the first The period during which the information is output is configured to be the second period.
The second period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A7) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) that controls the stop display after the identification information is changed and displayed by the symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). -C) and
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player multiple times until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
A gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are held as game states when the special game is not executed, and the game state is controlled so as to be in the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed. A control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) is provided.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
If the gaming state before the start of execution of the special game is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the execution of the special game is the specific gaming state, the first The period during which information is output is configured to be the first period.
If the game state before the start of execution of the special game is the specific game state and the game state after the end of the execution of the special game is the specific game state, the first The period during which information is output is configured to be the second period.
The second period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (A8) is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is Based on this, the identification information display control means (for example, the identification information display control means (for example,) that controls the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) to display the identification information in a random number and then stop the display. , 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Special game control capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player multiple times until the period elapses. Means (for example, special game control means MP30) and
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and after the execution of the special game is completed. In the lottery state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled to be in the high probability lottery state,
It has a non-ball entry easy state and a ball entry easy state in which it is easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10) than the non-ball entry easy state. It is provided with a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as to make it easy to enter the ball after the execution of the game is completed.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group in the low probability lottery state and the non-ball entry easy state, the high probability lottery state and the non-probability lottery state are performed after the execution of the special game is completed. It becomes easy to enter the ball,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group in the high probability lottery state and the non-entry easy state, the high probability lottery state and the entry are made after the execution of the special game is completed. The ball becomes easy,
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is information that is output when the special game is executed, and is configured to be output until the special game is completed.
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and the end of execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Includes the unit game execution period up to, and the end demo period, which is the waiting period from the end of execution of the final unit game to the end of execution of the special game.
The first information is continuously output over the start demo period, the unit game execution period, and the end demo period.
In the low-probability lottery state and the non-ball entry easy state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and the special game is executed after the execution of the special game is completed. In the case of a probability lottery state and a non-ball entry easy state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is configured to be the first period.
In the high-probability lottery state and the non-ball entry easy state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group in the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and the special game is executed after the execution of the special game is completed. In the case of the probability lottery state and the easy entry state, the period during which the first information is output during the end demonstration period in the special game is configured to be the second period.
The second period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the first period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (AA1) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can enter.
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, execution of first main game random number acquisition determination) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired (for example, a hit / fail determination means (for example). 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
Identification that determines the stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). Information display content determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Identification information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) based on the determination, identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C) and
When the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and then variable. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game in which the winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player,
It has a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the winning / failing determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. With a lottery state control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls so that a high-probability lottery state can be obtained after the execution of the special game is completed when the ball enters the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). ,
If any of a plurality of types of error judgment conditions based on the ball entry status to the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) is satisfied, it is determined that an error has occurred. Equipped with error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME)
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is that more game balls than the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) are placed in the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening). Satisfied by passing through the discharge port from the opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (that is, the total number of balls entered into the variable winning opening <the total number of discharges from the variable winning opening). , And it may be determined whether or not the relationship has been established after the elapse of the period for validating the ball to the variable winning opening, or it is determined before the elapse of the period. May be good),
The second condition is that the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) has a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening). When it is satisfied by not passing through the discharge port from the winning opening C20) or the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (that is, the total number of balls entered into the variable winning opening> the total number of discharges from the variable winning opening). Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the relationship is established after the elapse of the period for validating the ball to the variable winning opening, or it may be determined before the elapse of the period).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, when the special game is being executed, the execution of the special game is continued, and a predetermined error notification (for example, the effect display device SG) is performed. It is configured to display an error message in the display area, turn on the frame decoration lamp D18-L, but do not output an error sound to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the execution of the special game is stopped when the special game is being executed (at this time, when the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner). The variable display may be stopped, and when the identification information is being stopped and displayed = the so-called jackpot symbol is being continuously displayed, the continuous display is stopped and the execution of the special game is forcibly terminated = the jackpot game is performed. It may be finished and returned to the normal game), a specific error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is turned on, and an error sound is output to the speaker D24. ) Is configured to run
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, a predetermined operation (for example, turning on the power again while operating an artificially operable error canceling switch) is performed. As a result, the error state is released and the predetermined error notification ends, but at least the predetermined error notification ends when the predetermined period elapses even if the predetermined operation is not performed (however, the predetermined error notification ends). It is configured so that the error state does not have to be cleared).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, a specific operation (for example, a state in which the ball clogging in the variable winning opening is cleared and an artificially operable error clearing switch is operated). When the power is turned on again), the error state is canceled and the specific error notification ends, but if the specific operation is not performed, even if the predetermined period elapses. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific error notification is not terminated (of course, the error state is not canceled).
It should be noted that, as the above-mentioned variable winning openings, a plurality of variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) are provided, and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is not provided inside the variable winning opening. When the mouth (for example, the first big winning opening C10) and the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) having a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) are installed separately, The above error determination condition may be applied only when the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) having the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is opened.
Further, when the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) having the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is opened, it becomes easy to enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). When the variable winning opening (for example, the second major winning opening C20) is opened (that is, when it becomes easy to enter the specific area at the time of executing the round), and when the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered. It is possible to execute either the case where the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is opened so as to make the ball difficult (that is, the case where it becomes difficult to enter a specific area at the time of executing the round). If so, when the variable winning opening (for example, the second major winning opening C20) is opened so that the ball can be easily entered into the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) (that is, specified at the time of executing the round). The above error determination condition may be applied only when it becomes easy to enter the area).

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (AA2) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) that can be displaced between the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, execution of first main game random number acquisition determination) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). Means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired (for example, a hit / fail determination means (for example). 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B),
Identification that determines the stop identification information, which is a stop display mode of the identification information, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B). Information display content determining means (for example, first main game symbol determining means MN41-A, second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) and
Identification information display content determination means (for example, first main game symbol determination means MN41-A, second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) based on the determination, identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). MP11-C) and
When the winning / failing judgment result by the winning / failing determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B) is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed, and then variable. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game in which the winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player,
Multiple based on the entry status to the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) or the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20). When any of the types of error determination conditions is satisfied, an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred is provided.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is a variable winning opening (for example, a big hit game in which a plurality of rounds are executed, or a small hit game in which one round is executed) is executed once. , 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20) within the period of valid period (special game = a series of winning games), which is the period during which the ball is considered to be normal. , So-called start demo period, interval between rounds, and part or all of the end demo period may be excluded from the valid period of the ball), the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, Satisfaction is satisfied when the number of balls entered into the second major winning opening C20) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number {This first predetermined number is different depending on the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained in a series of winning games. It is also good (for example, 100 when the expected number of prize balls = 1000, 10 when the expected number of prize balls = 100, etc., but there are some that have a small number of expected prize balls in the jackpot game. If this is the case, the first predetermined number may be the same for the big hit game and the small hit game), and this difference in the expected number of prize balls may be realized by making the maximum number of rounds different. Even if the maximum number of rounds is the same, it may be realized by changing the opening mode of the variable winning opening, the upper limit of the duration in one round, and / or the upper limit of the allowable number of winnings in one round}, or the entry. Satisfaction is satisfied when the number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) exceeds the second predetermined number outside the valid period of the balls (for this second predetermined number). Is preferably less than the first predetermined number, for example, 3 pieces can be exemplified), or a variable winning opening (for example, after satisfying these conditions, the error state is not cleared). , 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20) is satisfied when the number of balls entered is equal to or greater than the third predetermined number (the third predetermined number is less than the second predetermined number). Is preferable, for example, one can be exemplified),
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, the game continues to proceed, while a predetermined error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, a frame). It is configured to turn on the decorative lamp D18-L and output an error sound to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, a predetermined operation (for example, turning on the power again) is subsequently performed to cancel the error state and notify the predetermined error notification. On the other hand, even if the predetermined operation is not performed, at least a part of the predetermined error notification ends when the predetermined period elapses {However, the error state does not have to be canceled, and for example. When the first time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the error, a part of the error notification (for example, the error sound is output to the speaker D24) is terminated, and the second time (for example, 300 seconds) from the occurrence of the error occurs. ) Elapses, a further part of the error notification (for example, displaying an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG) is terminated, and a time has elapsed from the occurrence of the error until the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed. However, the rest of the error notification (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on) may be configured not to be terminated}.
The second condition is the first ball entry detection unit (for example, in FIG. 6), which is a detection unit for detecting the entry of a ball into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). The total number of game balls detected by the indicated "first main game start port A10 entry sensor") goes to the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). A second ball entry detection unit (for example, the "first main game start opening confirmation sensor" shown in FIG. 6), which is a detection unit for detecting the entry of a ball and is provided downstream of the first ball entry detection unit. It is satisfied by increasing the number of game balls by a specific number or more from the total number of game balls detected in (Although the specific number is not particularly limited, the number may be the same as the first predetermined number described above, or the second predetermined number described above. May be a large number, or may be a larger number than the above-mentioned third predetermined number),
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the game continues to proceed, while a specific error notification (for example, an error message is displayed in the display area of the effect display device SG, and a frame is displayed. It is configured to turn on the decorative lamp D18-L and output an error sound to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, a specific operation (for example, turning on the power again) is subsequently performed to cancel the error state and notify the specific error notification. On the other hand, even if the specific operation is not performed, at least a part of the specific error notification ends when the specific period elapses {However, the error state does not have to be canceled, and for example. When the first time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the error, a part of the error notification (for example, the error sound is output to the speaker D24) is terminated, and the second time (for example, 300 seconds) from the occurrence of the error occurs. ) Elapses, a further part of the error notification (for example, displaying an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG) is terminated, and there has been a lapse of time from the occurrence of the error until the above specific operation is performed. However, the rest of the error notification (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on) may be configured not to be terminated}.
Comparing the case where it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition and the case where it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the game progresses continuously. Is common, and the predetermined operation for canceling the error state and the specific operation become a common operation mode (for example, turning on the power again), and an error notification mode (for example, display of the effect display device SG). Display an error message in the area, turn on the frame decoration lamp D18-L, output an error sound to the speaker D24) and end conditions for error notification {for example, the first time (for example, 90 seconds) has passed since the error occurred. Then, a part of the error notification (for example, outputting an error sound to the speaker D24) is terminated, and when a second time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the error, a further part of the error notification (for example, an effect) is produced. The rest of the error notification (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18) is left (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18) even if there is a lapse of time from the occurrence of the error to the execution of the above error cancellation operation after the termination (displaying the error message in the display area of the display device SG). -L is lit) may be configured not to end}.
Regarding the first predetermined number related to the first condition, the count value accumulated and counted from the predetermined initial value (for example, 0) is cleared when the execution of the special game ends, while the second condition With respect to the specific number of the above-mentioned specific number, the count value accumulated and counted from a predetermined initial value (for example, 0) regardless of whether or not the special game is being executed is not cleared when the execution of the special game ends (for example). Even if it is counted during the execution of the special game or during the valid period of the ball entry, the count is not cleared (that is, the ball entry is valid in the special game executed this time). The first predetermined number or more is determined by the total number of balls entered into the variable winning opening within the period and the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening during the valid period of the next special game. In this case, the first condition is not satisfied, but the number of detection differences between the first ball entry detection unit and the second ball entry detection unit that occurred within the valid period of the ball entry in the special game executed this time. And the total number of detection differences between the first ball entry detection unit and the second ball entry detection unit that occurred within the valid period of the ball entry in the next special game executed, the number becomes the specified number or more for the first time. In that case, the second condition will be satisfied.)
It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (AA3) is
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
The main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
A member attached to a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a main game start port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ) Is provided with a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inaccessible state or the open state.
The main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is set to a predetermined mode. When the stop display is displayed, the main game control means (for example, the game progress means MP) that controls to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, but in particular, the main game = so-called special symbol or control related to the so-called jackpot game is appropriate. To do) and
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) to advance the auxiliary game, and the auxiliary game identification information is stopped in a specific mode. When displayed, the auxiliary game control means (for example, the game progress means MP) that controls the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) so as to be in an open state, but in particular, the auxiliary game = so-called normal Controls related to symbols and so-called electric chew support)
Multiple types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and the ball entry status into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When any of the above is satisfied, an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred is provided.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is in the open drive period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be opened. 2 The main game start port electric accessory B11d) is configured to execute an easy-to-play game in which the operation of changing from the closed state to the open state and then closing the closed state can be executed one or more times.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is a period during which it is considered normal to enter the ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) when the easy entry game is executed once. Outside the period, it is satisfied that the number of balls entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) becomes the first number.
The second condition is configured to be satisfied by the number of balls entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) being the second number outside the period of the ball entry validity period. And
If it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, an error notification is performed by a predetermined sound, while if it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the error is notified. It is configured not to notify the error by the specified sound.
The first number is configured to be larger than the second number.
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is further provided.
The third condition is a predetermined period {for example, in the ball entry detection unit (for example, the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s) into the main game start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). It is about a few seconds, but at least it is longer than the detection period that can be regarded as a normal ball entry (the period required from the start of the game ball passing through the sensor to the end of the passage, which is expected to be several tens of ms). Satisfied with the fact that the game ball continued to be detected over the period}
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the third condition, the error notification is performed by the predetermined sound even under the situation where the first condition is not satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (AA4) is
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
The main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
A member attached to a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) that is displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a main game start port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) ) Is provided with a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inaccessible state or the open state.
The main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) to advance the main game, and the main game identification information is set to a predetermined mode. When the stop display is displayed, the main game control means (for example, the game progress means MP) that controls to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, but in particular, the main game = so-called special symbol or control related to the so-called jackpot game is appropriate. To do) and
The auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) to advance the auxiliary game, and the auxiliary game identification information is stopped in a specific mode. When displayed, the auxiliary game control means (for example, the game progress means MP) that controls the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) so as to be in an open state, but in particular, the auxiliary game = so-called normal Controls related to symbols and so-called electric chew support)
Multiple types of error determination conditions based on the displacement state of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and the ball entry status into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). When any of the above is satisfied, an error determination means (for example, fraud detection information management means ME) for determining that an error has occurred is provided.
When the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is in the open drive period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be opened. 2 The main game start port electric accessory B11d) is configured to execute an easy-to-play game in which the operation of changing from the closed state to the open state and then closing the closed state can be executed one or more times.
The auxiliary game side has a normal game state and a specific game state in which an easy-to-enter ball game is more easily executed than the normal game state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state of the auxiliary game side. Is configured to change
As the plurality of types of error determination conditions, at least a first condition and a second condition are provided.
The first condition is a period during which the entry into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) when the easy entry ball game is executed once in the specific game state is regarded as normal. Within a certain period of validity of the ball entry, it is satisfied that the number of balls entered into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number (for this first predetermined number). , It is preferable that the number of balls entering the start port for the main game at the time of one execution of the easy-entry ball game in the specific game state is set to a value that cannot occur in the design. For example, the execution of the easy-entry ball game ends. When it is set that the number of balls entering the main game start port is 1 or more as a condition, it can be exemplified that the first predetermined number = 6 is set) or specified. Sufficient when the number of balls entered into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) exceeds the second predetermined number outside the valid period of the ball entry in the situation where the game state continues. (It is preferable that the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number, for example, 5 pieces can be exemplified), or the error state occurs after these conditions are satisfied. It is satisfied when the number of balls entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is equal to or more than the third predetermined number without being released (the third predetermined number is larger than the second predetermined number). It is preferable to keep the number small, for example, one can be exemplified),
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, the progress of the game is forcibly interrupted (at this time, when the special game is being executed, the execution of the special game is interrupted. , The variable display may be stopped when the variable display of the main game identification information is being displayed, and the continuous display is being performed when the main game identification information is being stopped and displayed = the so-called jackpot symbol is being continuously displayed. Stop the display and forcibly end the execution of the special game = You may end the big hit game and return to the normal game), a predetermined error notification (for example, display an error message in the display area of the effect display device SG, frame decoration It is configured to turn on the lamp D18-L and output an error sound to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the first condition, a predetermined operation (for example, opening the door unit D18 and turning on the power again with the power switch Ea) is performed, so that the error occurs. When the state is released and the predetermined error notification ends (that is, when the operation is such that the power switch Ea is used to turn on the power again without opening the door unit D18, the error state is released. (It may be configured so that the error notification is not terminated even if there is a lapse of time from the occurrence of the error until the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed).
The second condition is a period during which it is considered normal to enter the ball into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) when the easy entry ball game is executed once in the normal game state. Within a certain period of validity of the ball entry, it is satisfied when the number of balls entered into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) is equal to or more than a specific number (for this specific number, the normal game state). It is preferable that the number of balls entering the start port for the main game at the time of one execution of the easy-entry ball game is set to a value that is unlikely to occur in the design. In the opening time of, it can be exemplified that a specific number = 1 is set when the ball entry guidance to the second main game start port B10 is configured to be extremely difficult in design).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, the progress of the game is continued without interruption, while a specific error notification (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is turned on, but the effect is produced. No error message is displayed in the display area of the display device SG, and no error sound is output to the speaker D24).
When it is determined that an error has occurred by satisfying the second condition, a specific operation (for example, turning on the power again with the power switch Ea) is performed thereafter, so that the error state is canceled and the specific operation is performed. (That is, the error state is canceled even if the operation is supposed to be a fraudulent act of turning on the power again with the power switch Ea without opening the door unit D18). This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific error notification is terminated when a specific period elapses even if the operation of the above is not performed.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B1) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) has a predetermined number of balls or a variable winning opening (for example, a predetermined period has elapsed). For example, it is provided with a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can make the large winning opening C10) advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game, which is a predetermined number of execution times at the time of executing the special game, a high probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to get and
At the time of executing a certain special game, the predetermined period is longer than the period from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the next unit game at the time of executing the unit game which is the previous execution time of the predetermined execution times. The next unit game from the time when the predetermined period elapses when the unit game is executed, which is different from the previous execution time of the predetermined execution time and different from the last execution time in the special game. The period until the start of execution is shorter,
At the time of executing a certain special game, the period from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the next unit game at the time of executing the unit game which is the predetermined execution time is different from the predetermined execution time. Moreover, from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the unit game, which is different from the previous execution time of the predetermined execution time and different from the final execution time in the special game. The period of is shorter,
It is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) and a game ball that has been discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10).
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is less than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of excessive discharge abnormality.
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is larger than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of insufficient discharge abnormality.
When the unit game to be executed next time is a unit game having an execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the unit game which is the execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the special game. Is configured to detect the occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality when the next unit game to be executed is a unit game in which the predetermined execution times are performed.
The occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality is detected during the execution of the special game, and even if the insufficient discharge abnormality is not resolved, the execution of the special game can be terminated and the identification information is displayed in a variable manner after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to play.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B2) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) has a predetermined number of balls or a variable winning opening (for example, a predetermined period has elapsed). For example, it is provided with a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can make the large winning opening C10) advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game, which is a predetermined number of execution times at the time of executing the special game, a high probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to get and
At the time of executing a certain special game, the predetermined period is longer than the period from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the next unit game at the time of executing the unit game which is the previous execution time of the predetermined execution times. The next unit game from the time when the predetermined period elapses when the unit game is executed, which is different from the previous execution time of the predetermined execution time and different from the last execution time in the special game. The period until the start of execution is shorter,
At the time of executing a certain special game, the period from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the next unit game at the time of executing the unit game which is the predetermined execution time is different from the predetermined execution time. Moreover, from the time when the predetermined period elapses to the start of execution of the unit game, which is different from the previous execution time of the predetermined execution time and different from the final execution time in the special game. The period of is shorter,
It is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) and a game ball that has been discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10).
It is configured so that the total number of game balls entered in the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) can be accumulated and measured over a plurality of unit games during the execution of the special game.
It is configured so that the total number of game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) can be accumulated and measured over a plurality of unit games during the execution of the special game.
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is less than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of excessive discharge abnormality.
The total number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) during the execution of the special game is the number of the game balls discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10). If it is larger than the total number, it is configured to detect the occurrence of insufficient discharge abnormality.
Insufficient discharge when the unit game to be executed next time is the unit game to be executed at the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the unit game to be the execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the special game. It is configured to be able to detect the occurrence of an abnormality and the occurrence of an excess discharge abnormality, and if the occurrence of an abnormality of insufficient discharge and the occurrence of an abnormality of excess discharge are not detected, a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) ) Clears the measurement result of the cumulatively measured total number of game balls entered in) and the cumulatively measured total number of game balls discharged outside the variable winning opening (for example, large winning opening C10). Is configured to
When the unit game to be executed next time is a unit game having an execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the unit game which is the execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the special game. Does not detect the occurrence of insufficient discharge abnormality and the occurrence of excessive discharge abnormality, and the cumulative total number and variable winning openings of the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) (For example, the large winning opening C10) It is configured so as not to clear the measurement result with the cumulative total number of game balls discharged to the outside.
The occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality is detected during the execution of the special game, and even if the insufficient discharge abnormality is not resolved, the execution of the special game can be terminated and the identification information is displayed in a variable manner after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to play.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B3) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can enter, and a specific area (for example, specific area C22).
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
After the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means that controls the stop display of identification information,
The result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is winning, and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is It is provided with a special game control means for executing a special game for executing a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player when the specific stop identification information belongs to a specific group.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If a ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game at the time of executing a special game, it is configured to be in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ,
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group.
The ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group becomes the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area in a unit game in the corresponding special game.
If the ball does not enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the ball goes to the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). It is configured to be able to notify that there was no entry in the ball.
When notifying that the ball has not entered the specific area (for example, the specific area C22), the notification is characterized in that it can be continued until the next special game is started. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B4) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can enter, and a specific area (for example, specific area C22).
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
Operable operating members (for example, sub-input button SB),
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the display of information.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
After the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means that controls the stop display of identification information,
The result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is winning, and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is A special game control means for executing a special game for executing a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player when the specific stop identification information belongs to a specific group.
It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S).
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If a ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game at the time of executing a special game, it is configured to be in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ,
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), and
It is provided with an information display content control means capable of displaying information on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group.
The ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group becomes the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.
It is possible to measure a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) and a game ball that has been discharged to the outside of the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10).
At the time of executing the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, there is no ball entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22), and the variable winning opening (for example, a large prize) If the total number of game balls entered in the opening C10) and the total number of game balls discharged outside the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening C10) do not match, an error is determined. And
As the state related to the progress of the game, it has at least a state in which the game is in progress and a state in which the game is not in progress and is in standby.
In the standby state, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to display predetermined information that is not displayed in the in-game state.
When a specific operation is executed on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) during the game, the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) does not display the information related to the error determination, but is in the standby state. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when a specific operation is executed on an operation member (for example, a sub input button SB), information related to the error determination can be displayed on the information display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B5) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the game is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), or it is easier to enter the ball as compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter or the open state.
A variable winning opening (for example, the second major winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided.
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first hold is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the decision content based on the first random number related to the first hold. The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit A21g).
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first special game control means for executing the first special game that may be advantageous to the player, and the first special game control means.
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is determined according to the decision content based on the second random number related to the second hold. A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit B21g).
Variable winning opening open game control for executing a variable winning opening open game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. Means and
When the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26), the second special game control means for executing the second special game that is advantageous to the player. With and
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is more variable than the normal game state and the normal game state. Has a specific game state in which is likely to be in an open state, and can be transferred to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached.
It is executed when the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball is entered in the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) because the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state. After the end of the second special game, it is possible to shift to the normal game state,
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is output when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode in the normal gaming state, and even during the specific gaming state which shifts after the end of the first special game based on the predetermined mode. The second special game is executed in a situation where the first information is continuously output in the specific game state, the second special game ends, and the normal game state is entered. Further, when the second hold remains, the pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the first information can be continuously output until all the remaining second hold is exhausted. Is.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B6) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the game is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), or it is easier to enter the ball as compared with the closed state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball (for example, the second main game starting port B10) as compared with the state in which the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A variable winning opening B (for example, a second large winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening B can enter, and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided.
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first hold is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
Changes in the first identification information related to a certain first hold When the display start condition is satisfied, the first identification information is changed in the first identification information display unit according to the decision contents based on the first random number related to the first hold. The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the first identification information after the display, and
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first special game is executed to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for the player. The first special game control means and
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is determined according to the decision content based on the second random number related to the second hold. A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit B21g).
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening open game is executed to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening B (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Variable winning opening opening game control means and
When the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26), the variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) is advantageous to the player. It is equipped with a second special game control means for executing a second special game for executing a unit game that can be in a state of being.
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is more variable than the normal game state and the normal game state. Has a specific game state in which is likely to be in an open state, and can be transferred to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached.
It is executed when the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball is entered in the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) because the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state. After the end of the second special game, it is possible to shift to the normal game state,
There is a second special game end demo period as a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game, which is the final round in the second special game, to the end of execution of the second special game.
There is a variable winning opening open game end demo period as a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game in the variable winning opening open game to the end of execution of the variable winning opening open game.
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the ball is entered in the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) because the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second special game end demo period is configured to be longer than the variable winning opening open game end demo period.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B7) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the game is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), or it is easier to enter the ball as compared with the closed state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball (for example, the second main game starting port B10) as compared with the state in which the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A variable winning opening B (for example, a second large winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening B can enter, and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided.
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first hold is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
Changes in the first identification information related to a certain first hold When the display start condition is satisfied, the first identification information is changed in the first identification information display unit according to the decision contents based on the first random number related to the first hold. The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the first identification information after the display, and
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first special game is executed to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for the player. The first special game control means and
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
Changes in the second identification information related to a certain second hold When the display start condition is satisfied, the second identification information is changed in the second identification information display unit according to the decision contents based on the second random number related to the second hold. A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the display, and
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening open game is executed to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening B (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Variable winning opening opening game control means and
When the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26), the variable winning opening A (for example, the first large winning opening C10) is advantageous to the player. It is equipped with a second special game control means for executing a second special game for executing a unit game that can be in a state of being.
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is more variable than the normal game state and the normal game state. Has a specific game state in which is likely to be in the open state, and can be shifted to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached.
It is executed when the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball is entered in the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) because the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state. After the end of the second special game, it is possible to shift to the normal game state,
There is a second special game end demo period as a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game, which is the final round in the second special game, to the end of execution of the second special game.
There is a variable winning opening open game end demo period as a waiting period from the end of execution of the unit game in the variable winning opening open game to the end of execution of the variable winning opening open game.
The period a is the variable winning opening opening demo period in the variable winning opening opening game, which is executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the normal game state.
The period b is defined as the period b of the variable winning opening opening demo period in the variable winning opening opening game, which is executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the specific game state.
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode is executed, and the ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C26). The period c is the period c for the end demonstration period of the second special game of the second special game to be executed in the case.
A variable winning opening opening game executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in a specific game state is executed, and a ball is entered in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C26). If the demo period for the end of the second special game of the second special game to be executed is the period d,
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the lengths of the period a and the period b are different, or the lengths of the period c and the period d are different.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B8) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the game is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), or it is easier to enter the ball as compared with the closed state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball (for example, the second main game starting port B10) as compared with the state in which the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second major winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C26) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second major winning opening C20) can enter, and
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, a main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, and
An information display unit that can display the effect (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the display of the effect.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first hold is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the decision content based on the first random number related to the first hold. The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit A21g).
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first special game control means for executing the first special game that may be advantageous to the player, and the first special game control means.
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is determined according to the decision content based on the second random number related to the second hold. A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit B21g).
Variable winning opening open game control for executing a variable winning opening open game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state after the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. Means and
When the variable winning opening open game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C26), the second special game control means for executing the second special game that is advantageous to the player. When,
It is provided with a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S).
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is more variable than the normal game state and the normal game state. Has a specific game state in which is likely to be in an open state, and can be transferred to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), and
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the information display content control means capable of displaying the effect on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is provided.
As the specific aspect, it has at least a first specific aspect and a second specific aspect different from the first specific aspect.
When the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is the predetermined gaming state, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first specific mode. It is executed because the effect tendency of the effect displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game A, which is the variable winning opening opening game A, and the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second specific mode. Even if the effect tendency of the effect displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game B, which is the variable winning opening opening game B, is the same, a specific area (for example, V) is executed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game A. The production tendency of the effect displayed during the execution of the second special game A, which is the second special game executed when the ball is entered into the winning opening C26), and the execution of the variable winning opening opening game B. It seems to be different from the production tendency of the effect displayed during the execution of the second special game B, which is the second special game executed when the ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C26). It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B9) is
The first entry port (for example, the first main game start opening A10) through which a game ball can enter,
It is provided with a second entry port (for example, general winning opening P10) which is different from the first entry opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter.
An error determining means for determining an error when the ball entry status to the first entry port (for example, the first main game start opening A10) or the second entry opening (for example, the general winning opening P10) is abnormal. Prepare,
In the period of the predetermined time A, when the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number a enters the first ball entry port (for example, the first main game start port A10), the first ball entry port (for example, the first main game) It is configured to determine an error related to the start port A10).
In the period of the predetermined time B, which is longer than the predetermined time A, a game ball exceeding the predetermined number b, which is larger than the predetermined number a, enters the first ball entry port (for example, the first main game start port A10). In some cases, it is configured to determine an error related to the first ball entry port (for example, the first main game start port A10).
An error regarding the second entry opening (for example, general winning opening P10) when a game ball exceeding a predetermined number a enters the second entry opening (for example, general winning opening P10) during the predetermined time C period. Is configured to determine
When a game ball exceeding a predetermined number b, which is larger than a predetermined number a, enters the second entry opening (for example, the general winning opening P10) in a predetermined time D, which is a longer period than the predetermined time C. It is configured to determine an error related to the two entry openings (for example, general winning opening P10).
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the difference between the predetermined time A and the predetermined time C is smaller than the difference between the predetermined time B and the predetermined time D.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B10) is
The first winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) and the second winning opening (for example, the general winning opening P10) where the game ball can be entered and the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10) including at least
It is provided with an out port (for example, out port D36) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is not paid out when the game ball enters.
It is possible to measure the number of game balls that have entered the first winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10).
It is possible to measure the number of game balls that have entered the second winning opening (for example, general winning opening P10).
It is possible to measure the number of game balls that have entered the out port (for example, out port D36).
The number of game balls entered into the first winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) and the number of entering and out of the game balls entered into the second winning opening (for example, general winning opening P10). It is possible to measure the total number of balls entered, which is the sum of the number of balls entered into the mouth (for example, the out opening D36) and the number of at least three balls.
It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred each time the total number of balls entered reaches a predetermined number.
The first specified number, which is a reference value for determining that the abnormality has occurred, is set in the first winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10).
A second specified number different from the first specified number, which is a reference value for determining that the abnormality has occurred in the second winning opening (for example, the general winning opening P10), is set.
When the total number of balls entered reaches the predetermined number, and the number of balls entered into the first winning opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) exceeds the first specified number. Is configured to determine that the above abnormality has occurred.
When the total number of balls entered reaches the predetermined number, and the number of gaming balls entered into the second winning opening (for example, general winning opening P10) exceeds the second specified number, the abnormality It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to determine that is occurring.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (B11) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can enter, and a specific area (for example, specific area C22).
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10).
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
After the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means that controls the stop display of identification information,
The result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is winning, and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is It is provided with a special game control means for executing a special game for executing a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player when the specific stop identification information belongs to a specific group.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If a ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game at the time of executing a special game, it is configured to be in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ,
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group.
The ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group becomes the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.
It is configured to be able to output the first information as external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside.
The first information is output when the first ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) at the time of executing a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. Is configured to
The first information is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the output is terminated after a certain period of time has passed since the output.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B second main game start port entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start MJ11-C10 1st big prize mouth entry judgment means, MJ11-C20 2nd big prize mouth entrance judgment means MJ11-C80 Out mouth entry judgment means, MJ11-C90 Total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11c- 90 Total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ10b Ball entry related information Temporary storage means MJ10c Ball entry number counter, MJ10c-A 1st main game start port entry number counter MJ10c2-A 1st main game start port confirmation counter, MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment Execution means MJ21-A 1st main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Hold control means MJ31 Hold digestion control means, MJ31j Fluctuation Start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 symbol holding means, MJ32-A first main game symbol holding means MJ32b-A first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main Game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determination means MN10 winning / failing lottery means, MN11-A first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11ta- A 1st main game win / loss lottery table, MN11-B 2nd main game win / loss lottery means MN11ta-B 2nd main game win / loss lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11ta-H auxiliary game win / loss lottery table, MN40 symbol content determination means MN41-A first main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B second main game symbol determination lottery Table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Variable mode determination means, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress Means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management Timer, MP20-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means, MP22t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP22t2 No. 2 Main game start opening ball entry standby timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C 1st and 2nd big winning opening electric Accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP34t2 opening timer, MP34t3 big winning opening ball entry standby timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 probability change end condition determination means MP52 time saving end condition Judgment means, MP52c Time reduction counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H Auxiliary game state Temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game-related information Temporary storage means MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means, ME fraud detection information management means MEb Fraud-related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MG external signal output control means MH prize ball payout determination means, MHsj payout information transmission / reception means MHsjb payout command temporary storage means, MHc prize ball counter MHb unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means NT10c 1st main game Start opening ball entry rate counter, NT20c 2nd main game Start opening ball entry rate counter N10c 1st main game short-term entry rate counter, N20c 1st main game long-term entry rate counter NT30c Left (right) General winning opening ball entry rate Counter, NT31c Left general winning opening ball entry rate counter NT32c Right general winning opening ball entry rate counter N30c Left (right) General winning opening short-term entry rate counter, N40c Left (right) General winning opening long-term entry rate counter N31c Left general Winning opening short-term entry rate counter, N32c Right general winning opening Short-term entry rate counter N41c Left general winning opening long-term entry rate counter, N42c Right general winning opening long-term entry rate counter K10t 1st Main game short-term confirmation timer, K20t 1st main game long-term confirmation timer K31t Left general short-term confirmation timer, K32t Right general short-term confirmation timer,
K41t left general long-term confirmation timer, K42t right general long-term confirmation timer,
1173t discharge standby timer, R10t round standby timer 1173b discharge confirmation counter, ER10c error counter MJ10c-A 1st main game start port entry number counter, NO10c out port entry rate counter A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main Game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A11s2 1st main game start port confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit , B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start port, B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main Game symbol display unit, B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric combination Object C20 2nd prize opening, C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd prize opening electric accessory, C80 out port C80s out port entry ball detection device, C90s total discharge confirmation sensor H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for determining design fluctuation content SM21b design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Drawing fluctuation time management timer SM22 Drawing hold information display control means, SM22b Drawing hold information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means, SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determining means, SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 Reach effect display control means, SM25n Reach effect display content determining means SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 Error notification control means SM31 Error Generation determination means, SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative symbol Display area, SG12 1st hold display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device C19 Discharge ball detection device, D30 Game area C22 Specific area, C24 Shielding member C19 Discharge ball detection device, AC12 Large Winning opening winning detection device BC14 Large winning opening winning detection device

Claims (1)

A starting port where a game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
Equipped with an identification information display unit that can display identification information
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means that controls the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display unit.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening may be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls have been entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined period has elapsed. It is equipped with a special game control means that can execute a special game that executes a unit game multiple times.
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability. Has a high probability lottery state with a high probability
If there is a ball entering a specific area during the execution of a unit game, which is a predetermined number of executions during the execution of the special game, the lottery state can be set to a high probability after the execution of the special game is completed .
It is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening and a game ball that has been discharged outside the variable winning opening.
When the total number of game balls entered into the variable winning opening during the execution of a special game is less than the total number of game balls discharged outside the variable winning opening, the occurrence of excessive discharge abnormality can be detected. It is composed and
When the total number of game balls entered into the variable winning opening during the execution of a special game is larger than the total number of game balls discharged outside the variable winning opening, the occurrence of insufficient discharge abnormality can be detected. It is composed and
When the unit game to be executed next time is a unit game having an execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the unit game which is the execution time other than the predetermined execution time at the time of executing the special game. Is configured to detect the occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality when the next unit game to be executed is a unit game in which the predetermined execution times are performed.
The occurrence of an insufficient discharge abnormality is detected during the execution of the special game, and even if the insufficient discharge abnormality is not resolved, the execution of the special game can be completed and the identification information is fluctuated after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to be able to
The detection of the game ball entered in the variable winning opening and the game ball discharged outside the variable winning opening is interrupted without clearing the detection result over the unit game of all execution times during the execution of the special game. A pachinko game machine that is configured to be able to run continuously without any problems.

Images